This is a modern-English version of Electric Bells and All About Them: A Practical Book for Practical Men, originally written by Bottone, Selimo Romeo.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
Transcriber's Notes
Inconsistent spellings (e.g. depolariser & depolarizer) and hyphenation (e.g. guttapercha & gutta-percha) are retained as in the original text. Minor punctuation errors are corrected without comment. Changes which have been made to the text (in the case of typographical errors) are listed at the end of the book.
Inconsistent spellings (e.g., depolariser & depolarizer) and hyphenation (e.g., guttapercha & gutta-percha) are kept as in the original text. Minor punctuation errors are fixed without comment. Changes made to the text (in the case of typographical errors) are listed at the end of the book.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
ELECTRIC BELLS AND
ALL ABOUT THEM.
A Practical Book for Practical Men.
A Useful Book for Realistic People.
WITH MORE THAN 100 ILLUSTRATIONS.
OVER 100 ILLUSTRATIONS.
BY S. R. BOTTONE,
BY S. R. BOTTONE,
CERTIFICATED BY SOUTH KENSINGTON (LATE OF THE COLLEGIO DEL CARMINE, TURIN, AND OF THE ISTITUTO BELLINO, NOVARA);
CERTIFICATED BY SOUTH KENSINGTON (FORMERLY OF THE COLLEGIO DEL CARMINE, TURIN, AND OF THE ISTITUTO BELLINO, NOVARA);
Author of "The Dynamo," "Electrical Instruments for Amateurs," &c.
Author of "The Dynamo," "Electrical Instruments for Amateurs," etc.
LONDON: WHITTAKER & CO., Paternoster Square, E.C.
LONDON: WHITTAKER & CO., Paternoster Square, London, EC
1889.
1889.
(All rights reserved.)
All rights reserved.
PREFACE.
So rapidly has the use of electric bells and similiar signalling appliances extended, in modern houses, offices, hotels, lifts, and ships, that every bell-fitter must have felt the need of accurate knowledge of the manner in which these instruments act and are made.
So quickly has the use of electric bells and similar signaling devices spread in modern homes, offices, hotels, elevators, and ships, that every bell installer must recognize the need for a clear understanding of how these devices work and are constructed.
In the following pages the author has attempted to supply this need, by giving full details as to the construction of batteries, bells, pushes, detectors, etc., the mode of wiring, testing, connecting up, localizing faults, and, in point of fact, by directing careful attention to every case that can present itself to the electric-bell fitter.
In the following pages, the author has tried to meet this need by providing complete details on how to build batteries, bells, buttons, detectors, and more, including how to wire, test, connect, pinpoint issues, and, essentially, by focusing on every situation that an electric bell installer might encounter.
Carshalton, Surrey,
November, 1888.
Carshalton, Surrey,
November 1888.
CONTENTS.
chap. | page | ||
I. | Preliminary Considerations | 1 | |
II. | On the Choice of Batteries for Electric Bell Work | 18 | |
III. | On Electric Bells and other Signalling Appliances | 59 | |
IV. | On Contacts, Pushes, Switches, Keys, Alarms, and Relays | 109 | |
V. | On Wiring, Connecting up, and Localising Faults | 144 |
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
Fig. | Page | ||
1. | Direction of current in cell | 9 | |
2. | Direction of current out of cell | 10 | |
3. | Bar and horse-shoe magnets | 14 | |
4. | The Dynamo | 16 | |
5. | The Smee cell | 28 | |
6. | The Daniell cell | 30 | |
7. | The Gravity cell | 32 | |
8. | The Leclanché cell and parts | 34 | |
9. | The Agglomerate cell | 40 | |
10. | The Judson cell | 42 | |
11. | The Battery in box | 43 | |
12. | The Gent cell | 44 | |
13. | The Bichromate cell | 48 | |
14. | The Fuller cell | 50 | |
15. | The Cells coupled in series | 54 | |
16. | The Cells coupled in Parallel | 57 | |
17. | Outline of electric bell | 61 | |
18. | Frame of bell | 62 | |
19. | E-shaped frame | 63 | |
20. | Electro-magnet, old form | 64 | |
20A. | Electro-magnet, modern form | 65 | |
21. | Magnet frame | 66 | |
21A. | Winder | 72 | |
22. | Mode of joining electromagnet wires | 73 | |
23. | Armature spring | 74 | |
24. | Armature spring Another form | 74 | |
25. | Platinum tipped screw | 75 | |
26. | Platinum tipped spring | 76 | |
27. | Binding screws | 77 | |
28. | Bell or gong | 78 | |
29. | Pillar and nuts | 78 | |
30. | Washers | 78 | |
31. | Trembling bell | 81 | |
32. | Bell action enclosed in case | 88 | |
33. | Ordinary trembling bells | 90 | |
34. | Single stroke bell | 91 | |
35. | Continuous ring bell | 94 | |
36. | Release action | 95 | |
37. | Continuous ringing with relay | 96 | |
38. | Continuous ringing action with indicator | 97 | |
39. | Relay and detent lever for indicator | 97 | |
40. | Callow's attachment | 99 | |
40A. | Thorpe's arrangement | 101 | |
41. | Jensen bell, section | 102 | |
42. | Jensen bell, exterior | 104 | |
43A. | Circular bell | 106 | |
43B. | Mining bell | 106 | |
44. | Electric trumpet (Binswanger's) | 107 | |
45. | Various forms of pushes | 110 | |
46. | Pressel | 111 | |
47. | Pull | 112 | |
48. | Bedroom pull | 113 | |
49A. | Bedroom pull Another form | 114[Pg viii] | |
49B. | Floor contact, ball form | 114 | |
50. | Burglar alarm | 115 | |
51. | Burglar alarm Another form | 115 | |
52. | Floor contact | 115 | |
53. | Door contact | 116 | |
54. | Sash contact | 117 | |
55. | Shop door contact | 117 | |
56A. | Closed circuit system, single | 119 | |
56B. | Closed circuit system, double | 119 | |
57. | Modified gravity, Daniell | 120 | |
58. | Contact for closed circuit | 121 | |
59. | Thermometer alarm | 122 | |
60. | Fire alarm | 123 | |
61A. | Fire alarm Another form | 123 | |
61B. | Fire alarm Another form in action | 123 | |
62. | Binswanger's "watch alarm" contact | 125 | |
63. | Watchman's electric tell-tale clock | 126 | |
64. | Lever switch, two-way | 128 | |
65. | Morse key, double contact | 133 | |
66. | Relay | 134 | |
67. | Indicator, drop | 137 | |
68. | Indicator, Semaphore | 138 | |
69. | Indicator, Fall back | 139 | |
70. | Indicator, Pendulum | 140 | |
71. | Indicator, Coupled up | 142 | |
72. | Indicator, Gent's tripolar | 143 | |
73. | Soldering iron and wires | 148 | |
74. | Push, interior of | 151 | |
75. | Bell, battery and push | 159 | |
76. | Bell, battery and push And earth return | 160 | |
77. | Bell, and two pushes | 161 | |
78. | Bell, two pushes and one pull | 161 | |
79. | Two bells in parallel | 162 | |
80. | Two bells in parallel Another mode | 162 | |
81. | Two bells in parallel with two-way switch | 163 | |
82. | Series coupler | 163 | |
83. | Bell with local battery and relay | 164 | |
84. | Continuous ringing bell with wire return | 165 | |
85. | Bells with Morse keys for signalling | 165 | |
86. | Bells with double contact pushes for signalling | 166 | |
87. | Bells with double contact with one battery only | 167 | |
88. | Two-way signalling with one battery only | 168 | |
89. | Complete installation of bells, batteries, pushes, etc. | 169 | |
90. | Mode of getting out plan or design | 170 | |
91. | Lift fitted with bells | 173 | |
92. | Magneto bell: generator | 174 | |
93. | Magneto bell: Receiver | 175 | |
94. | Magneto bell: Combined | 176 | |
95. | Detector or galvanometer | 176 |
ELECTRIC BELLS.
CHAPTER I.
PRELIMINARY CONSIDERATIONS.
§ 1. Electricity.—The primary cause of all the effects which we are about to consider resides in a force known as electricity, from the Greek name of amber (electron), this being the body in which the manifestations were first observed. The ancients were acquainted with a few detached facts, such as the attractive power acquired by amber after friction; the benumbing shocks given by the torpedo; the aurora borealis; the lightning flash; and the sparks or streams of light which, under certain conditions, are seen to issue from the human body. Thales, a Grecian philosopher, who flourished about 600 years B.C., observed the former of these facts, but nearly twenty centuries elapsed before it was suspected that any connection existed between these phenomena.
§ 1. Electricity.—The main reason for all the effects we are about to explore comes from a force known as electricity, named after the Greek word for amber (electron), which is where these effects were first noticed. Ancient people were aware of a few isolated facts, such as the attractive force amber gains when rubbed, the numbing shocks from the torpedo fish, the aurora borealis, lightning, and the sparks or streams of light that can occasionally be seen coming from the human body. Thales, a Greek philosopher who lived around 600 years B.C., observed the first of these facts, but it took nearly two thousand years before anyone suspected there was a connection between these phenomena.
§ 2. According to the present state of our knowledge,[Pg 2] it would appear that electricity is a mode of motion in the constituent particles (or atoms) of bodies very similar to, if not identical with, heat and light. These, like sound, are known to be dependent on undulatory motion; but, whilst sound is elicited by the vibration of a body as a whole, electricity appears to depend, in its manifestations, upon some motion (whether rotary, oscillatory, or undulatory, it is not known) of the atoms themselves.
§ 2. Based on what we currently know,[Pg 2] it seems that electricity is a form of movement in the particles (or atoms) of materials that is very similar to, if not the same as, heat and light. These, like sound, are understood to depend on wave-like motion; however, while sound is produced by the vibration of a body as a whole, electricity seems to rely, in its effects, on some kind of motion (whether it’s rotary, oscillatory, or wave-like isn’t clear) of the atoms themselves.
However this be, it is certain that whatever tends to set up molecular motion, tends also to call forth a display of electricity. Hence we have several practical means at our disposal for evoking electrical effects. These may be conveniently divided into three classes, viz.:—1st, mechanical; 2nd, chemical; 3rd, changes of temperature. Among the mechanical may be ranged friction, percussion, vibration, trituration, cleavage, etc. Among the chemical we note the action of acids and alkalies upon metals. Every chemical action is accompanied by electrical effects; but not all such actions are convenient sources of electricity. Changes of temperature, whether sudden or gradual, call forth electricity, but the displays are generally more striking in the former than in the latter case, owing to the accumulated effect being presented in a shorter time.
However this may be, it's clear that anything that causes molecular motion also tends to generate electrical activity. Therefore, we have several practical methods available to create electrical effects. These can be conveniently grouped into three categories: 1st, mechanical; 2nd, chemical; and 3rd, temperature changes. Under mechanical, we include friction, percussion, vibration, grinding, cleaving, etc. Under chemical, we observe the effects of acids and bases on metals. Every chemical reaction produces electrical effects; however, not all of these reactions are practical sources of electricity. Temperature changes, whether sudden or gradual, also generate electricity, although the effects are generally more noticeable in the former due to the accumulated effect occurring in a shorter time.
If we rub any resinous substance (such as amber, copal, resin, sealing-wax, ebonite, etc.) with a piece of[Pg 3] warm, dry flannel, we shall find that it acquires the power of attracting light bodies, such as small pieces of paper, straw, pith, etc. After remaining in contact with the rubbed (or electrified) substance for a short time, the paper, etc., will fly off as if repelled; and this apparent repulsion will be more evident and more quickly produced if the experiment be performed over a metal tray. If a small pith-ball, the size of a pea, be suspended from the ceiling by a piece of fine cotton, previously damped and then approached by an ebonite comb which has been briskly rubbed, it will be vigorously attracted, and never repelled; but if for the cotton there be substituted a thread or fibre of very fine dry silk, the pith-ball will be first attracted and then repelled. This is owing to the fact that the damp cotton allows the electricity to escape along it: id est, damp cotton is a CONDUCTOR of electricity, while silk does not permit its dissipation; or, in other words, silk is a NON-CONDUCTOR. All bodies with which we are acquainted are found, on trial, to fall under one or other of the two heads—viz., conductors and non-conductors. Nature knows no hard lines, so that we find that even the worst conductors will permit the escape of some electricity, while the very best conductors oppose a measurable resistance to its passage. Between the limits of good conductors, on the one hand, and non-conductors (or insulators) on the other, we have bodies possessing varying degrees of conductivity.
If we rub any resinous material (like amber, copal, resin, sealing wax, ebonite, etc.) with a piece of warm, dry flannel, we'll see it gain the ability to attract light objects, such as small bits of paper, straw, or pith. After being in contact with the rubbed (or charged) material for a short while, the paper, etc., will fly off as if pushed away; this apparent repulsion becomes more noticeable and happens faster if the experiment is done over a metal tray. If you hang a small pith ball, about the size of a pea, from the ceiling using a piece of fine damp cotton and then bring it close to an ebonite comb that has been vigorously rubbed, it will be strongly attracted and never pushed away. However, if you replace the cotton with a very fine dry silk thread, the pith ball will first be attracted and then pushed away. This happens because the damp cotton allows electricity to escape along it: in other words, damp cotton is a LEADER of electricity, while silk doesn’t let it escape; so, silk is a NON-CONDUCTOR. All materials we know fall into one of these two categories—conductors and non-conductors. Nature doesn't draw strict lines, meaning even the poorest conductors allow some electricity to pass, while the best conductors show a measurable resistance to its flow. Between good conductors on one side and non-conductors (or insulators) on the other, we find materials with varying levels of conductivity.
§ 4. As a knowledge of which bodies are, and which are not, conductors of electricity is absolutely essential[Pg 4] to every one aspiring to apply electricity to any practical purpose, the following table is subjoined, giving the names of the commoner bodies, beginning with those which most readily transmit electricity, or are good conductors, and ending with those which oppose the highest resistance to its passage, or are insulators, or non-conductors:—
§ 4. Understanding which materials are conductors of electricity and which are not is crucial for anyone looking to use electricity for practical purposes. Below is a table listing common materials, starting with those that easily transmit electricity, or are considered good conductors, and ending with those that resist electricity the most, or are insulators, or non-conductors:—
Quality. | Name of Substance. | Relative Resistance. | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
Good Conductors | Silver, annealed | 1. | ||
Copper, annealed | 1.063 | |||
Silver, hard drawn | 1.086 | |||
Copper, hard drawn | 1.086 | |||
Gold, annealed | 1.369 | |||
Gold, hard drawn | 1.393 | |||
Aluminium, annealed | 1.935 | |||
Zinc, pressed | 3.741 | |||
Brass (variable) | 5.000 | |||
Platinum, annealed | 6.022 | |||
Iron | 6.450 | |||
Steel, soft | 6.500 | |||
Gold and silver alloy, 2 to 1 | 7.228 | |||
Nickel, annealed | 8.285 | |||
Tin, pressed | 8.784 | |||
Lead, pressed | 13.050 | |||
German silver (variable) | 13.920 | |||
Platinum-silver alloy, 1 to 2 | 16.210 | |||
Steel, hard | 25.000 | |||
Antimony, pressed | 23.600 | |||
Mercury | 62.730 | |||
Bismuth | 87.230 | |||
Graphite | 145.000 | |||
Nitric Acid | 976000.000 | |||
Imperfect Conductors | Hydrochloric acid | [1] | ||
Sulphuriacid | 1032020.000 | |||
Solutions of metallic salts | varies with strength | |||
Metallic sulphides | [1] | |||
Distilled water | [1] 6754208.000 | |||
Inferior Conductors. | Metallic salts, solid | [1] | ||
Linen | I'm ready for the text. Please provide it. | and other forms of cellulose | [1] | |
Cotton | ||||
Hemp | ||||
Paper | ||||
Alcohol | [1] | |||
Ether | [1] | |||
Dry Wood | [1] | |||
Dry Ice | [1] | |||
Metallic Oxides | [1] | |||
Non-conductors, or Insulators. | Ice, at 25 c. | [1] | ||
Fats and oils | [1] | |||
Caoutchouc | 1000000000000. | |||
Guttapercha | 1000000000000. | |||
Dry air, gases, and vapours | [1] | |||
Wool | [1] | |||
Ebonite | 1300000000000. | |||
Diamond | [1] | |||
Silk | [1] | |||
Glass | [1] | |||
Wax | [1] | |||
Sulphur | [1] | |||
Resin | [1] | |||
Amber | [1] | |||
Shellac | [1] | |||
Paraffin | 1500000000000. |
[1] These have not been accurately measured.
These haven't been measured correctly.
The figures given as indicating the relative resistance of the above bodies to the passage of electricity must be taken as approximate only, since the conductivity of all these bodies varies very largely with their purity, and with the temperature. Metals become worse conductors when heated; liquids and non-metals, on the contrary, become better conductors.
The numbers shown to indicate how well the above materials resist the flow of electricity are only rough estimates because the conductivity of all these materials changes significantly based on their purity and temperature. Metals become poorer conductors when heated; on the other hand, liquids and non-metals become better conductors.
It must be borne in mind that dry air is one of the[Pg 6] best insulators, or worst conductors, with which we are acquainted; while damp air, on the contrary, owing to the facility with which it deposits water on the surface of bodies, is highly conducive to the escape of electricity.
It’s important to remember that dry air is one of the[Pg 6] best insulators, or worst conductors, that we know; while damp air, on the other hand, is very good at allowing water to settle on surfaces, which makes it easier for electricity to escape.
§ 6. If the experiment described at § 3 be repeated, substituting a glass rod for the ebonite comb, it will be found that the pith-ball will be first attracted and then repelled, as in the case with the ebonite; and if of two similar pith-balls, each suspended by a fibre of silk, one be treated with the excited ebonite and the other with the glass rod, until repulsion occurs, and then approached to each other, the two balls will be found to attract each other. This proves that the electrical condition of the excited ebonite and of the excited glass must be different; for had it been the same, the two balls would have repelled one another. Farther, it will be found that the rubber with which the ebonite or the glass rod have been excited has also acquired electrical properties, attracting the pith-ball, previously repelled by the rod. From this we may gather that when one body acting on another, either mechanically or chemically, sets up an electrical condition in one of the two bodies, a similar electrical condition, but in the opposite sense, is produced in the other: in point of fact, that it is impossible to excite any one body without exciting a corresponding but opposite state in the other. (We may take, as a rough mechanical illustration of this, the effect which is produced on the pile of two pieces of plush or fur, on being drawn across one another in opposite directions. On examination we shall find that[Pg 7] both the piles have been laid down, the upper in the one direction, the lower in the other.) For a long time these two electrical states were held to depend upon two distinct electricities, which were called respectively vitreous and resinous, to indicate the nature of the bodies from which they were derived. Later on (when it was found that the theory of a single electricity could be made to account for all the phenomena, provided it was granted that some electrified bodies acquired more, while others acquired less than their natural share of electricity), the two states were known as positive and negative; and these names are still retained, although it is pretty generally conceded that electricity is not an entity in itself, but simply a mode of motion.
§ 6. If the experiment outlined at § 3 is repeated, using a glass rod instead of the ebonite comb, you'll notice that the pith-ball will first be attracted and then repelled, just like with the ebonite. If you take two similar pith-balls, each hanging by a silk thread, and energize one with the charged ebonite and the other with the glass rod until repulsion happens, and then bring them close together, the two balls will attract each other. This shows that the electrical states of the charged ebonite and the charged glass are different; if they were the same, the two balls would repel each other. Additionally, it will be observed that the rubber used to energize either the ebonite or the glass rod has also gained electrical properties, attracting the pith-ball that was previously repelled by the rod. From this, we can conclude that when one object interacts with another, either mechanically or chemically, it creates an electrical condition in one body, which in turn produces a similar electrical condition but in the opposite sense in the other. In fact, it’s impossible to excite one body without causing a corresponding but opposite reaction in the other. (A rough mechanical analogy for this can be seen in the effect produced on two pieces of plush or fur when they are rubbed against each other in opposite directions. Upon examination, we will find that[Pg 7] both pieces have laid down, with the upper piece in one direction and the lower in the other.) For a long time, these two electrical states were thought to come from two distinct types of electricity, labeled respectively vitreous and resinous, based on the materials they were derived from. Later (when it was discovered that a single electricity theory could explain all the phenomena, as long as it accepted that some electrified bodies gained more while others gained less than their natural amount of electricity), these two states were termed positive and negative; these terms are still used today, even though it is generally accepted that electricity is not an entity in itself but merely a form of motion.
§ 7. It is usual, in treatises on electricity, to give a long list of the substances which acquire a positive or a negative condition when rubbed against one another. Such a table is of very little use, since the slightest modification in physical condition will influence very considerably the result. For example: if two similar sheets of glass be rubbed over one another, no change in electrical condition is produced; but if one be roughed while the other is left polished, this latter becomes positively, while the former becomes negatively, electrified. So, also, if one sheet of glass be warmed, while the other be left cold, the colder becomes positively, and the latter negatively, excited. As a general law, that body, the particles of which are more easily displaced, becomes negatively electrified.
§ 7. In discussions about electricity, it’s common to provide a long list of materials that become positively or negatively charged when rubbed together. However, this list is quite unhelpful, as even slight changes in physical conditions can significantly affect the results. For example, if you rub two identical sheets of glass against each other, there’s no change in electrical charge. But if you rough up one sheet while leaving the other shiny, the shiny one becomes positively charged, and the rough one becomes negatively charged. Similarly, if one sheet of glass is warmed and the other stays cold, the cold one becomes positively charged while the warm one becomes negatively charged. As a general rule, the material with particles that are more easily moved becomes negatively charged.
§ 8. As, however, the electricity set up by friction[Pg 8] has not hitherto found any practical application in electric bell-ringing or signalling, we need not to go more deeply into this portion of the subject, but pass at once to the electricity elicited by the action of acids, or their salts, on metals.
§ 8. However, since the electricity generated by friction[Pg 8] has not yet been used in practical applications like electric bells or signaling, we don’t need to explore this part of the topic further. Instead, let's move on to the electricity produced by the interaction of acids, or their salts, with metals.
Here, as might be expected from the law enunciated above, the metal more acted on by the acid becomes negatively electrified, while the one less acted on becomes positive.[2] The following table, copied from Ganot, gives an idea of the electrical condition which the commoner metals and graphite assume when two of them are immersed at the same time in dilute acid:—
Here, as you would expect from the law stated above, the metal that reacts more with the acid becomes negatively charged, while the one that reacts less becomes positively charged.[2] The following table, taken from Ganot, shows the electrical condition that more common metals and graphite take on when two of them are submerged together in dilute acid:—
The portion immersed in the acid fluid. | ⎧ | ↓ | Zinc. | ↑ | ⎫ | The portion out of the acid fluid. |
⎪ | ↓ | Cadmium. | ↑ | ⎪ | ||
⎪ | ↓ | Tin. | ↑ | ⎪ | ||
⎪ | ↓ | Lead. | ↑ | ⎪ | ||
⎪ | ↓ | Iron. | ↑ | ⎪ | ||
⎪ | ↓ | Nickel. | ↑ | ⎪ | ||
⎪ | ↓ | Bismuth. | ↑ | ⎪ | ||
⎪ | ↓ | Antimony. | ↑ | ⎪ | ||
⎪ | ↓ | Copper. | ↑ | ⎪ | ||
⎪ | ↓ | Silver. | ↑ | ⎪ | ||
⎪ | ↓ | Gold. | ↑ | ⎪ | ||
⎪ | ↓ | Platinum. | ↑ | ⎪ | ||
⎩ | ↓ | Graphite. | ↑ | ⎭ |
The meaning of the above table is, that if we test the electrical condition of any two of its members when immersed in an acid fluid, we shall find that the ones at the head of the list are positive to those below them, but negative to those above them, if the test have reference to the condition of the parts within the fluid. On the[Pg 9] contrary, we shall find that any member of the list will be found to be negative to any one below it, or positive to any above it, if tested from the portion NOT immersed in the acid fluid.
The meaning of the above table is that if we test the electrical condition of any two members while they are immersed in an acid solution, we will find that those at the top of the list are positive compared to those below them, but negative compared to those above them, if the test refers to the condition of the parts within the fluid. On the contrary, we will find that any member of the list will be negative compared to any one below it, or positive compared to any above it, if tested from the portion NOT immersed in the acid solution.
§ 9. A very simple experiment will make this quite clear. Two strips, one of copper and the other of zinc, 1" wide by 4" long, have a 12" length of copper wire soldered to one extremity of each. A small flat piece of cork, about 1" long by 1" square section, is placed between the two plates, at the end where the wires have been soldered, this portion being then lashed together by a few turns of waxed string. (The plates should not touch each other at any point.) If this combination (which constitutes a very primitive galvanic couple) be[Pg 10] immersed in a tumbler three-parts filled with water, rendered just sour by the addition of a few drops of sulphuric or hydrochloric acid, we shall get a manifestation of electrical effects. If a delicately poised magnetic needle be allowed to take up its natural position of north and south, and then the wires proceeding from the two metal strips twisted in contact, so as to be parallel to and over the needle, as shown in Fig. 1, the needle will be impelled out of its normal position, and be deflected more or less out of the line of[Pg 11] the wire. If the needle be again allowed to come to rest N. and S. (the battery or couple having been removed), and then the tumbler be held close over the needle, as in Fig. 2, so that the needle points from the copper to the zinc strip, the needle will be again impelled or deflected out of its natural position, but in this case in the opposite direction.
§ 9. A very simple experiment will make this quite clear. Take two strips, one made of copper and the other of zinc, each 1" wide and 4" long, and solder a 12" length of copper wire to one end of each. Place a small flat piece of cork, about 1" long and 1" square, between the two plates, at the end where the wires are soldered, and then tie them together with a few turns of waxed string. (Make sure the plates do not touch each other at any point.) If this setup (which forms a very basic galvanic couple) is submerged in a glass three-quarters filled with water, slightly acidified by adding a few drops of sulfuric or hydrochloric acid, we will observe some electrical effects. If a delicately balanced magnetic needle is allowed to settle in its natural north-south position, and then the wires from the two metal strips are twisted together and placed above the needle, as shown in Fig. 1, the needle will be pushed out of its normal position and deflected somewhat away from the line of the wire. If the needle is allowed to come to rest N. and S. (after removing the battery or couple), and then the glass is held close over the needle, as shown in Fig. 2, so that the needle points from the copper strip to the zinc strip, the needle will again be pushed or deflected from its natural position, but this time in the opposite direction.
§ 10. It is a well-known fact that if a wire, or any other conductor, along which the electric undulation (or, as is usually said, the electric current) is passing, be brought over and parallel to a suspended magnetic needle, pointing north and south, the needle is immediately deflected from this north and south position, and assumes a new direction, more or less east and west, according to the amplitude of the current and the nearness of the conductor to the needle. Moreover, the direction in which the north pole of the needle is impelled is found to be dependent upon the direction in which the electric waves (or current) enter the conducting body or wire. The law which regulates the direction of these deflections, and which is known, from the name of its originator, as Ampère's law, is briefly as follows:—
§ 10. It’s a well-known fact that if a wire or any other conductor carrying electric current is placed parallel to a suspended magnetic needle that’s pointing north and south, the needle is immediately deflected from that north-south position and takes on a new direction, typically more east and west, depending on the strength of the current and how close the conductor is to the needle. Additionally, the direction in which the north pole of the needle moves is determined by the direction of the electric waves (or current) entering the conductor or wire. The rule that governs the direction of these deflections, known as Ampère's law after its creator, is summarized as follows:—
§ 11. "If a current be caused to flow over and parallel to a freely suspended magnetic needle, previously pointing north and south, the north pole will be impelled to the LEFT of the entering current. If, on the contrary, the wire, or conductor, be placed below the needle, the deflection will, under similar circumstances, be in the opposite direction, viz.: the[Pg 12] north pole will be impelled to the RIGHT of the entering current." In both these cases the observer is supposed to be looking along the needle, with its N. seeking pole pointing at him.
§ 11. "If a current flows over and parallel to a freely hanging magnetic needle that is initially pointing north and south, the north pole will be pushed to the LEFT of the entering current. Conversely, if the wire or conductor is placed below the needle, the deflection, under the same conditions, will be in the opposite direction, meaning the north pole will be pushed to the RIGHT of the entering current." In both scenarios, the observer is assumed to be looking along the needle, with its N. seeking pole pointing towards them.
§ 13. A property of current electricity, which is the fundamental basis of electric bell-ringing, is that of conferring upon iron and steel the power of attracting iron and similar bodies, or, as it is usually said, of rendering iron magnetic. If a soft iron rod, say about 4" long by ½" diameter, be wound evenly from end to end with three or four layers of cotton-covered copper wire, say No. 20 gauge, and placed in proximity to a few iron nails, etc., no attractive power will be evinced; but let the two free ends of the wire be placed in metallic contact with the wires leading from the simple battery described at § 9, and it will be found that the iron has become powerfully magnetic, capable of sustaining several ounces weight of iron and steel, so long as the wires from the battery are in contact with the wire encircling the iron; or, in other words, "the soft iron is a magnet, so long as an electric current flows round it." If contact between the battery wires and the coiled wires[Pg 13] be broken, the iron loses all magnetic power, and the nails, etc., drop off immediately. A piece of soft iron thus coiled with covered or "insulated" wire, no matter what its shape may be, is termed an "electro-magnet." Their chief peculiarities, as compared with the ordinary permanent steel magnets or lodestones, are, first, their great attractive and sustaining power; secondly, the rapidity, nay, instantaneity, with which they lose all attractive force on the cessation of the electric flow around them. It is on these two properties that their usefulness in bell-ringing depends.
§ 13. A property of current electricity, which is the basic principle behind electric bells, is its ability to give iron and steel the power to attract iron and similar materials, or, as it's commonly said, to make iron magnetic. If you take a soft iron rod, approximately 4 inches long and ½ inch in diameter, and evenly wrap three or four layers of cotton-covered copper wire, about No. 20 gauge, around it, and place it near a few iron nails, it won’t show any attractive power. However, if you connect the two free ends of the wire to the wires from the simple battery described at § 9, you’ll find that the iron has become highly magnetic, able to hold several ounces of iron and steel, as long as the wires from the battery are connected to the wire wrapped around the iron; in other words, "the soft iron is a magnet as long as an electric current flows through it." If the connection between the battery wires and the coiled wires[Pg 13] is broken, the iron loses all its magnetic power, and the nails, etc., fall off immediately. A piece of soft iron that is coiled with insulated wire, regardless of its shape, is called an "electro-magnet." Their main distinctive features, compared to ordinary permanent steel magnets or lodestones, are, first, their strong attractive and holding power; secondly, the speed, even instantaneously, with which they lose all attractive force when the electric current stops flowing around them. It is these two properties that make them useful in bell-ringing.
§ 14. If, instead of using a soft iron bar in the above experiment, we had substituted one of hard iron, or steel, we should have found two remarkable differences in the results. In the first place, the bar would have been found to retain its magnetism instead of losing it immediately on contact with the battery being broken; and, in the second place, the attractive power elicited would have been much less than in the case of soft iron. It is therefore of the highest importance, in all cases where rapid and powerful magnetisation is desired, that the cores of the electro-magnets should be of the very softest iron. Long annealing and gradual cooling conduce greatly to the softness of iron.
§ 14. If, instead of using a soft iron bar in the above experiment, we had substituted it with one made of hard iron or steel, we would have noticed two significant differences in the results. First, the bar would have retained its magnetism rather than losing it immediately when the battery was disconnected. Second, the magnetic attraction generated would have been much weaker compared to soft iron. Therefore, it’s crucial that for any situation where quick and strong magnetization is needed, the cores of the electromagnets should be made from the softest iron available. Long annealing and gradual cooling greatly enhance the softness of iron.
§ 15. There is yet another source of electricity which must be noticed here, as it has already found application in some forms of electric bells and signalling, and which promises to enter into more extended use. If we sprinkle some iron filings over a bar magnet, or a horse-shoe magnet, we shall find that the filings arrange[Pg 14] themselves in a definite position along the lines of greatest attractive force; or, as scientists usually say, the iron filings arrange themselves in the direction of the lines of force. The entire space acted on by the magnet is usually known as its "field." Fig. 3 gives an idea of the distribution of the iron filings, and also of the general direction of the lines of force. It is found that if a body be moved before the poles of a magnet in such a direction as to cut the lines of force, electricity is excited in that body, and also around the magnet. The ordinary magneto-electric machines of the shops are illustrations of the application of this property of magnets. They consist essentially in a horse-shoe[Pg 15] magnet, in front of which is caused to rotate, by means of appropriate gearing, or wheel and band, an iron bobbin, or pair of bobbins, coiled with wire. The ends of the wire on the bobbins are brought out and fastened to insulated portions of the spindle, and revolve with it. Two springs press against the spindle, and pick up the current generated by the motion of the iron bobbins before the poles of the magnet. It is quite indifferent whether we use permanent steel magnets or electro-magnets to produce this effect. If we use the latter, and more especially if we cause a portion of the current set up to circulate round the electro-magnet to maintain its power, we designate the apparatus by the name of Dynamo.
§ 15. There’s another source of electricity that needs to be mentioned here, as it has already been used in some types of electric bells and signaling, and it looks promising for more widespread use. If we sprinkle some iron filings over a bar magnet or a horseshoe magnet, we’ll see that the filings align themselves in a specific pattern along the lines of strongest attraction; or, as scientists typically say, the iron filings line up in the direction of the lines of force. The entire area affected by the magnet is usually referred to as its "field." Fig. 3 illustrates how the iron filings are distributed and shows the general direction of the lines of force. It’s been discovered that if an object is moved in front of the poles of a magnet in such a way that it crosses the lines of force, electricity is generated in that object as well as around the magnet. The regular magneto-electric machines available in stores are examples of how this property of magnets is utilized. They mainly consist of a horseshoe magnet, in front of which an iron bobbin, or a pair of bobbins coiled with wire, rotates due to suitable gearing or a wheel and belt. The ends of the wire on the bobbins are connected to insulated parts of the spindle, allowing them to rotate with it. Two springs press against the spindle to capture the current generated by the movement of the iron bobbins in front of the magnet’s poles. It doesn’t really matter if we use permanent steel magnets or electromagnets to achieve this effect. If we use the latter, and especially if we allow a portion of the current generated to flow around the electromagnet to keep it powered, we refer to the device as a Dynamo.

Fig. 4.
Typical Dynamo, showing essential portions.
Fig. 4.
Typical Dynamo, highlighting key components.
§ 16. Our space will not permit of a very extended description of the dynamo, but the following brief outline of its constructive details will be found useful to the student. A mass of soft iron (shape immaterial) is wound with many turns of insulated copper wire, in such a manner that, were an electrical current sent along the wire, the mass of iron would become strongly north at one extremity, and south at the other. As prolongations of the electro-magnet thus produced are affixed two masses of iron facing one another, and so fashioned or bored out as to allow a ring, or cylinder of soft iron, to rotate between them. This cylinder, or ring of iron, is also wound with insulated wire, two or more ends of which are brought out in a line with the spindle on which it rotates, and fastened down to as many insulated sections of brass cylinder placed around the[Pg 16] circumference of the spindle. Two metallic springs, connected to binding screws which form the "terminals" of the machine, serve to collect the electrical wave set up by the rotation of the coiled cylinder (or "armature") before the poles of the electro-magnet. The annexed cut (Fig. 4) will assist the student in getting a clear idea of the essential portions in a dynamo:—E is the mass of wrought iron wound with insulated wire, and known as the field-magnet. N and S are cast-iron prolongations of the same, and are usually bolted to the field-magnet. When current is passing these become powerfully magnetic. A is the rotating iron ring, or cylinder, known as the armature, which is also wound with insulated wire, B, the ends of which are brought out and connected to the insulated brass segments[Pg 17] known as the commutator, C. Upon this commutator press the two springs D and D', known as the brushes, which serve to collect the electricity set up by the rotation of the armature. These brushes are in electrical connection with the two terminals of the machine F F', whence the electric current is transmitted where required; the latter being also connected with the wire encircling the field-magnet, E.
§ 16. We don’t have enough space for a detailed description of the dynamo, but the following brief outline of its construction will be helpful for the student. A block of soft iron (shape doesn’t matter) is wrapped with many turns of insulated copper wire, in such a way that if an electrical current flows through the wire, the block of iron will become strongly north at one end and south at the other. Attached to extensions of the electro-magnet produced are two blocks of iron facing each other, shaped or bored out to allow a ring or cylinder of soft iron to rotate between them. This cylinder, or ring of iron, is also wrapped with insulated wire, with two or more ends brought out in line with the spindle on which it rotates, and secured to several insulated sections of a brass cylinder placed around the circumference of the spindle. Two metal springs connected to binding screws forming the "terminals" of the machine collect the electrical wave created by the rotation of the coiled cylinder (or "armature") before the poles of the electro-magnet. The attached diagram (Fig. 4) will help the student visualize the essential parts of a dynamo:—E is the block of wrought iron wrapped with insulated wire, known as the field-magnet. N and S are cast-iron extensions of this, typically bolted to the field-magnet. When current is flowing, these become very magnetic. A is the rotating iron ring or cylinder, referred to as the armature, which is also wrapped with insulated wire, B, the ends of which are connected to the insulated brass segments[Pg 17] known as the commutator, C. Pressing against this commutator are the two springs D and D', known as the brushes, which collect the electricity generated by the armature’s rotation. These brushes are electrically connected to the two terminals of the machine F F', from which the electric current is transmitted as needed; the latter is also connected to the wire surrounding the field-magnet, E.
When the iron mass stands in the direction of the earth's magnetic meridian, even if it have not previously acquired a little magnetism from the hammering, etc., to which it was subjected during fitting, it becomes weakly magnetic. On causing the armature to rotate by connecting up the pulley at the back of the shaft (not shown in cut) with any source of power, a very small current is set up in the wires of the armature, due to the weak magnetism of the iron mass of the field-magnet. As this current (or a portion of it) is caused to circulate around this iron mass, through the coils of wire surrounding the field-magnet, this latter becomes more powerfully magnetic (§ 13), and, being more magnetically active, sets up a more powerful electrical disturbance in the armature.
When the iron mass is aligned with the Earth's magnetic field, even if it hasn't picked up any magnetism from processes like hammering during installation, it becomes slightly magnetic. By making the armature rotate through the pulley connected to a power source (not shown in the image), a tiny current flows through the armature wires, thanks to the weak magnetism of the iron mass in the field magnet. As this current (or part of it) flows around the iron mass through the wire coils around the field magnet, the field magnet becomes more strongly magnetic (§ 13), and with its increased magnetic activity, it creates a stronger electrical disturbance in the armature.
This increased electrical activity in the armature increases the magnetism of this field-magnet as before, and this again reacts on the armature; and these cumulative effects rapidly increase, until a limit is reached, dependent partly on the speed of rotation, partly on the magnetic saturation of the iron of which the dynamo is built up, and partly on the amount of resistance in the circuit.
This higher electrical activity in the armature boosts the magnetism of the field magnet just like before, and this, in turn, affects the armature; these cumulative effects quickly escalate until a limit is reached, which depends partly on the rotation speed, partly on the magnetic saturation of the iron making up the dynamo, and partly on the amount of resistance in the circuit.
[2] This refers, of course, to those portions of the metals which are out of the acid. For reasons which will be explained farther on, the condition of the metals in the acid is just the opposite to this.
[2] This refers, of course, to the parts of the metals that are outside the acid. For reasons that will be explained later, the state of the metals in the acid is completely different from this.
CHAPTER II.
ON THE CHOICE OF BATTERIES FOR ELECTRIC BELL WORK.
§ 17. If we immerse a strip of ordinary commercial sheet zinc in dilute acid (say sulphuric acid 1 part by measure, water 16 parts by measure[4]), we shall find that the zinc is immediately acted on by the acid, being rapidly corroded and dissolved, while at the same time a quantity of bubbles of gas are seen to collect around, and finally to be evolved at the surface of the fluid in contact with the plate. Accompanying this chemical action, and varying in a degree proportionate to the intensity of the action of the acid on the zinc, we find a marked development of heat and electricity. If, while the bubbling due to the extrication of gas be still proceeding, we immerse in the same vessel a strip of silver, or copper, or a rod of graphite, taking care that contact does not take place between the two elements, no perceptible change takes place in the[Pg 19] condition of things; but if we cause the two strips to touch, either by inclining the upper extremities so as to bring them in contact out of the fluid like a letter Λ, or by connecting the upper extremities together by means of a piece of wire (or other conductor of electricity), or by causing their lower extremities in the fluid to touch, we notice a very peculiar change. The extrication of bubbles around the zinc strip ceases entirely or almost entirely, while the other strip (silver, copper, or graphite) becomes immediately the seat of the evolution of the gaseous bubbles. Had these experiments been performed with chemically pure metallic zinc, instead of the ordinary impure commercial metal, we should have found some noteworthy differences in behaviour. In the first place, the zinc would have been absolutely unattacked by the acid before the immersion of the other strip; and, secondly, all evolution of gas would entirely cease when contact between the two strips was broken.
§ 17. If we put a piece of regular commercial sheet zinc into a dilute acid (for example, sulfuric acid mixed with 1 part acid to 16 parts water[4]), we will see that the acid immediately reacts with the zinc, causing it to be quickly corroded and dissolved. At the same time, bubbles of gas start to build up around the zinc and eventually rise to the surface of the liquid in contact with the plate. Along with this chemical reaction, which is proportional to how strongly the acid is acting on the zinc, we can observe a significant increase in heat and electricity. If, while the gas bubbles are still forming, we place a strip of silver, copper, or a graphite rod into the same container, making sure that the two elements do not touch, there won't be any noticeable change in the situation; however, if we let the two strips touch—either by leaning the tops to make contact above the liquid like a letter Λ, connecting the tops with a wire (or another conductor), or allowing their lower ends to touch in the liquid—we notice a very interesting change. The bubbling around the zinc strip almost completely stops, while the other strip (silver, copper, or graphite) starts producing gas bubbles. If we had done these tests with chemically pure metallic zinc instead of the typical impure commercial zinc, we would have seen some significant differences in behavior. First, the zinc would have shown no reaction to the acid before the other strip was immersed; and secondly, all gas evolution would completely stop when the two strips are no longer in contact.
As the property which zinc possesses of causing the extrication of gas (under the above circumstances) has a considerable influence on the efficiency of a battery, it is well to understand thoroughly what chemical action takes place which gives rise to this evolution of gas.
Since zinc has the ability to release gas (under the conditions mentioned), it greatly affects how well a battery works. It's important to fully understand the chemical reactions that lead to this gas production.
§ 18. All acids may be conveniently regarded as being built up of two essential portions, viz.: firstly, a strongly electro-negative portion, which may either be a single body, such as chlorine, iodine, bromine, etc., or a compound radical, such as cyanogen; secondly, the strongly electro-positive body hydrogen.[Pg 20]
§ 18. All acids can be easily seen as having two main parts: first, a highly electronegative part, which can be either a single element like chlorine, iodine, bromine, and so on, or a compound radical like cyanogen; second, the highly electropositive element hydrogen.[Pg 20]
Representing, for brevity's sake, hydrogen by the letter H., and chlorine, bromine, iodine, etc., respectively by Cl., Br., and I., the constitution of the acids derived from these bodies may be conveniently represented by:—
Representing, for the sake of simplicity, hydrogen as H, and chlorine, bromine, iodine, and so on, as Cl, Br, and I, the structure of the acids derived from these substances can be conveniently represented by:—
H Cl | H Br | H I |
┗━━┛ | ┗━━┛ | ┗━━┛ |
Hydrochloric Acid[5]. | Hydrobromic Acid. | Hydriodic Acid. |
and the more complex acids, in which the electro-negative component is a compound, such as sulphuric acid (built up of 1 atom of sulphur and 4 atoms of oxygen, united to 2 atoms of hydrogen) or nitric acid (consisting of 1 nitrogen atom, 6 oxygen atoms, and 1 hydrogen atom), may advantageously be retained in memory by the aid of the abbreviations:—
and the more complex acids, where the electronegative part is a compound, like sulfuric acid (made up of 1 sulfur atom and 4 oxygen atoms, connected to 2 hydrogen atoms) or nitric acid (consisting of 1 nitrogen atom, 6 oxygen atoms, and 1 hydrogen atom), can conveniently be remembered using the following abbreviations:—
When zinc does act on an acid, it displaces the hydrogen contained in it, and takes its place; the acid losing at the same time its characteristic sourness and corrosiveness, becoming, as chemists say, neutralized. One atom of zinc can replace two atoms of hydrogen, so that one atom of zinc can replace the hydrogen in two equivalents of such acids as contain only one atom of hydrogen.
When zinc does react with an acid, it displaces the hydrogen it contains and takes its place; the acid loses its characteristic sourness and corrosiveness, becoming, as chemists say, neutralized. One atom of zinc can replace two atoms of hydrogen, meaning one atom of zinc can replace the hydrogen in two equivalents of acids that have only one atom of hydrogen.
This power of displacement and replacement possessed by zinc is not peculiar to this metal, but is[Pg 21] possessed also by many other bodies, and is of very common occurrence in chemistry; and may be roughly likened to the substitution of a new brick for an old one in a building, or one girder for another in an arch.
This ability of zinc to displace and replace isn’t unique to this metal; many other substances have this ability too, and it’s quite common in chemistry. You can think of it like swapping out an old brick for a new one in a building, or replacing one girder with another in an arch.
It will be well, therefore, to remember that in all batteries in which acids are used to excite electricity by their behaviour along with zinc, the following chemical action will also take place, according to which acid is employed:—
It’s important to keep in mind that in all batteries where acids are used to generate electricity through their interaction with zinc, the following chemical reactions will also occur, depending on which acid is used:—
Hydrochloric Acid | and | Zinc, | equal | Zinc Chloride | and | Hydrogen Gas. |
2HCl | + | Zn | = | ZnCl2 | + | H2 |
or:—
or:—
Sulphuric Acid | and | Zinc, | equal | Zinc Sulphate | and | Hydrogen Gas. |
H2SO4 | + | Zn | = | ZnSO4 | + | H2 |
Or we may put this statement into a general form, covering all cases in which zinc is acted on by a compound body containing hydrogen, representing the other or electro-negative portion of the compound by X:—
Or we can put this statement into a general form, covering all situations where zinc is affected by a compound that contains hydrogen, representing the other or electro-negative part of the compound as X:—
Zn + H2X = ZnX + H2
Zn + H2X = ZnX + H2
the final result being in every case the corrosion and solution of the zinc, and the extrication of the hydrogen gas displaced.
the final result in every case is the corrosion and dissolving of the zinc, and the release of the displaced hydrogen gas.
§ 19. We learn from the preceding statements that no electricity can be manifested in a battery or cell (as such a combination of zinc acid and metal is called) without consumption of zinc. On the contrary, we may safely say that the more rapidly the useful consumption of zinc takes place, the greater will be the electrical effects produced. But here it must be borne in mind[Pg 22] that if the zinc is being consumed when we are not using the cell or battery, that consumption is sheer waste, quite as much as if we were compelled to burn fuel in an engine whether the latter were doing work or not. For this reason the use of commercial zinc, in its ordinary condition, is not advisable in batteries in which acids are employed, since the zinc is consumed in such, whether the battery is called upon to do electrical work (by placing its plates in connection through some conducting circuit) or not. This serious objection to the employment of commercial zinc could be overcome by the employment of chemically purified zinc, were it not that the price of this latter is so elevated as practically to preclude its use for this purpose. Fortunately, it is possible to confer, on the ordinary crude zinc of commerce, the power of resisting the attacks of the acid (so long as the plates are not metallically connected; or, in other words, so long as the "circuit is broken"), by causing it to absorb superficially a certain amount of mercury (quicksilver). The modes of doing this, which is technically known as amalgamating the zinc, are various, and, as it is an operation which every one who has the care of batteries is frequently called upon to perform, the following working details will be found useful:—
§ 19. From the previous statements, we understand that no electricity can be generated in a battery or cell (which is a combination of zinc, acid, and metal) without using up zinc. In fact, we can confidently say that the faster the useful consumption of zinc occurs, the greater the electrical effects produced will be. However, we must remember[Pg 22] that if zinc is being consumed when we are not using the cell or battery, then that consumption is just waste, just like burning fuel in an engine whether it's doing work or not. For this reason, using standard commercial zinc in batteries with acids isn't advisable, since the zinc gets consumed regardless of whether the battery is actively doing electrical work (by connecting its plates through a conducting circuit) or not. This serious drawback of using commercial zinc could be solved by using chemically purified zinc, but its high cost makes it impractical for this use. Fortunately, it's possible to give regular crude commercial zinc the ability to resist acid attacks (as long as the plates are not electrically connected, or, in other words, as long as the "circuit is broken") by allowing it to absorb a certain amount of mercury (quicksilver) on its surface. There are various methods for doing this, which is technically known as amalgamating the zinc, and since this is a task that everyone responsible for battery maintenance often has to perform, the following working details will be helpful:—
§ 20. To amalgamate zinc, it should first be washed with a strong solution of common washing soda, to remove grease, then rinsed in running water; the zinc plates, or rods, should then be dipped into a vessel containing acidulated water (§ 17), and as soon as[Pg 23] bubbles of hydrogen gas begin to be evolved, transferred to a large flat dish containing water. While here, a few drops of mercury are poured on each plate, and caused to spread quickly over the surface of the zinc by rubbing briskly with an old nail-brush or tooth-brush. Some operators use a kind of mop, made of pieces of rag tied on the end of a stick, and there is no objection to this; others recommend the use of the fingers for rubbing in the mercury. This latter plan, especially if many plates have to be done, is very objectionable: firstly, on the ground of health, since the mercury is slowly but surely absorbed by the system, giving rise to salivation, etc.; and, secondly, because any jewellery, etc., worn by the wearer will be whitened and rendered brittle. When the entire surface of the zinc becomes resplendent like a looking-glass, the rubbing may cease, and the zinc plate be reared up on edge, to allow the superfluous mercury to drain off. This should be collected for future operations. It is important that the mercury used for this purpose should be pure. Much commercial mercury contains lead and tin. These metals can be removed by allowing the mercury to stand for some time in a vessel containing dilute nitric acid, occasional agitation being resorted to, in order to bring the acid into general contact with the mercury. All waste mercury, drainings, brushings from old plates, etc., should be thus treated with nitric acid, and finally kept covered with water. Sprague, in his admirable work on electricity, says:—"Whenever the zinc shows a grey granular surface (or rather before this), brush it[Pg 24] well and re-amalgamate, remembering that a saving of mercury is no economy, and a free use of it no waste; for it may all be recovered with a little care. Keep a convenient sized jar, or vessel, solely for washing zinc in, and brush into this the dirty grey powder which forms, and is an amalgam of mercury with zinc, lead, tin, etc., and forms roughnesses which reduce the protection of the amalgamation. Rolled sheet zinc should always be used in preference to cast. This latter is very hard to amalgamate, and has less electro-motive power[8]; but for rods for use in porous jars, and particularly with saline solutions, cast-zinc is very commonly used. In this case great care should be taken to use good zinc cuttings, removing any parts with solder on them, and using a little nitre as a flux, which will remove a portion of the foreign metals."
§ 20. To combine zinc, start by washing it with a strong solution of regular washing soda to get rid of grease, then rinse it under running water. The zinc plates or rods should then be dipped into a container filled with acidulated water (§ 17), and as soon as bubbles of hydrogen gas start to form, they should be moved to a large flat dish with water. While in the water, a few drops of mercury are added to each plate, which should then be spread quickly over the surface of the zinc by rubbing briskly with an old nail-brush or toothbrush. Some people prefer using a mop made from pieces of rag tied to the end of a stick, which is perfectly fine; others suggest using fingers to rub the mercury in. However, using fingers is particularly problematic if you have a lot of plates to work on: first, for health reasons, as mercury is gradually absorbed by the body, leading to salivation and other issues; second, because any jewelry worn will get discolored and brittle. Once the entire surface of the zinc shines like a mirror, you can stop rubbing, and position the zinc plate upright to let the excess mercury drain off. This mercury should be saved for future use. It's crucial that the mercury used is pure. Much of the commercial mercury contains lead and tin. These metals can be removed by letting the mercury sit in a container with diluted nitric acid for a while, occasionally shaking it to ensure the acid fully interacts with the mercury. All leftover mercury, including drainings and any residues from old plates, should be treated with nitric acid and kept covered with water. Sprague, in his excellent work on electricity, states: “Whenever the zinc exhibits a grey granular surface (or even before this), clean it thoroughly and re-amalgamate, keeping in mind that saving mercury is not an economy, and using it freely is not wasteful; because it can all be recovered with some care. Keep a conveniently sized jar exclusively for washing zinc, and brush the dirty grey powder that forms, which is an amalgam of mercury with zinc, lead, tin, etc., into this jar, as it creates rough spots that diminish the effectiveness of the amalgamation. Rolled sheet zinc should always be preferred over cast zinc. The latter is very difficult to amalgamate and has less electro-motive power[8]; however, cast zinc is commonly used for rods in porous jars, particularly with saline solutions. In this case, it's important to use quality zinc cuttings, removing any parts that have solder on them, and using a little nitre as a flux to eliminate some of the unwanted metals.
§ 21. Another and very convenient mode of amalgamating zinc, specially useful where solid rods or masses of zinc are to be used, consists in weighing up the zinc and setting aside four parts of mercury (by weight) for every hundred of the zinc thus weighed up. The zinc should then be melted in a ladle, with a little tallow or resin over the top as a flux. As soon as melted, the mercury should be added in and the mixture stirred with a stick. It should then be poured into moulds of the desired shape. This is, perhaps, the best mode of amalgamating cast zincs.
§ 21. Another very convenient way to combine zinc, especially useful when dealing with solid rods or blocks of zinc, involves weighing the zinc and setting aside four parts of mercury (by weight) for every hundred parts of zinc weighed. The zinc should then be melted in a ladle, with a little tallow or resin on top as a flux. Once melted, the mercury should be added in and the mixture stirred with a stick. After that, it should be poured into molds of the desired shape. This is probably the best method for amalgamating cast zincs.
§ 22. Some operators recommend the use of mercurial salts (such as mercury nitrate, etc.) as advan[Pg 25]tageous for amalgamating; but, apart from the fact that these salts are generally sold at a higher rate than the mercury itself, the amalgamation resulting, unless a very considerable time be allowed for the mercuric salts to act, is neither so deep nor so satisfactory as in the case of mercury alone. It may here be noted, that although the effect of mercury in protecting the zinc is very marked in those batteries in which acids are used as the exciting fluids, yet this action is not so observable in the cases in which solutions of salts are used as exciters; and in a few, such as the Daniell cell and its congeners, the use of amalgamated zinc is positively a disadvantage.
§ 22. Some operators suggest using mercurial salts (like mercury nitrate, etc.) for amalgamation; however, aside from the fact that these salts are usually sold at a higher price than mercury itself, the resulting amalgamation is not as effective or satisfying unless you allow a significant amount of time for the mercuric salts to work. It's worth noting that while mercury noticeably helps protect the zinc in batteries using acids as the electrolyte, this effect isn't as evident when using salt solutions as electrolytes. In some cases, like the Daniell cell and similar types, using amalgamated zinc is actually a disadvantage.
§ 23. If, having thus amalgamated the zinc plate of the little battery described and figured at § 9, we repeat the experiment therein illustrated, namely, of joining the wires proceeding from the two plates over a suspended magnetic needle, and leave them so united, we shall find that the magnetic needle, which was originally very much deflected out of the line of the magnetic meridian (north and south), will very quickly return near to its old and normal position; and this will be found to take place long before the zinc has been all consumed, or the acid all neutralised. Of course, this points to a rapid falling off in the transmission of the electric disturbance along the united wires; for had that continued of the same intensity, the deflection of the needle would evidently have remained the same likewise. What, then, can have caused this rapid loss of power? On examining (without removing from the[Pg 26] fluid) the surface of the copper plate, we shall find that it is literally covered with a coating of small bubbles of hydrogen gas, and, if we agitate the liquid or the plates, many of them will rise to the surface, while the magnetic needle will at the same time give a larger deflection. If we entirely remove the plates from the acid fluid, and brush over the surface of the copper plate with a feather or small pledget of cotton wool fastened to a stick, we shall find, on again immersing the plates in the acid, that the effect on the needle is almost, if not quite, as great as at first; thus proving that the sudden loss of electrical energy was greatly due to the adhesion of the free hydrogen gas to the copper plate. This peculiar phenomenon, which is generally spoken of as the polarisation of the negative plate, acts in a twofold manner towards checking the electrical energy of the battery. In the first place, the layer of hydrogen (being a bad conductor of electricity) presents a great resistance to the transmission of electrical energy from the zinc plate where it is set up to the copper (or other) plate whence it is transmitted to the wires, or electrodes. Again, the copper or other receiving plate, in order that the electric energy should be duly received and transmitted, should be more electro-negative than the zinc plate; but the hydrogen gas which is evolved, and which thus adheres to the negative plate, is actually very highly electro-positive, and thus renders the copper plate incapable of receiving or transmitting the electric disturbance. This state of things may be roughly likened to that of two exactly equal and level tanks, Z[Pg 27] and C, connected by a straight piece of tubing. If Z be full and C have an outlet, it is very evident that Z can and will discharge itself into C until exhausted; but if C be allowed to fill up to the same level as Z, then no farther flow can take place between the two.
§ 23. If we combine the zinc plate of the small battery described and shown at § 9, and repeat the experiment illustrated there by connecting the wires from the two plates over a suspended magnetic needle, leaving them connected, we will see that the magnetic needle, which was initially pushed far away from the line of the magnetic meridian (north and south), will quickly return close to its original position; and this happens long before the zinc is completely used up, or the acid is fully neutralized. This indicates a rapid decrease in the flow of electric disturbance along the connected wires; had that flow stayed the same, the needle's deflection would have remained consistent too. So, what could cause this quick loss of power? By examining the surface of the copper plate (without removing it from the fluid), we will see that it’s entirely covered with tiny bubbles of hydrogen gas, and if we stir the liquid or the plates, many of these bubbles will rise to the surface, and at the same time, the magnetic needle will show a greater deflection. If we take the plates completely out of the acid solution and gently brush the surface of the copper plate with a feather or small piece of cotton attached to a stick, we will find that when we put the plates back into the acid, the effect on the needle is almost, if not completely, as strong as it was at the beginning; thus demonstrating that the sudden drop in electrical energy was largely due to the hydrogen gas sticking to the copper plate. This unusual occurrence, commonly referred to as the polarisation of the negative plate, acts in two ways to reduce the battery's electrical energy. First, the layer of hydrogen (being a poor conductor of electricity) creates significant resistance to the flow of electrical energy from the zinc plate, where it is generated, to the copper (or another) plate, from which it is sent to the wires, or electrodes. Furthermore, the copper or other receiving plate must be more electro-negative than the zinc plate for the electric energy to be effectively received and transmitted; however, the hydrogen gas that forms and sticks to the negative plate is actually very electro-positive, which makes the copper plate unable to receive or transmit the electric disturbance. This situation can be roughly compared to two exactly equal and level tanks, Z[Pg 27] and C, connected by a straight piece of pipe. If Z is full and C has an outlet, it is clear that Z can and will empty into C until it is empty; but if C is allowed to fill to the same level as Z, then no further flow can occur between the two.
It is, therefore, very evident that to ensure anything like constancy in the working of a battery, at least until all the zinc be consumed or all the acid exhausted, some device for removing the liberated hydrogen must be put into practice. The following are some of the means that have been adopted by practical men:—
It’s clear that to maintain any sort of consistency in how a battery operates, at least until all the zinc is used up or all the acid is depleted, some method for getting rid of the released hydrogen must be implemented. Here are some of the approaches that have been used by professionals:—
§ 24. Roughening the surface of the negative plate, which renders the escape of the hydrogen gas easier. This mode was adopted by Smee in the battery which bears his name. It consists of a sheet of silver, placed between two plates of zinc, standing in a cell containing dilute sulphuric acid, as shown at Fig. 5.
§ 24. Roughening the surface of the negative plate, which makes it easier for the hydrogen gas to escape. This method was used by Smee in the battery that is named after him. It involves a silver sheet positioned between two zinc plates, situated in a cell filled with dilute sulfuric acid, as shown at Fig. 5.
The silver sheet, before being placed in position, is platinised; that is to say, its surface is covered (by electro-deposition) with a coating of platinum, in the form of a fine black powder. This presents innumerable points of escape for the hydrogen gas; and for this reason this battery falls off much less rapidly than the plain zinc and smooth copper form. A modification of Smee's battery which, owing to the large negative surface presented, is very advantageous, is Walker's graphite cell. In this we have a plate of zinc between two plates of gas-carbon ("scurf"), or graphite. The surface of this body is naturally much rougher than metal sheets; and this roughness of surface is further assisted by[Pg 28] coating the surface with platinum, as in the case of the Smee. The chief objection to the use of graphite is its porosity, which causes it to suck up the acid fluid in which the plates stand, and this, of course, corrodes the brass connections, or binding screws.
The silver sheet, before being positioned, is platinized; which means its surface is covered (through electro-deposition) with a layer of platinum in the form of a fine black powder. This creates countless exit points for the hydrogen gas, which is why this battery loses power much more slowly than the basic zinc and smooth copper types. A variation of Smee's battery that is very beneficial due to its large negative surface area is Walker's graphite cell. In this cell, there's a zinc plate sandwiched between two plates of gas-carbon ("scurf") or graphite. The surface of this material is naturally rougher than metal sheets, and this roughness is further enhanced by coating the surface with platinum, similar to the Smee. The main drawback of using graphite is its porosity, which causes it to absorb the acidic solution in which the plates are immersed, leading to corrosion of the brass connections or binding screws.
Other mechanical means of removing the hydrogen have been suggested, such as brushing the surface of the plate, keeping the liquid in a state of agitation by boiling or siphoning; but the only really efficient practical means with which we are at present acquainted are chemical means. Thus, if we can have present at the negative plate some substance which is greedy of hydrogen, and which shall absorb it or combine with it, we shall evidently have solved the problem. This was first effected by Professor Daniell; and the battery[Pg 29] known by his name still retains its position as one of the simplest and best of the "constant" forms of battery. The term "constant," as applied to batteries, does not mean that the battery is a constancy, and will run for ever, but simply that so long as there is in the battery any fuel (zinc, acid, etc.), the electrical output of that battery will be constant. The Daniell cell consists essentially in a rod or plate of zinc immersed in dilute sulphuric acid, and separated from the copper or collecting plate by a porous earthen pot or cell. Around the porous cell, and in contact with the copper plate, is placed a solution of sulphate of copper, which is maintained saturate by keeping crystals of sulphate of copper (blue stone, blue vitriol) in the solution. Sulphate of copper is a compound built up of copper Cu, and of sulphur oxide SO4. When the dilute sulphuric acid acts on the zinc plate or rod (§ 18), sulphate of zinc is formed, which dissolves in the water, and hydrogen is given off:—
Other mechanical methods for removing hydrogen have been proposed, like brushing the plate’s surface or keeping the liquid stirred by boiling or siphoning. However, the only truly effective practical methods we currently know of are chemical. If we can have a substance at the negative plate that is eager to grab hydrogen, absorbing or combining with it, we'll clearly have solved the problem. This was first achieved by Professor Daniell, and the battery[Pg 29] named after him remains one of the simplest and best "constant" battery types available. The term "constant," when used for batteries, doesn’t mean that the battery will never run out, but simply that as long as there’s any fuel (like zinc, acid, etc.) in the battery, the electrical output will be steady. The Daniell cell essentially consists of a zinc rod or plate immersed in dilute sulfuric acid, separated from the copper or collecting plate by a porous earthen pot or cell. Surrounding the porous cell, in contact with the copper plate, is a solution of copper sulfate, which is kept saturated by adding crystals of copper sulfate (known as blue stone or blue vitriol) to the solution. Copper sulfate is a compound made up of copper (Cu) and sulfate (SO4). When the dilute sulfuric acid interacts with the zinc plate or rod (§ 18), zinc sulfate is produced, which dissolves in the water, and hydrogen is released:—
Zn | + | H2SO4 | = | ZnSO4 | + | H2. |
Zinc | and | sulphuric acid | produce | zinc sulphate | and | free hydrogen. |
Now this free hydrogen, by a series of molecular interchanges, is carried along until it passes through the porous cell, and finds itself in contact with the solution of copper sulphate. Here, as the hydrogen has a greater affinity for, or is more greedy of, the sulphur oxide, SO4, than the copper is, it turns the latter out, takes its place, setting the copper free, and forming, with the sulphur oxide, sulphuric acid. The liberated copper goes, and adheres to the copper plate, and, far from detracting from[Pg 30] its efficacy, as the liberated hydrogen would have done, actually increases its efficiency, as it is deposited in a roughened form, which presents a large surface for the collection of the electricity. The interchange which takes place when the free hydrogen meets the sulphate of copper (outside the porous cells) is shown in the following equation:—
Now, this free hydrogen, through a series of molecular exchanges, gets transported until it goes through the porous cell and makes contact with the copper sulfate solution. Here, since the hydrogen is more attracted to the sulfate ion, SO4, than copper is, it displaces the copper, takes its place, releases the copper, and forms sulfuric acid with the sulfate. The freed copper sticks to the copper plate and, instead of reducing its effectiveness like the liberated hydrogen would have, actually boosts its efficiency because it's deposited in a roughened form, creating a larger surface area for collecting electricity. The exchange that occurs when the free hydrogen meets copper sulfate (outside the porous cells) is represented in the following equation:—
H2 | + | CuSO4 | = | H2SO4 | + | Cu. |
Free hydrogen | and | copper sulphate | produce | sulphuric acid | and | free copper. |
§ 25. The original form given to this, the Daniell cell, is shown at Fig. 6, in which Z is the zinc rod standing in the porous pot P, in which is placed the dilute sulphuric acid. A containing vessel, V, of glazed earthenware, provided with a perforated shelf, S, on which are placed the crystals of sulphate of copper, serves[Pg 31] to hold the copper sheet, C, and the solution of sulphate of copper. T and T' are the terminals from which the electricity is led where desired.
§ 25. The original design of the Daniell cell is shown at Fig. 6, where Z is the zinc rod placed in the porous pot P, which contains dilute sulfuric acid. A container V, made of glazed ceramic, has a perforated shelf S on which the copper sulfate crystals are situated, and it holds the copper sheet C and the copper sulfate solution. T and T' are the terminals from which electricity is drawn as needed.
In another form, the copper sheet itself takes the form and replaces the containing vessel V; and since the copper is not corroded, but actually increases in thickness during action, this is a decided advantage. A modification, in which the porous cell is replaced by sand or by sawdust, is also constructed, and known as "Minotto's" cell: this, owing to the greater thickness of the porous layer, offers more resistance, and gives, consequently, less current. By taking advantage of the greater specific gravity (weight, bulk for bulk) of the solution of sulphate of copper over that of water or dilute sulphuric acid, it is possible to construct a battery which shall act in a manner precisely similar to a Daniell, without the employment of any porous partition whatsoever. Fig. 7 illustrates the construction of one of these, known as "Gravity Daniells."
In another form, the copper sheet itself becomes the shape and replaces the container V; and since the copper doesn’t corrode but actually gets thicker during operation, this is a clear advantage. There’s also a variation where the porous cell is substituted with sand or sawdust, known as "Minotto's" cell: this modification, due to the thicker porous layer, provides more resistance and therefore produces less current. By utilizing the higher specific gravity (weight for weight) of copper sulfate solution compared to water or dilute sulfuric acid, it’s possible to create a battery that works in the same way as a Daniell, without using any porous barrier at all. Fig. 7 shows the construction of one of these, called "Gravity Daniells."
In this we have a plate, disc, or spiral of copper, C, connected by an insulated copper wire to the terminal T'. Over this is placed a layer of crystals of copper sulphate; the jar is then filled nearly to the top with dilute sulphuric acid, or with a strong solution of sulphate of zinc (which is more lasting in its effects, but not so energetic as the dilute sulphuric acid), and on the surface of this, connected to the other terminal, T, is allowed to rest a thick disc of zinc, Z. Speaking of these cells, Professor Ayrton, in his invaluable "Practical Electricity," says:—"All gravity cells have the disadvantage that[Pg 32] they cannot be moved about; otherwise the liquids mix, and the copper sulphate solution, coming into contact with the zinc plate, deposits copper on it. This impairs the action, by causing the zinc to act electrically, like a copper one. Indeed, without any shaking, the liquids mix by diffusion, even when a porous pot is employed; hence a Daniell's cell is found to keep in better order if it be always allowed to send a weak current when not in use, since the current uses up the copper sulphate solution, instead of allowing it to diffuse." The use of a solution of zinc sulphate to act on the zinc rod, or plate, is always to be preferred in the Daniell cell, when long duration is of more consequence than energetic action.
In this setup, we have a plate, disc, or spiral of copper, C, connected via an insulated copper wire to the terminal T'. On top of this, a layer of copper sulfate crystals is placed; then the jar is filled nearly to the top with dilute sulfuric acid or a strong zinc sulfate solution (which lasts longer but is less energetic than dilute sulfuric acid). Resting on the surface of this solution, and connected to the other terminal, T, is a thick disc of zinc, Z. Discussing these cells, Professor Ayrton, in his invaluable "Practical Electricity," states:—"All gravity cells have the drawback that they can’t be moved around; otherwise, the liquids mix, and the copper sulfate solution comes into contact with the zinc plate, depositing copper on it. This harms the action by making the zinc act electrically like a copper plate. In fact, even without any shaking, the liquids mix by diffusion, even when a porous pot is used; therefore, a Daniell's cell is found to stay in better condition if it is always allowed to send a weak current when not in use, as the current consumes the copper sulfate solution instead of letting it diffuse." Using a zinc sulfate solution to react with the zinc rod or plate is always preferred in the Daniell cell when long duration matters more than energetic action.
§ 26. There are many other bodies which can be used in batteries to absorb the hydrogen set free. Of several of these we need only take a passing notice, as the[Pg 33] batteries furnished by their use are unfit for electric bell work. Of these we may mention nitric acid, which readily parts with a portion of the oxygen (§ 18) and reconverts the free hydrogen into water. This acid is used as the "depolarizer"[9] in the "Grove" and in the "Bunsen" cell. Another very energetic "depolariser" is chromic acid, either in solution, in dilute sulphuric acid, or in the form of potassic dichromate (bichromate of potash: bichrome). As one form of chromic cell has found favour with some bell-fitters, we shall study its peculiarities farther on.
§ 26. There are many other substances that can be used in batteries to absorb the hydrogen that’s released. We only need to briefly mention a few of these, as the batteries made from them aren’t suitable for electric bell work. One such substance is nitric acid, which easily releases some oxygen (§ 18) and converts the free hydrogen back into water. This acid is used as the "depolarizer"[9] in the "Grove" and "Bunsen" cells. Another very effective "depolarizer" is chromic acid, either in solution, in dilute sulfuric acid, or as potassium dichromate (bichromate of potash: bichrome). Since one type of chromic cell has been favored by some bell-fitters, we will explore its specific features further on.
Another class of bodies which readily part with their oxygen, and thus act as depolarisers, are the oxides of lead and manganese. This latter oxide forms the basis of one of the most useful cells for electric bell work, namely: the one known as the "Leclanché." As the battery has been, and will probably remain, long a favourite, the next paragraph will be devoted to its consideration.
Another group of substances that easily lose their oxygen and act as depolarizers are the oxides of lead and manganese. The manganese oxide, in particular, is a key component of one of the most practical batteries used for electric bell systems, known as the "Leclanché." Since this type of battery has been popular and is likely to stay that way for a long time, the next section will focus on it.
§ 27. The Leclanché cell, in its original form, consists in a rod or block of gas carbon (retort scurf: graphite) standing in an upright porous pot. Around this, so as to reach nearly to the top of the porous cell, is tightly packed a mixture of little lumps of graphite and black oxide of manganese (manganic dioxide: black wad), the porous cell itself being placed in an outer containing vessel, which usually takes the form of a square glass bottle. A zinc rod stands in one corner of the bottle,[Pg 34] and is prevented from coming into actual contact with the porous cell by having an indiarubber ring slipped over its upper and lower extremities. The glass containing vessel is then filled to about two-thirds of its height with a solution of ammonium chloride (sal ammoniac) in water, of the strength of about 2 oz. of the salt to each pint of water. This soon permeates the porous cell and reaches the mixture inside. The general appearance of the Leclanché cell is well shown at Fig. 8.
§ 27. The Leclanché cell, in its original form, consists of a rod or block of gas carbon (retort scurf: graphite) standing in an upright porous pot. Surrounding this is a tightly packed mixture of small lumps of graphite and black oxide of manganese (manganic dioxide: black wad), filling up nearly to the top of the porous cell. The porous cell is placed inside an outer container, which is usually a square glass bottle. A zinc rod stands in one corner of the bottle and is kept from touching the porous cell by an indiarubber ring slipped over its upper and lower ends. The glass container is then filled to about two-thirds of its height with a solution of ammonium chloride (sal ammoniac) in water, mixed at roughly 2 oz. of the salt per pint of water. This solution quickly seeps into the porous cell and reaches the mixture inside. The overall appearance of the Leclanché cell is well shown at Fig. 8.
In order to ensure a large surface of contact for the terminal of the carbon rod or plate, it is customary to cast a leaden cap on the top thereof; and, as the porosity[Pg 35] of the graphite, or carbon, is very apt to allow the fluid in the battery to creep up to and corrode the terminal, and thus oppose resistance to the passage of electricity, the upper end of the carbon, before the lead cap is cast on, is soaked for some time in melted paraffin wax, at a temperature of 110° Centigrade: that is somewhat hotter than boiling water heat. This, if left on the outside, would prevent the passage of electricity almost entirely; so lateral holes are drilled into the carbon before the cap is finally cast on. The action that takes place in the Leclanché cell may be summarised as follows:—
To make sure there’s a large contact surface for the end of the carbon rod or plate, it’s common to cast a lead cap on top of it. Since the porosity of the graphite or carbon can easily let the battery fluid seep up and corrode the terminal, causing resistance to the flow of electricity, the upper end of the carbon is soaked in melted paraffin wax at about 110° Celsius (which is a bit hotter than boiling water) before the lead cap is cast. If left on the surface, this would almost completely block the flow of electricity, so lateral holes are drilled into the carbon before the cap is finally added. The process that occurs in the Leclanché cell can be summarized as follows:—
When the zinc, Zn, is acted on by the ammonium chloride, 2NH4Cl, the zinc seizes the chlorine and forms with it zinc chloride, ZnCl2, while the ammonium, 2NH4, is liberated. But this ammonium, 2NH4, does not escape. Being electro-positive, it is impelled towards the negative plate, and in its passage thereto meets with another molecule of ammonium chloride, from which it displaces the ammonium, in this wise: 2NH4 + 2NH4Cl = 2NH4Cl + 2NH4; in other words, this electro-positive ammonium is able, by virtue of its electrical charge, to displace the ammonium from the combined chloride. In so doing, it sets the liberated ammonium in an electro-positive condition, as it was itself, losing at the same time its electrical charge. This interchange of molecules goes on (as we saw in the case of the Daniell's cell, § 24) until the surface of the carbon is reached. Here, as there is no more ammonium chloride to decompose, the ammonium 2NH4 immediately splits up into ammonia [Pg 36]2NH3 and free hydrogen H2. The ammonia escapes, and may be detected by its smell; while the hydrogen H2, finding itself in contact with the oxide of manganese, 2MnO2, seizes one atom of its oxygen, O, becoming thereby converted into water H2O; while the manganese dioxide, 2MnO2, by losing one atom of oxygen, is reduced to the form of a lower oxide of manganese, known as manganese sesquioxide, Mn2O3. Expressed in symbols, this action may be formulated as below:—
When zinc (Zn) reacts with ammonium chloride (2NH4Cl), the zinc takes the chlorine and forms zinc chloride (ZnCl2), while ammonium (2NH4) is released. However, this ammonium (2NH4) doesn’t just escape. Being electro-positive, it is drawn toward the negative plate, and on its way there, it encounters another molecule of ammonium chloride, displacing the ammonium like this: 2NH4 + 2NH4Cl = 2NH4Cl + 2NH4. In other words, the electro-positive ammonium can, due to its electrical charge, displace the ammonium from the combined chloride. By doing this, it puts the liberated ammonium in an electro-positive state like it was before, while it loses its electrical charge. This exchange of molecules continues (as we observed in Daniell's cell, § 24) until the carbon surface is reached. Here, since there’s no more ammonium chloride to break down, the ammonium (2NH4) quickly breaks down into ammonia (2NH3) and free hydrogen (H2). The ammonia escapes and can be recognized by its smell, while the hydrogen (H2) comes into contact with manganese oxide (2MnO2), taking one atom of its oxygen (O) and turning into water (H2O). Meanwhile, manganese dioxide (2MnO2), by losing one atom of oxygen, is reduced to a lower oxide of manganese known as manganese sesquioxide (Mn2O3). In symbolic terms, this process can be represented as follows:—
In the zinc compartment—
In the zinc section—
Zn + 2NH4Cl = ZnCl2 + 2NH3 + H2
Zn + 2NH4Cl = ZnCl2 + 2NH3 + H2
In the peroxide of manganese compartment—
In the manganese peroxide area—
H2 + 2MnO2 = Mn2O3 + H2O.
H2 + 2MnO2 = Mn2O3 + H2O.
Ammonia gas therefore slowly escapes while this battery is in action, and this corrodes all the brass work with which it comes into contact, producing a bluish green verdigris. If there be not sufficient ammonium chloride in solution, the water alone acts on the zinc: zinc oxide is produced, which renders the solution milky. Should this be the case, more sal ammoniac must be added. It is found that for every 50 grains of zinc consumed in this battery, about 82 grains of sal ammoniac and 124 grains of manganese dioxide are needed to neutralize the hydrogen set free. It is essential for the efficient working of this battery that both the manganese dioxide and the carbon should be free from powder, otherwise it will cake together, prevent the passage of the liquid, and present a much smaller surface to the electricity, than if in a granular form. For this reason, that manganese dioxide should be preferred which is known as the[Pg 37] "needle" form, and both this and the carbon should be sifted to remove dust.
Ammonia gas gradually escapes while this battery is working, which damages all the brass it contacts, causing a bluish-green substance called verdigris. If there isn't enough ammonium chloride in the solution, the water will react with the zinc, producing zinc oxide, which makes the solution look milky. If this happens, more sal ammoniac needs to be added. It's noted that for every 50 grains of zinc used up in this battery, about 82 grains of sal ammoniac and 124 grains of manganese dioxide are required to neutralize the hydrogen released. For the battery to work efficiently, both manganese dioxide and carbon must be free of powder; otherwise, they will clump together, obstruct the flow of liquid, and offer a much smaller surface area for electricity than if they are in granular form. For this reason, the manganese dioxide known as the "needle" form should be preferred, and both this and the carbon should be sifted to remove any dust.
§ 28. In the admirable series of papers on electric bell fitting which was published in the English Mechanic, Mr. F. C. Allsop, speaking of the Leclanché cell, says:—"A severe and prolonged test, extending over many years, has proved that for general electric bell work the Leclanché has no equal; though, in large hotels, etc., where the work is likely to be very heavy, it may, perhaps, be preferable to employ a form of the Fuller bichromate battery. It is very important that the battery employed should be a thoroughly reliable one and set up in a proper manner, as a failure in the battery causes a breakdown in the communication throughout the whole building, whilst the failure of a push or wire only affects that portion of the building in which the push or wire is fixed. A common fault is that of putting in (with a view to economy) only just enough cells (when first set up) to do the necessary work. This is false economy, as when the cells are but slightly exhausted the battery power becomes insufficient; whereas, if another cell or two had been added, the battery would have run a much longer time without renewal, owing to the fact that each cell could have been reduced to a lower state of exhaustion, yet still the battery would have furnished the necessary power; and the writer has always found that the extra expense of the surplus cells is fully repaid by the increased length of time the battery runs without renewal."
§ 28. In the impressive series of articles on electric bell installation published in the English Mechanic, Mr. F. C. Allsop discusses the Leclanché cell, stating:—"A rigorous and extended test lasting many years has demonstrated that for general electric bell work, the Leclanché is unmatched; however, in large hotels and similar venues where the work may be particularly demanding, it might be better to use a type of the Fuller bichromate battery. It’s crucial that the battery used is completely reliable and installed correctly, since a battery failure can disrupt communication throughout the entire building, while a malfunction in a push button or wire only impacts the specific area where it’s located. A common mistake is to install just enough cells (to save costs) to handle the required work when first set up. This is false economy because if the cells become slightly depleted, the battery’s power becomes insufficient; however, if an extra cell or two had been added, the battery would last significantly longer without needing replacement since each cell could operate at a lower level of exhaustion while still providing the necessary power. The writer has consistently found that the additional cost of surplus cells is more than offset by the extended duration the battery operates without needing renewal.”
§ 29. Another form of Leclanché, from which great[Pg 38] things were expected at its introduction, is the one known as the "Agglomerate block," from the fact that, instead of simply placing the carbon and manganese together loosely in a porous cell, solid blocks are formed by compressing these materials, under a pressure of several tons, around a central carbon core, to which the terminal is attached in the usual manner. The following are some of the compositions used in the manufacture of agglomerate blocks:—
§ 29. Another version of Leclanché, which had high expectations upon its launch, is known as the "Agglomerate block." This name comes from the method of creating solid blocks by compressing carbon and manganese together under several tons of pressure, rather than just placing them loosely in a porous cell. These blocks are formed around a central carbon core, which is connected to the terminal in the usual way. Here are some of the compositions used to make agglomerate blocks:—
No. 1.
No. 1.
Manganese dioxide | 40 | parts. |
Powdered gas carbon | 55 | parts. |
Gum lac resin | 5 | parts. |
No. 2.
No. 2.
Manganese dioxide (pyrolusite) | 40 | parts. |
Gas carbon (powdered) | 52 | parts. |
Gum lac resin | 5 | parts. |
Potassium bisulphate | 3 | parts. |
These are to be thoroughly incorporated, forced into steel moulds (containing the central carbon core) at a temperature of 100° C. (212° Fahr.), under a pressure of 300 atmospheres, say 4,500 lbs. to the square inch.
These should be fully integrated and pressed into steel molds (which include the central carbon core) at a temperature of 100° C. (212° F), under a pressure of 300 atmospheres, about 4,500 lbs. per square inch.
No. 3.
No. 3.
Barbier and Leclanché's Patent.
Barbier and Leclanché's Patent.
Manganese dioxide | 49 | parts. |
Graphite | 44 | parts. |
Pitch ("brai gras") | 9 | parts. |
Sulphur | ⅗ | parts. |
Water | ⅖ | parts. |
The materials having been reduced to fine powder, and the proportion of water stated having been added, are intimately mixed together by hand or mechanically. The moist mixture is moulded at the ordinary temperature, either by a simple compressing press, or by a press in which two pistons moving towards each other compress the block on two opposite faces; or the mixture may be compressed by drawing, as in the manufacture of electric light carbon. After compression, the products are sufficiently solid to be manipulated. They are then put in a stove, or oven, the temperature of which is gradually raised to about 350° C. (about 662° Fahr.); a temperature which is insufficient to decompose the depolarising substance (manganese dioxide), but sufficient to drive out first the volatile parts of the agglomerating material, and then to transform its fixed parts in a body unattackable by the ammonia of the cell. During the gradual heating, or baking, which lasts about two hours, what remains of the water in the agglomerate is driven off; then come the more volatile oils contained in the pitch, and finally the sulphur. The sulphur is added to the mixture, not as an agglomerative, but as a chemical re-agent (and this is a characteristic feature in the invention), acting on what remains of the pitch, as it acts on all carbo-hydrides at a high temperature, transforming it partially into volatile sulphuretted compounds, which are expelled by the heat, and partially into a fixed and unattackable body, somewhat similar to vulcanite. The action of the sulphur on the pitch can very well be likened to its[Pg 40] action on caoutchouc (which is likewise a hydro-carbon) during the process of vulcanisation.
The materials have been ground into a fine powder, and the specified amount of water has been added. They are mixed together thoroughly by hand or machine. The wet mixture is shaped at room temperature, either using a simple compression press or a press with two pistons that compress the block from opposite sides. Alternatively, the mixture can be compressed by pulling, similar to how electric light carbon is made. After compression, the products are solid enough to handle. They are then placed in a stove or oven, where the temperature is gradually raised to about 350° C (approximately 662° F); this temperature is not high enough to break down the depolarizing agent (manganese dioxide) but is adequate to eliminate the volatile components of the agglomerating material and to transform its remaining parts into a substance that is unaffected by the ammonia in the cell. During this gradual heating or baking process, which takes about two hours, any remaining water in the agglomerate is removed; then the more volatile oils from the pitch are expelled, followed by the sulfur. The sulfur is added to the mixture not as a binding agent but as a chemical reagent (which is a distinctive aspect of this invention), acting on the residual pitch just as it does on all hydrocarbons at high temperatures, partially converting it into volatile sulfur compounds that are released by the heat and partially into a stable and resistant material, similar to vulcanite. The effect of sulfur on the pitch can be compared to its effect on rubber (another hydrocarbon) during the vulcanization process.
These agglomerate blocks, however prepared, are placed in glass or porcelain containing vessels, as shown in Fig. 9, with a rod of zinc, separated from actual contact with the carbon by means of a couple of crossed indiarubber bands, which serve at the same time to hold the zinc rods upright. The exciting solution, as in the case of the ordinary Leclanché consists in a solution of ammonium chloride.
These agglomerate blocks, however prepared, are placed in glass or porcelain containers, as shown in Fig. 9, with a zinc rod, kept from direct contact with the carbon by a couple of crossed rubber bands, which also help to keep the zinc rods upright. The exciting solution, like in a typical Leclanché cell, is a solution of ammonium chloride.
Among the various advantages claimed for the agglomerate form of Leclanché over the ordinary type, may be mentioned the following:—
Among the various advantages claimed for Leclanché in its agglomerate form compared to the regular type, the following can be mentioned:—
1st.—The depolarising power of the manganese oxide is used to the best advantage, and that, owing to this, the electro-motive force of the battery is kept at the same point.
1st.—The depolarizing power of the manganese oxide is utilized to its fullest extent, and because of this, the battery's electromotive force remains consistent.
2nd.—That, owing to the absence of the porous cell, there is less internal resistance in the battery and therefore more available current.
2nd.—That, because the porous cell is missing, there's less internal resistance in the battery and, as a result, more available current.
3rd.—That the resistance of the battery remains pretty constant, whatever work be put upon it.
3rd.—That the battery's resistance stays fairly constant, no matter what workload is placed on it.
4th.—That, owing to the fact that the liquid comes into contact with both elements immediately, the battery is ready for use directly on being charged.
4th.—Because the liquid immediately interacts with both elements, the battery is ready for use as soon as it is charged.
5th.—That the renewal or recharging is exceedingly easy, since the elements can be removed together, fresh solution added, or new depolarising blocks substituted.[Pg 41]
5th.—The renewal or recharging is really simple, as the components can be taken out together, fresh solution added, or new depolarizing blocks replaced.[Pg 41]
But when this battery came to be put to the test of practical work, it was found the block form could not be credited with all these advantages, and that their chief superiority over the old cell consisted rather in their lower internal resistance than in anything else. Even this is not an advantage in the case of bell work, except when several bells are arranged in parallel, so that a large current is required. The blocks certainly polarise more quickly than the old form, and it does not appear that they depolarise any more rapidly. Probably the enormous pressure to which the blocks are subjected, in the first two processes, renders the composition almost impermeable to the passage of the fluid, so that depolarisation cannot take place very rapidly. Another and serious objection to these blocks is that, after a little work, pieces break away from the blocks and settle on the zinc. This sets up a "short circuit," and the zincs are consumed whether the battery is in action or not.
But when this battery was put to the test in real-world scenarios, it became clear that the block design couldn’t claim all the advantages it was thought to have. Their main edge over the old cell actually came from having lower internal resistance rather than anything else. This isn’t particularly beneficial for bell work unless multiple bells are connected in parallel, requiring a larger current. The blocks definitely polarize faster than the old type, but they don’t seem to depolarize any quicker. The extreme pressure the blocks undergo during the initial processes likely makes the composition almost impermeable to the fluid's movement, which slows down depolarization. Another significant drawback of these blocks is that, after a short period of use, pieces start to break off and fall onto the zinc. This creates a "short circuit," consuming the zinc whether the battery is in use or not.
The author has had no opportunity for making any practical tests with the blocks prepared by process No. 3, but he is under the impression that the blocks would be even more friable than those prepared under greater pressure.
The author hasn't had a chance to conduct any practical tests with the blocks made using process No. 3, but he feels that these blocks would be even more brittle than those made under higher pressure.
§ 30. A third form of Leclanché, and one which has given considerable satisfaction, is the one known as "Judson's Patent." This consists, as shown at Fig. 10, in a cylinder of corrugated carbon encased in an outer coating of an insulating composition. Inside the cell are two or more thin carbon sheets, cemented to the sides of the cell by Prout's elastic glue, or some similar[Pg 42] compound, so as to leave spaces, which are filled in with granular carbon and manganese. The surface of the plates is perforated, so as to allow ready access to the exciting fluid. The zinc rod, which is affixed to the cover, stands in the centre of the cell, touching it at no part. Owing to the very large surface presented by the corrugations in the carbon, and by the perforated carbon plates, the internal resistance of this form of battery is very low; hence the current, if employed against a small outer resistance, is large. But this, except in the case of bells arranged in parallel, is of no great advantage.
§ 30. A third version of Leclanché, which has been quite successful, is known as "Judson's Patent." This design, seen at Fig. 10, features a cylinder made of corrugated carbon that's covered with an insulating layer. Inside the cell are two or more thin carbon sheets, attached to the sides of the cell using Prout's elastic glue or a similar compound, creating gaps filled with granular carbon and manganese. The surface of the plates has perforations to allow easy access to the electrolyte. The zinc rod, which is connected to the cover, is centered in the cell and does not touch it at any point. Due to the large surface area provided by the carbon's corrugations and the perforated carbon plates, this type of battery has very low internal resistance; thus, the current is high when used against slight external resistance. However, this advantage is limited, except for cases like bells connected in parallel.
§ 31. The ordinary form of Leclanché is found in market in three sizes, viz., No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3. Unfortunately, all makers do not use these numbers in the same manner, so that while some call the smallest, or pint size, No. 1, others give this name to the largest, or three-pint, size. No. 2 is always quart size, and this is the one commonly employed. When several cells are employed to work a number of bells, it is well, in order that they may not receive injury, that they be enclosed in a wooden box. As it is necessary that the batteries should be inspected from time to time, boxes are specially made with doubled hinged top and side, so that when the catch is released these fall flat; thus admitting of easy inspection or removal of any individual cell. This form of battery box is shown at Fig. 11.[Pg 43]
§ 31. The standard Leclanché battery comes in three sizes: No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3. Unfortunately, different manufacturers don’t use these numbers consistently, so while some refer to the smallest size, or pint size, as No. 1, others apply that label to the largest, or three-pint, size. No. 2 is always the quart size, and this is the size that’s most commonly used. When multiple cells are used to power several bells, it’s a good idea to keep them in a wooden box to prevent damage. Since the batteries need to be checked periodically, the boxes are designed with double hinges on the top and side, allowing the lids to fall flat when the catch is released, making it easy to inspect or remove any single cell. This type of battery box is shown at Fig. 11.[Pg 43]
§ 32. There are certain ills to which the Leclanché cells are liable that require notice here. The first is creeping. By creeping is meant the gradual crystallisation of the sal ammonium up the inside and round the outside of the glass containing jar. There are two modes of preventing this. The first consists in filling in the neck with melted pitch, two small funnel-like tubes being previously inserted to admit of the addition of fresh sal ammoniac solution, and for the escape of gas. This mode cannot be recommended, as it is almost impossible to remove the pitch (in case it be required to renew the zinc, etc.) without breaking the glass vessel. The best way to remove the pitch is to[Pg 44] place the cell in a large saucepan of cold water, and set it on a fire until the water boils. The pitch is, by this treatment, so far softened that the elements can be removed and the pitch scraped away with a knife.
§ 32. There are some issues that Leclanché cells can face that need to be mentioned here. The first is creeping. Creeping refers to the gradual crystallization of ammonium chloride up the inside and around the outside of the glass jar. There are two ways to prevent this. The first method involves filling the neck with melted pitch, after inserting two small funnel-like tubes to allow for adding fresh ammonium solution and for gas to escape. However, this method is not recommended because it’s nearly impossible to remove the pitch if you need to replace the zinc or do other maintenance without breaking the glass container. The best way to get rid of the pitch is to place the cell in a large pot of cold water and heat it until the water boils. This process softens the pitch enough so that the components can be removed and the pitch can be scraped off with a knife.
By far the better mode is to rub round the inside and outside of the neck of the jar with tallow, or melted paraffin wax, to the depth of an inch or thereabouts. This effectually prevents creeping and the consequent loss of current. Messrs. Gent, of Leicester, have introduced a very neat modification of the Leclanché cell, with a view to obviate altogether the evils deriving from creeping. This cell is illustrated at Fig. 12, and the following is the description supplied by the patentees:—"All who have had experience of batteries in which a solution of salts is used are aware of the difficulty experienced in preventing it creeping over the outside of the jar, causing local loss, and oftentimes emptying the jar of its solution. Many devices have been tried to prevent this, but the only effectual one is our patent insulated jar, in which a recess surrounds the top of the jar, this recess being filled with a material to which the salts will not adhere, thus keeping the outside of the[Pg 45] jar perfectly clean. It is specially adapted for use in hot climates, and is the only cell in which jars may touch each other and yet retain their insulations. We confidently recommend a trial of this cell. Its price is but little in excess of the ordinary Leclanché." The battery should be set up in as cool a place as possible, as heat is very conducive to creeping. It is also important that the battery should be placed as near as convenient to the bell.
The better method is to apply tallow or melted paraffin wax around the inside and outside of the neck of the jar, about an inch deep. This effectively prevents creeping and the resulting loss of current. Messrs. Gent, from Leicester, have introduced a neat modification of the Leclanché cell to completely eliminate the issues caused by creeping. This cell is shown at Fig. 12, and here’s the description provided by the inventors: "Anyone who has dealt with batteries using a salt solution knows how hard it is to stop the solution from creeping over the jar’s exterior, leading to localized loss and often draining the jar of its solution. Many solutions have been attempted, but the only effective one is our patented insulated jar, which has a recess around the top that is filled with a material resistant to salt adhesion, keeping the outside of the jar perfectly clean. It’s especially suited for hot climates and is the only cell where jars can touch while still maintaining their insulation. We strongly recommend trying this cell. Its price is only slightly higher than that of a standard Leclanché." The battery should be placed in the coolest location possible since heat encourages creeping. It’s also important to position the battery as close to the bell as convenient.
Sometimes the zincs are seen to become coated with a black substance, or covered with crystals, rapidly wasting away at the same time, although doing little or no work; a strong smell of ammonia being given off at the same time. When this occurs, it points to an electrical leakage, or short circuit, and this, of course, rapidly exhausts the battery. It is of the utmost importance to the effective working of any battery that not the slightest leakage or local action should be allowed to take place. However slight such loss be, it will eventually ruin the battery. This leakage may be taking place in the battery, as a porous cell may be broken, and carbon may be touching the zinc; or out of the battery, along the conducting wires, by one touching the other, or through partial conductivity of a damp wall, a metallic staple, etc., or by creeping. If loss or local action has taken place, it is best, after discovering and repairing the faults (see also testing wires), to replace the old zincs by new ones, which are not costly.
Sometimes the zincs can get coated with a black substance or covered in crystals, quickly deteriorating at the same time while doing little or no work, and releasing a strong smell of ammonia. When this happens, it indicates an electrical leak or short circuit, which quickly drains the battery. It's crucial for the effective operation of any battery that there is absolutely no leakage or local action occurring. Even the slightest loss can eventually ruin the battery. This leakage could be happening inside the battery if a porous cell is broken and carbon is touching the zinc, or outside the battery along the wires if one is touching the other, or due to partial conductivity of a damp wall, a metallic staple, etc., or by creeping. If leakage or local action has occurred, it’s best to find and fix the issues (see also testing wires) and then replace the old zincs with new ones, which are not expensive.
§ 33. There is yet a modification of the Leclanché[Pg 46] which is sometimes used to ring the large bells in hotels, etc., known as the Leclanché reversed, since the zinc is placed in the porous pot, this latter being stood in the centre of the stoneware jar, the space between the two being packed with broken carbon and manganese dioxide. By this means a very much larger negative surface is obtained. In the Grenet cell, the porous cell is replaced by a canvas bag, which is packed full of lumps of graphite and carbon dioxide, a central rod of carbon being used as the electrode. This may be used in out-of-the-way places where porous cells are not readily obtainable, but I cannot recommend them for durability.
§ 33. There's another version of the Leclanché[Pg 46] that’s sometimes used to ring large bells in hotels, known as the reversed Leclanché. In this setup, the zinc is placed inside the porous pot, which is positioned at the center of the stoneware jar, with the space in between filled with broken carbon and manganese dioxide. This creates a much larger negative surface area. In the Grenet cell, the porous cell is replaced by a canvas bag filled with chunks of graphite and carbon dioxide, with a central carbon rod acting as the electrode. This design can be used in remote locations where porous cells are hard to find, but I can’t recommend them for longevity.
§ 34. The only other type of battery which it will be needful to notice in connection with bell work is one in which the depolariser is either chromic acid or a compound of chromic acid with potash or lime. Chromic acid consists of hydrogen united to the metal chromium and oxygen. Potassic dichromate (bichromate of potash: bichrome) contains potassium, chromium, and oxygen. If we represent potassium by K, chromium by Cr, and oxygen by O, we can get a fair idea of its constitution by expressing it as K2Cr2O7, by which it is shown that one molecule of this body contains two atoms of potassium united to two atoms of chromium and seven atoms of oxygen. Bichromate of potash readily parts with its oxygen; and it is upon this, and upon the relatively large amount of oxygen it contains, that its efficiency as a depolariser depends. Unfortunately, bichromate of potash is not very soluble in water; one pint of water will not take up much more than three[Pg 47] ounces of this salt. Hence, though the solution of potassium bichromate is an excellent depolariser as long as it contains any of the salt, it soon becomes exhausted. When bichromate of potash is used in a cell along with sulphuric acid and water, sulphate of potash and chromic acid are formed, thus:—
§ 34. The only other type of battery worth mentioning in relation to bell work is one where the depolarizer is either chromic acid or a compound of chromic acid with potash or lime. Chromic acid is made up of hydrogen combined with the metal chromium and oxygen. Potassium dichromate (bichromate of potash) contains potassium, chromium, and oxygen. If we use K for potassium, Cr for chromium, and O for oxygen, we can represent its structure as K2Cr2O7, indicating that one molecule of this compound consists of two atoms of potassium, two atoms of chromium, and seven atoms of oxygen. Bichromate of potash easily releases its oxygen, and its effectiveness as a depolarizer relies on this, as well as the relatively high amount of oxygen it contains. Unfortunately, potassium bichromate is not very soluble in water; one pint of water can only dissolve about three[Pg 47] ounces of this salt. Therefore, while a solution of potassium bichromate is an excellent depolarizer as long as it has any of the salt left, it quickly runs out. When bichromate of potash is used in a cell with sulfuric acid and water, potassium sulfate and chromic acid are produced, as follows:—
K2Cr2O7 | + | H2SO4 | + | H2O | = | K2SO4 | + | 2H2CrO4 |
┗━━━┛ | ┗━━┛ | ┗━┛ | ┗━━┛ | ┗━━━┛ | ||||
1 molecule of bichrome. | & | 1 molecule of sulphuric acid. | & | 1 molecule of water. | give | 1 molecule of sulphate of potash. | & | 2 molecules of chromic acid. |
From this we learn that before the potassium bichromate enters into action in the battery, it is resolved into chromic acid. Chromic acid is now prepared cheaply on a large scale, so that potassium bichromate may always be advantageously replaced by chromic acid in these batteries; the more so as chromic acid is extremely soluble in water. In the presence of the hydrogen evolved during the action of the battery (§ 18) chromic acid parts with a portion of its oxygen, forming water and sesquioxide of chromium, Cr2O3, and this, finding itself in contact with the sulphuric acid, always used to increase the conductivity of the liquid, forms sulphate of chromium. The action of the hydrogen upon the chromic acid is shown in the following equation:—
From this, we learn that before potassium bichromate takes effect in the battery, it breaks down into chromic acid. Chromic acid is now produced cheaply on a large scale, so potassium bichromate can always be effectively replaced with chromic acid in these batteries; especially since chromic acid is highly soluble in water. In the presence of the hydrogen released during the battery's operation (§ 18), chromic acid loses some of its oxygen, creating water and chromium sesquioxide, Cr2O3, and this, when it comes into contact with the sulfuric acid, which is always used to boost the liquid's conductivity, forms chromium sulfate. The reaction of hydrogen with chromic acid is illustrated in the following equation:—
2H2CrO4 | + | 3H2 | = | 5H2O | + | Cr2O3 |
┗━━━┛ | ┗━┛ | ┗━━┛ | ┗━━┛ | |||
2 molecules of chromic acid. | & | 3 molecules of hydrogen. | give | 5 molecules of water. | & | 1 molecule of chromium sesquioxide. |
§ 35. The "bottle" form of the bichromate or chromic acid battery (as illustrated at Fig. 13) is much employed where powerful currents of short duration are required. It consists of a globular bottle with a rather long wide neck, in which are placed two long narrow graphite plates, electrically connected to each other and to one of the binding screws on the top. Between these two plates is a sliding rod, carrying at its lower extremity the plate of zinc. This sliding rod can be lowered and raised, or retained in any position, by means of a set screw. The zinc is in metallic connection with the other binding screw. This battery (which, owing to the facility with which the zinc can be removed from the fluid, is extremely convenient and economical for short experiments) may be charged with either of the following fluids:—
§ 35. The "bottle" version of the bichromate or chromic acid battery (as shown at Fig. 13) is commonly used when strong currents of short duration are needed. It features a round bottle with a relatively long, wide neck, containing two long, narrow graphite plates that are electrically connected to each other and to one of the binding screws on top. Between these plates is a sliding rod that holds a zinc plate at its lower end. This sliding rod can be adjusted up and down or fixed in place using a set screw. The zinc is electrically connected to the other binding screw. This battery (which is very practical and cost-effective for quick experiments because the zinc can be easily removed from the liquid) can be charged with either of the following fluids:—
First Recipe.
First Recipe.
Bichromate Solution.
Bichromate solution.
Bichromate of potash (finely powdered) 3 oz.
Boiling water 1 pint.
Bichromate of potash (finely powdered) 3 oz.
Boiling water 1 pint
Stir with a glass rod, allow to cool, then add, in a fine stream, with constant stirring,
Stir with a glass rod, let it cool, then add, in a fine stream, while continually stirring,
Strong sulphuric acid (oil of vitriol) 3 fluid oz.
Strong sulfuric acid (oil of vitriol) 3 fl oz.
The mixture should be made in a glazed earthern vessel, and allowed to cool before using.[Pg 49]
The mixture should be made in a glazed clay pot and let cool before using.[Pg 49]
Second Recipe.
Second Recipe.
Chromic Acid Solution.
Chromic acid solution.
Chromic acid (chromic trioxide) 3 oz.
Water 1 pint.
Chromic acid (chromic trioxide) 3 oz.
Water 1 pint
Stir together till dissolved, then add gradually, with stirring,
Stir together until dissolved, then gradually add while stirring,
Sulphuric acid 3 oz.
Sulfuric acid 3 oz.
This also must not be used till cold.
This should not be used until it's cold.
In either case the bottle must not be more than three parts filled with the exciting fluid, to allow plenty of room for the zinc to be drawn right out of the liquid when not in use.
In either case, the bottle should not be filled more than one-third with the exciting liquid to leave enough space for the zinc to be fully removed from the liquid when not in use.
§ 36. The effects given by the above battery, though very powerful, are too transient to be of any service in continuous bell work. The following modification, known as the "Fuller" cell, is, however, useful where powerful currents are required, and, when carefully set up, may be made to do good service for five or six months at a stretch. The "Fuller" cell consists in an outer glass or glazed earthern vessel, in which stands a porous pot. In the porous pot is placed a large block of amalgamated zinc, that is cast around a stout copper rod, which carries the binding screw. This rod must be carefully protected from the action of the fluid, by being cased in an indiarubber tube. The amalgamation of the zinc must be kept up by putting a small quantity of mercury in the porous cell. The porous cells must be paraffined to within about half an inch of the bottom, to prevent too rapid diffusion of the liquids,[Pg 50] and the cells themselves should be chosen rather thick and close in texture, as otherwise the zinc will be rapidly corroded. Water alone is used as the exciting fluid in the porous cell along with the zinc. Speaking of this form of cell, Mr. Perren-Maycock says:—"The base of the zinc is more acted on (when bichromate crystals are used), because the porous cells rest on the crystals; therefore let it be well paraffined, as also the top edge. Instead of paraffining the pot in strips all round (as many operators do) paraffin the pot all round, except at one strip about half an inch wide, and let this face the carbon plate. If this be done, the difference in internal resistance between the cell with paraffined pot and the same cell with pot unparaffined will be little; but if the portion that is unparaffined be turned away from the carbon, it will make very nearly an additional 1 ohm resistance. It is necessary to have an ounce or so of mercury in each porous cell, covering the foot of the zinc; or the zincs may be cast short, but of large diameter, hollowed out at the top to hold mercury, and suspended in the porous pot. The zinc is less acted on then, for when the bichromate solution diffuses into the porous pot, it obviously does so more at the bottom than at the top."[Pg 51]
§ 36. The effects produced by the battery mentioned above, although quite strong, are too brief to be useful in continuous bell work. However, the "Fuller" cell modification is effective when powerful currents are needed and, if set up correctly, can function well for five or six months at a time. The "Fuller" cell consists of an outer glass or glazed earthen container, which holds a porous pot. Inside the porous pot is a large piece of amalgamated zinc that is shaped around a thick copper rod, which has a binding screw. This rod must be carefully protected from the fluid by encasing it in an indiarubber tube. The zinc must be kept amalgamated by adding a small amount of mercury to the porous cell. The porous cells should be paraffined to about half an inch from the bottom to slow down the diffusion of the liquids, and the cells themselves should be selected to be fairly thick and dense, otherwise, the zinc will corrode quickly. Water alone is used as the exciting fluid in the porous cell along with the zinc. Discussing this type of cell, Mr. Perren-Maycock notes:—"The base of the zinc is more affected (when using bichromate crystals) because the porous cells rest on the crystals; therefore, ensure it is well paraffined, as well as the top edge. Instead of paraffining the pot in strips all around (as many operators do), paraffin the pot all around except for one strip about half an inch wide, which should face the carbon plate. If this is done, the difference in internal resistance between the cell with a paraffined pot and the same cell with an un-paraffined pot will be minimal; however, if the un-paraffined portion is turned away from the carbon, it will add nearly an extra 1 ohm resistance. It’s essential to have about an ounce of mercury in each porous cell, covering the bottom of the zinc; alternatively, the zinc can be cast short but wide, hollowed out at the top to hold mercury, and suspended in the porous pot. This way, the zinc is less affected because when the bichromate solution seeps into the porous pot, it obviously does so more at the bottom than at the top."[Pg 51]
Fig. 14 illustrates the form usually given to the modification of the Fuller cell as used for bell and signalling work.
Fig. 14 shows the typical design of the modification of the Fuller cell as utilized for bell and signaling tasks.
§ 37. Before leaving the subject of batteries, there are certain points in connection therewith that it is absolutely essential that the practical man should understand, in order to be able to execute any work satisfactorily. In the first place, it must be borne in mind that a cell or battery, when at work, is continually setting up electric undulations, somewhat in the same way that an organ pipe, when actuated by a pressure of air, sets up a continuous sound wave. Whatever sets up the electric disturbance, whether it be the action of sulphuric acid on zinc, or caustic potash on iron, etc., is called electromotive force, generally abbreviated E.M.F. Just in the same manner that the organ pipe could give no sound if the pressure of air were alike inside and out, so the cell, or battery, cannot possibly give current, or evidence of electric flow, unless there is some means provided to allow the tension, or increased atomic motion set up by the electromotive force, to distribute itself along some line of conductor or conductors not subjected to the same pressure or E.M.F. In other words, the "current" of electricity will always tend to flow from that body which has the highest tension, towards the body where the strain or tension is less. In a cell in which zinc and carbon, zinc and copper, or zinc and silver are the two elements, with an acid as an excitant, the zinc during the action of the acid becomes of higher "potential" than the other element,[Pg 52] and consequently the undulations take place towards the negative plate (be it carbon, copper, or silver). But by this very action the negative plate immediately reaches a point of equal tension, so that no current is possible. If, however, we now connect the two plates together by means of any conductor, say a copper wire, then the strain to which the carbon plate is subjected finds its exit along the wire and the zinc plate, which is continually losing its strain under the influence of the acid, being thus at a lower potential (electrical level, strain) than the carbon, can and does actually take in and pass on the electric vibrations. It is therefore evident that no true "current" can pass unless the two elements of a battery are connected up by a conductor. When this connection is made, the circuit is called a "closed circuit." If, on the contrary, there is no electrical connection between the negative and positive plates of a cell or battery, the circuit is said to be open, or broken. It may be that the circuit is closed by some means that is not desirable, that is to say, along some line or at some time when and where the flow is not wanted; as, for instance, the outside of a cell may be wet, and one of the wires resting against it, when of course "leakage" will take place as the circuit will be closed, though no useful work will be done. On the other hand, we may actually take advantage of the practically unlimited amount of the earth's surface, and of its cheapness as a conductor to make it act as a portion of the conducting line. It is perfectly true that the earth is a very poor conductor as compared with[Pg 53] metals. Let us say, for the sake of example, that damp earth conducts 100,000 times worse than copper. It will be evident that if a copper wire 1/20 of an inch in section could convey a given electric current, the same length of earth having a section of 5,000 inches would carry the same current equally well, and cost virtually nothing, beyond the cost of a metal plate, or sack of coke, presenting a square surface of a little over 70 inches in the side at each end of the line. This mode of completing the circuit is known as "the earth plate."
§ 37. Before wrapping up the topic of batteries, there are a few key points that anyone working with them should understand to do their job effectively. First, it's important to remember that a cell or battery is always creating electrical waves while it's in use, similar to how an organ pipe produces a continuous sound wave when air flows through it. The source of the electrical disturbance, whether it's sulfuric acid acting on zinc or caustic potash acting on iron, is referred to as electromotive force, or E.M.F. Just like an organ pipe won't produce sound if the air pressure is equal inside and out, a cell or battery can't generate a current or show electric flow without a way to allow the tension—or increased atomic motion caused by the electromotive force—to spread along a conductor or conductors that aren't under the same pressure or E.M.F. In simpler terms, the flow of electricity naturally moves from the area with higher tension to the area with lower tension. In a cell where zinc and carbon, zinc and copper, or zinc and silver are paired with an acid as the reactant, the zinc becomes higher in "potential" than the other element during the acid reaction, which causes the waves to move toward the negative plate (whether it’s carbon, copper, or silver). However, this action causes the negative plate to quickly equalize in tension, stopping any current from flowing. If we connect the two plates with a conductor, like a copper wire, then the strain on the carbon plate will travel through the wire, while the zinc plate, which is continuously losing strain due to the acid, becomes lower in potential (electrical level, strain) than the carbon and will take in and transmit the electric vibrations. This makes it clear that no true "current" can flow unless the two elements of a battery are connected by a conductor. Once this connection is made, it’s called a "closed circuit." On the flip side, if there’s no electrical connection between the negative and positive plates of a cell or battery, the circuit is said to be open or broken. Sometimes the circuit may be closed in an undesired way, meaning the current flows when it isn't wanted. For example, if the outside of a cell is wet, and one of the wires contacts it, "leakage" occurs as the circuit closes, but no useful work gets done. Conversely, we can take advantage of the vast surface of the earth and its low cost as a conductor to make it part of the circuit. It’s true that the earth isn’t a great conductor compared to metals. For instance, let’s say damp earth conducts electricity 100,000 times worse than copper. It’s clear that if a copper wire 1/20 of an inch in diameter can carry a certain electric current, the same length of earth with a cross-section of 5,000 inches could carry the same current just as effectively, costing almost nothing apart from the cost of a metal plate or a bag of coke with a square surface area just over 70 inches on each end of the line. This method of completing the circuit is known as "the earth plate."
§ 38. The next point to be remembered in connection with batteries is, that the electromotive force (E.M.F.) depends on the nature of the elements (zinc and silver, zinc and carbon, etc.) and the excitants used in the cell, and has absolutely nothing whatever to do with their size. This may be likened to difference of temperature in bodies. Thus, whether we have a block of ice as large as an iceberg or an inch square, the temperature will never exceed 32°F. as long as it remains ice; and whether we cause a pint or a thousand gallons of water to boil (under ordinary conditions), its temperature will not exceed 212°F. The only means we have of increasing the E.M.F., or "tension," or "potential," of any given battery, is by connecting up its constituent cells in series; that is to say, connecting the carbon or copper plate of the one cell to the zinc of the next, and so on. By this means we increase the E.M.F. just in the same degree as we add on cells. The accepted standard for the measure of electromotive force is called a VOLT, and 1 volt is practically a trifle less than[Pg 54] the E.M.F. set up by a single Daniell's cell; the exact amount being 1·079 volt, or 1-1/12 volt very nearly. The E.M.F. of the Leclanché is very nearly 1·6 volt, or nearly 1 volt and 2/3. Thus in Fig. 15, which illustrates 3 Leclanché cells set up in series, we should get
§ 38. The next thing to keep in mind when talking about batteries is that the electromotive force (E.M.F.) depends on the materials used (like zinc and silver, or zinc and carbon) and the chemicals in the cell, and has absolutely nothing to do with their size. This is similar to how temperature works with bodies. For instance, whether we have a block of ice as big as an iceberg or just an inch square, the temperature won't go above 32°F as long as it remains ice; and whether we boil a pint or a thousand gallons of water (under normal conditions), its temperature won’t exceed 212°F. The only way to increase the E.M.F., or "tension," or "potential," of any battery is by connecting its individual cells in series; meaning we connect the carbon or copper plate of one cell to the zinc of the next, and continue that way. This method increases the E.M.F. by the same amount for each cell we add. The standard measure for electromotive force is called a VOLT, and 1 volt is just a bit less than [Pg 54] the E.M.F. produced by a single Daniell's cell; the exact value is 1.079 volts, or almost 1-1/12 volts. The E.M.F. of the Leclanché cell is close to 1.6 volts, or about 1 volt and 2/3. So, in Fig. 15, where we illustrate 3 Leclanché cells connected in series, we should get
1·6 | volt |
1·6 | " |
1·6 | " |
4·8 | volts |
as the total electromotive force of the combination.
as the total electromotive force of the combination.
§ 39. The current, or amplitude of the continuous vibrations kept up in the circuit, depends upon two things: 1st, the electromotive force; 2nd, the resistance in the circuit. There is a certain amount of resemblance between the flow of water under pressure and electricity in this respect. Let us suppose we have a[Pg 55] constant "head" of water at our disposal, and allow it to flow through a tube presenting 1 inch aperture. We get a certain definite flow of water, let us say 100 gallons of water per hour. More we do not get, owing to the resistance opposed by the narrowness of the tube to a greater flow. If now we double the capacity of the exit tube, leaving the pressure or "head" of water the same, we shall double the flow of water. Or we may arrive at the same result by doubling the "head" or pressure of water, which will then cause a double quantity of water to flow out against the same resistance in the tube, or conductor. Just in the same way, if we have a given pressure of electric strain, or E.M.F., we can get a greater or lesser flow or "current" by having less or more resistance in the circuit. The standard of flowing current is called an Ampère; and 1 ampère is that current which, in passing through a solution of sulphate of copper, will deposit 18·35 grains of copper per hour. The unit of resistance is known as an Ohm. The resistance known as 1 ohm is very nearly that of a column of mercury 1 square millimètre (1/25 of an inch) in section, and 41¼ inches in height; or 1 foot of No. 41 gauge pure copper wire, 33/10000 of an inch in diameter, at a temperature of 32° Fahr., or 0° Centigrade.
§ 39. The current, or the strength of the continuous vibrations maintained in the circuit, depends on two factors: 1st, the electromotive force; 2nd, the resistance in the circuit. There’s a notable similarity between the flow of water under pressure and electricity in this regard. Imagine we have a constant "head" of water available, allowed to flow through a tube with a 1-inch opening. We get a certain steady flow of water, say 100 gallons per hour. We can’t get more than this because the narrowness of the tube restricts a greater flow. If we double the size of the exit tube while keeping the pressure or "head" of water the same, we will double the water flow. Alternatively, we can achieve the same result by doubling the "head" or pressure of water, which will then push out double the amount of water through the same resistance in the tube or conductor. Similarly, if we have a specific electric pressure, or E.M.F., we can have a greater or lesser flow or "current" by adjusting the resistance in the circuit. The standard unit of flowing current is called an Ampere; and 1 ampère is the current that, when passing through a copper sulfate solution, will deposit 18.35 grains of copper per hour. The unit of resistance is called an Ohm's law. The resistance defined as 1 ohm is approximately that of a column of mercury with a cross-sectional area of 1 square millimeter (1/25 of an inch) and a height of 41¼ inches; or 1 foot of No. 41 gauge pure copper wire, measuring 0.0033 inches in diameter, at a temperature of 32° Fahrenheit, or 0° Celsius.
§ 40. Professor Ohm, who made a special study of the relative effects of the resistance inserted in the circuit, the electromotive force, and the current produced, enunciated the following law, which, after him, has been called "Ohm's Law." It is that if we divide the number of electromotive force units (volts) employed by[Pg 56] the number of resistance units (ohms) in the entire circuit, we get the number of current units (ampères) flowing through the circuit. This, expressed as an equation is shown below:
§ 40. Professor Ohm, who conducted a detailed study on the relative effects of resistance in the circuit, the electromotive force, and the current generated, formulated a principle that is now known as "Ohm's Law." It states that if we divide the number of electromotive force units (volts) by the number of resistance units (ohms) in the entire circuit, we can determine the number of current units (amperes) flowing through the circuit. This can be expressed as the following equation:
E/R = C or Electromotive force/Resistance = Current.
E/R = C or Electromotive force/Resistance = Current.
Or if we like to use the initials of volts, ampères, and ohms, instead of the general terms, E, R, and C, we may write V/R = A, or Volts/Ohms = Ampères.
Or if we prefer to use the initials for volts, amperes, and ohms instead of the general terms, E, R, and C, we can write V/R = A, or Volts/Ohms = Amperes.
From this it appears that 1 volt will send a current of 1 ampère through a total resistance of 1 ohm, since 1 divided by 1 equals 1. So also 1 volt can send a current of 4 ampères through a resistance of ¼ of an ohm, since 1 divided by ¼ is equal to 4. We can therefore always double the current by halving the resistance; or we may obtain the same result by doubling the E.M.F., allowing the resistance to remain the same. In performing this with batteries we must bear in mind that the metals, carbon, and liquids in a battery do themselves set up resistance. This resistance is known as "internal resistance," and must always be reckoned in these calculations. We can halve the internal resistance by doubling the size of the negative plate, or what amounts to the same thing by connecting two similar cells "in parallel;" that is to say, with both their zincs together, to form a positive plate of double size, and both carbons or coppers together to form a single negative of twice the dimensions of that in one cell. Any number[Pg 57] of cells thus coupled together "in parallel" have their resistances reduced just in proportion as their number is increased; hence 8 cells, each having a resistance of 1 ohm if coupled together in parallel would have a joint resistance of ⅛ ohm only. The E.M.F. would remain the same, since this does not depend on the size of the plate (see § 38). The arrangement of cells in parallel is shown at Fig. 16, where three Leclanché cells are illustrated thus coupled. The following little table gives an idea of the E.M.F. in volts, and the internal[Pg 58] resistance in ohms, of the cells mostly used in electric bell work.
From this, it seems that 1 volt will drive a current of 1 amp through a total resistance of 1 ohm, since 1 divided by 1 equals 1. Similarly, 1 volt can push a current of 4 amps through a resistance of ¼ of an ohm, since 1 divided by ¼ equals 4. Therefore, we can always double the current by halving the resistance, or we can achieve the same result by doubling the E.M.F. while keeping the resistance constant. When working with batteries, we need to remember that the metals, carbon, and liquids in a battery create their own resistance. This resistance is called "internal resistance," and it always needs to be considered in these calculations. We can reduce the internal resistance by doubling the size of the negative plate, or equivalently by connecting two similar cells "in parallel;" that is, with both their zincs together to form a positive plate that is double the size, and both carbons or coppers together to create a single negative that is twice the dimensions of that in one cell. Any number of cells connected "in parallel" will have their resistances reduced in direct proportion to the number of cells added; thus, 8 cells, each with a resistance of 1 ohm when connected "in parallel," would have a combined resistance of ⅛ ohm. The E.M.F. would remain unchanged since it doesn’t depend on the size of the plate (see § 38). The setup of cells in parallel is shown in Fig. 16, where three Leclanché cells are depicted in that configuration. The following small table provides an overview of the E.M.F. in volts and the internal resistance in ohms for the cells commonly used in electric bell systems.
TABLE SHOWING E.M.F. AND R. OF BATTERIES.
TABLE SHOWING E.M.F. AND R. OF BATTERIES.
Name of Cell. | Capacity of Cell. | Electromotive force in Volts. | Resistance in Ohms. |
---|---|---|---|
Daniell | 2 quarts | 1·079 | 1 |
Daniell Gravity | 2 quarts | 1·079 | 10 |
Leclanché | 1 pint | 1·60 | 1·13 |
Leclanché | 2 pints | 1·60 | 1·10 |
Leclanché | 3 pints | 1·60 | 0·87 |
Agglomerate | 1 pint | 1·55 | 0·70 |
Agglomerate | 2 pints | 1·55 | 0·60 |
Agglomerate | 3 pints | 1·55 | 0·50 |
Fuller | 1 quart | 1·80 | 0·50 |
From this it is evident that if we joined up the two plates of a Fuller cell with a short wire presenting no appreciable resistance, we should get a current of (1·80 divided by 0·50) 3·6 ampères along the wire; whereas if a gravity Daniell were employed the current flowing in the same wire would only be a little over 1/10 of an ampère, since 1·079/10 = 0·1079. But every wire, no matter how short or how thick, presents some resistance; so we must always take into account both the internal resistance (that of the battery itself) and the external resistance (that of the wires, etc., leading to the bells or indicators) in reckoning for any given current from any cell or cells.
From this, it's clear that if we connect the two plates of a Fuller cell with a short wire that has almost no resistance, we would get a current of (1.80 divided by 0.50) 3.6 amperes through the wire. In contrast, if we used a gravity Daniell cell, the current flowing through the same wire would be just a little over 1/10 of an ampere, since 1.079/10 = 0.1079. However, every wire, regardless of how short or thick, has some resistance; therefore, we always need to consider both the internal resistance (from the battery itself) and the external resistance (from the wires, etc., going to the bells or indicators) when calculating any given current from any cell or cells.
[4] In mixing sulphuric acid with water, the acid should be added in a fine stream, with constant stirring, to the water, and not the water to the acid, lest the great heat evolved should cause the acid to be scattered about.
[4] When mixing sulfuric acid with water, you should add the acid slowly in a thin stream while stirring constantly, and not the other way around, to avoid the intense heat that could cause the acid to splash.
[5] Spirits of salt.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Salty spirits.
[6] Oil of vitriol.
Oil of vitriol.
[7] Aquafortis.
Aquafortis.
CHAPTER III.
ON ELECTRIC BELLS AND OTHER SIGNALLING
APPLIANCES.
§ 41. An electric bell is an arrangement of a cylindrical soft iron core, or cores, surrounded by coils of insulated copper wire. On causing a current of electricity to flow round these coils, the iron becomes, for the time being, powerfully magnetic (see § 13). A piece of soft iron (known as the armature), supported by a spring, faces the magnet thus produced. This armature carries at its free extremity a rod with a bob, clapper or hammer, which strikes a bell, or gong, when the armature, under the influence of the pull of the magnet, is drawn towards it. In connection with the armature and clapper is a device whereby the flow of the current can be rapidly interrupted, so that on the cessation of the current the iron may lose its magnetism, and allow the spring to withdraw the clapper from against the bell. This device is known as the "contact breaker" and varies somewhat in design, according to whether the bell belongs to the trembling, the single stroke, or the continuous ringing class.
§ 41. An electric bell is a setup with a cylindrical soft iron core, or cores, wrapped in coils of insulated copper wire. When an electric current flows through these coils, the iron temporarily becomes highly magnetic (see § 13). A piece of soft iron (called the armature), supported by a spring, is positioned near the magnet created. This armature has a rod with a bob, clapper, or hammer at its free end, which hits a bell or gong when the armature is pulled toward the magnet by its force. There’s a mechanism connected to the armature and clapper that quickly cuts off the current, allowing the iron to lose its magnetism so the spring can pull the clapper away from the bell. This mechanism is called the "contact breaker" and its design varies depending on whether the bell is of the trembling, single stroke, or continuous ringing type.
§ 42. In order that the electric bell-fitter may have an[Pg 60] intelligent conception of his work, he should make a small electric bell himself. By so doing, he will gain more practical knowledge of what are the requisites of a good bell, and where defects may be expected in any he may be called upon to purchase or examine, than he can obtain from pages of written description. For this reason I reproduce here (with some trifling additions and modifications) Mr. G. Edwinson's directions for making an electric bell:—[10]
§ 42. For the electric bell installer to truly understand his work, he should build a small electric bell himself. This hands-on experience will give him a deeper practical understanding of what makes a good bell and where issues might arise in any he may need to buy or inspect, more so than he could get from pages of written explanations. For this reason, I’m including here (with a few minor updates and changes) Mr. G. Edwinson's instructions for making an electric bell:—[10]
How to make a bell.—The old method of doing this was to take a piece of round iron, bend it into the form of a horse-shoe, anneal it (by leaving it for several hours in a bright fire, and allowing it to cool gradually as the fire goes out), wind on the wire, and fix it as a magnet on a stout board of beech or mahogany; a bell was then screwed to another part of the board, a piece of brass holding the hammer and spring being fastened to another part. Many bells made upon this plan are still offered for sale and exchange, but their performance is always liable to variation and obstruction, from the following causes:—To insure a steady, uniform vibratory stroke on the bell, its hammer must be nicely adjusted to move within a strictly defined and limited space; the least fractional departure from this adjustment results in an unsatisfactory performance of the hammer, and often a total failure of the magnet to move it. In bells constructed on the old plan, the wooden base is liable to expansion and contraction, varying with the change of weather and the humidity, temperature, etc., of the room[Pg 61] in which the bells are placed. Thus a damp, foggy night may cause the wood to swell and place the hammer out of range of the bell, while a dry, hot day may alter the adjustment in the opposite direction. Such failures as these, from the above causes alone, have often brought electric bells into disrepute. Best made bells are, therefore, now made with metallic (practically inexpansible) bases, and it is this kind I recommend to my readers.
How to make a bell.—The old way to do this was to take a piece of round iron, bend it into a horseshoe shape, heat it (by leaving it in a bright fire for several hours and letting it cool down gradually as the fire goes out), wrap wire around it, and attach it as a magnet on a sturdy beech or mahogany board; then, a bell was screwed to another part of the board, with a piece of brass holding the hammer and spring fastened to yet another section. Many bells made this way are still available for sale and trade, but their performance is always at risk of variation and obstruction for the following reasons:—To ensure a consistent, uniform strike on the bell, its hammer must be perfectly adjusted to move within a specific and limited space; even the slightest adjustment can lead to poor performance of the hammer and often a complete failure of the magnet to move it. In bells made using the old method, the wooden base can expand and contract with changes in weather and the humidity, temperature, etc., of the room[Pg 61] where the bells are kept. So, on a damp, foggy night, the wood may swell and push the hammer out of reach of the bell, while a dry, hot day may change the adjustment in the opposite way. These kinds of failures have often caused electric bells to gain a bad reputation. The best-made bells today use metallic (virtually non-expanding) bases, and it’s this kind I recommend to my readers.
The Base, to which all the other parts are fastened, is made of ¾ in. mahogany or teak, 6 in. by 4 in., shaped as shown at Fig. 17, with a smooth surface and French polished. To this is attached the metallic base-plate, which may be cut out of sheet-iron, or sheet-brass (this latter is better, as iron disturbs the action of the magnet somewhat), and shaped as shown in Fig. 18; or it may be made of cast-iron, or cast in brass; or a substitute for it may be made in wrought-iron, or brass, as shown in Fig. 19. I present these various forms to suit the varied handicrafts of my readers; for instance, a worker in sheet metal may find it more convenient to[Pg 62] manufacture his bell out of the parts sketched in Figs. 17, 18, 20A, 21, 23, 24A, and 25; but, on the other hand, a smith or engineer might prefer the improved form shown at Fig. 31, and select the parts shown at Figs. 20A, 22, 19, choosing either to forge the horse-shoe magnet, Fig. 20, or to turn up the two cores, as shown at Fig. 21 (A), to screw into the metal base, Fig. 21 B, or to be fastened by nuts, as shown at Fig. 19. The result will be the same in the end, if good workmanship is employed, and the proper care taken in fixing and adjusting the parts. A tin-plate worker may even cut his base-plate out of stout block tin, and get as good results as if the bell were made by an engineer. In some makes, the base-plate is cut or stamped out of thick sheet-iron, in the form shown by the dotted lines on Fig. 18, and when thus made, the part A is turned up at right angles to form a bracket for the magnet cores, the opposite projection is cut off, and a turned brass pillar is inserted at B to hold the contact screw, or contact breaker (§ 41).[Pg 63]
The Base, which all the other parts attach to, is crafted from ¾ in. mahogany or teak, measuring 6 in. by 4 in., shaped as shown at Fig. 17, with a smooth finish and French polish. The metallic base plate is attached to this, which can be cut from sheet iron or sheet brass (the latter is preferable since iron somewhat interferes with the magnet's action), and shaped as shown in Fig. 18; it can also be made from cast iron or cast brass; alternatively, a substitute can be created from wrought iron or brass, as depicted in Fig. 19. I provide these different options to cater to the diverse skills of my readers; for example, a sheet metal worker may find it easier to make their bell from the parts illustrated in Figs. 17, 18, 20A, 21, 23, 24A, and 25; however, a smith or engineer may prefer the enhanced version shown at Fig. 31 and select the parts depicted in Figs. 20A, 22, 19, choosing either to forge the horse-shoe magnet, Fig. 20, or to turn the two cores, as shown at Fig. 21 (A), to screw into the metal base, Fig. 21 B, or to secure it with nuts, as shown at Fig. 19. The outcome will be the same in the end, as long as quality craftsmanship is used and proper attention is given to assembling and adjusting the parts. A tin plate worker might even cut their base plate from a sturdy block of tin and achieve just as good results as if the bell were made by an engineer. In some designs, the base plate is cut or stamped from thick sheet iron, formed as indicated by the dotted lines on Fig. 18, and when made this way, part A is turned up at right angles to create a bracket for the magnet cores, the opposite extension is trimmed off, and a turned brass pillar is inserted at B to hold the contact screw or contact breaker (§ 41).
The Magnet may be formed as shown at Fig. 20, or at Fig. 20A. Its essential parts are: 1st. Two soft iron cores (in some forms a single core is now employed); 2nd. An iron base, or yoke, to hold the cores together; 3rd. Two bobbins wound with wire. The old form of magnet is shown at Fig. 20. In this form the cores and yoke are made out of one piece of metal. A length of round Swedish iron is bent round in the shape of a horseshoe; this is rendered thoroughly soft by annealing, as explained further on. It is absolutely essential that the iron be very soft and well annealed, otherwise the iron cores retain a considerable amount of magnetism when the current is not passing, which makes the bell sluggish in action, and necessitates a higher battery power to make it work (see § 14). Two bobbins of insulated wire are fitted on the cores, and the magnet is held in its place by a transverse strip of brass or iron secured by a wood screw passing between the two bobbins. The size of the iron, the wire, the bobbins, and the method of winding is the same as in the form next described, the only difference being that the length of the iron[Pg 64] core, before bending to the horse-shoe form, must be such as to allow of the two straight portions of the legs to be 2 in. in length, and stand 1⅜ apart when bent. We may now consider the construction of a magnet of the form shown at Fig. 20A. To make the cores of such a magnet, to ring a 2½ in. bell, get two 2 inch lengths of 5/16 in. best Swedish round iron, straighten them, smooth them in a lathe, and reduce ¼ in. of one end of each to 4/16 of an in., leaving a sharp shoulder, as shown at Fig. 21 A. Next, get a 2-in. length of angle iron, drill in it two holes 1⅜ apart, of the exact diameter of the turned ends of the cores, and rivet these securely in their places; this may be done by fastening the cores or legs in a vice whilst they are being rivetted.[Pg 65] Two holes should be also bored in the other flange to receive the two screws, which are to hold the magnet to the base, as shown at Fig. 21 B. The magnet is now quite equal to the horse-shoe form, and must be made quite soft by annealing. This is done by heating it in a clear coal fire to a bright red heat, then burying it in hot ashes, and allowing it to cool gradually for a period of from 12 to 24 hours; or perhaps a better guide to the process will be to say, bury the iron in the hot ashes and leave it there until both it and they are quite cold. The iron must be brought to a bright cherry red heat before allowing it to cool, to soften it properly, and on no account must the cooling be hurried, or the metal will be hard. Iron is rendered hard by hammering, by being rapidly cooled, either in cold air or water,[Pg 66] and hard iron retains magnetism for a longer time than soft iron. As we wish to have a magnet that will only act as such when a current of electricity is passing around it, and shall return to the state of a simple piece of unmagnetised iron when the current is broken, we take the precaution of having it of soft iron. Many bells have failed to act properly, because this precaution has been neglected, the "residual" (or remaining) magnetism holding down the armature after contact has been broken. When the magnet has been annealed, its legs should be polished with a piece of emery cloth, and the ends filed up level and smooth. If it is intended to fasten the cores into the base-plate, this also should be annealed, unless it be made of brass, in which case a thin strip of soft iron should connect the back ends of the two legs before they are attached to the brass base (an iron yoke is preferable, as it certainly is conducive to better effects to have a massive iron yoke, than to have a mere strip as the connecting piece). It will also be readily understood and conceded that the cores should be cut longer when they are to be fastened by nuts, to allow a sufficient length for screwing the ends to receive the nuts. The length and size of the legs given above are suitable for a 2½ in. bell only;[Pg 67] for larger bells the size increases 1/16 of an inch, and the length ¼ of an inch, for every ½ in. increase in the diameter of the bell.
The Magnet can be shaped as shown at Fig. 20, or at Fig. 20A. Its main components are: 1st. Two soft iron cores (in some designs a single core is now used); 2nd. An iron base, or yoke, that holds the cores together; 3rd. Two coils wrapped with wire. The old design of the magnet is illustrated at Fig. 20. In this version, the cores and yoke are made from a single piece of metal. A length of round Swedish iron is bent into a horseshoe shape; this is made thoroughly soft by annealing, as explained later. It's crucial that the iron is very soft and properly annealed, otherwise, the iron cores retain a significant amount of magnetism when the current isn’t flowing, which makes the bell sluggish and requires more battery power to operate it (see § 14). Two insulated wire coils are mounted on the cores, and the magnet is held in place by a cross strip of brass or iron, secured by a wood screw that goes between the two coils. The dimensions of the iron, the wire, the coils, and the wrapping method are the same as in the next described form, the only difference being that the length of the iron core before bending into the horseshoe shape must be such that the two straight sections of the legs are 2 inches long and stand 1⅜ inches apart when bent. Now let’s look at how to construct a magnet like the one shown at Fig. 20A. To create the cores for a magnet that rings a 2½ inch bell, take two 2-inch lengths of 5/16 inch best Swedish round iron, straighten them, smooth them on a lathe, and reduce ¼ inch at one end of each to 4/16 of an inch, leaving a sharp shoulder, as shown at Fig. 21 A. Then, get a 2-inch length of angle iron, drill two holes in it 1⅜ inches apart, with the same diameter as the turned ends of the cores, and rivet these securely in place; this can be done by clamping the cores or legs in a vice while riveting them.[Pg 65] Also, two holes should be drilled in the other flange to accommodate the two screws that will secure the magnet to the base, as shown at Fig. 21 B. The magnet is now equivalent to the horseshoe shape and must be completely softened by annealing. This is done by heating it in a clean coal fire until it’s bright red, then burying it in hot ashes, allowing it to cool slowly for 12 to 24 hours; or as a better guide, you can say to bury the iron in the hot ashes and leave it there until both it and the ashes are completely cool. The iron must reach a bright cherry red heat before letting it cool to soften it properly, and the cooling must not be rushed, or the metal will become hard. Iron becomes hard through hammering or by rapid cooling, either in cold air or water,[Pg 66] and hard iron retains magnetism longer than soft iron. Since we want a magnet that only functions when an electric current flows around it and returns to a regular piece of unmagnetized iron when the current is turned off, we ensure it's made of soft iron. Many bells have failed to operate correctly because this precaution was overlooked, with the "residual" (or lingering) magnetism keeping the armature down even after the current has been interrupted. Once the magnet has been annealed, its legs should be polished with emery cloth, and the ends filed level and smooth. If the cores are intended to be fixed into the base plate, this should also be annealed, unless it's made of brass, in which case a thin strip of soft iron should link the back ends of the two legs before attaching them to the brass base (an iron yoke is preferable because it definitely improves performance to have a solid iron yoke rather than just a strip as the connector). It’s also clear that the cores need to be longer if they're going to be secured with nuts, allowing enough length at the ends to accommodate the nuts. The mentioned length and size of the legs are appropriate only for a 2½ inch bell;[Pg 67] for larger bells, the size increases by 1/16 of an inch and the length by ¼ of an inch for every ½ inch increase in the bell's diameter.
The Bobbins, on which the wire that serves to carry the magnetising current is to be wound, next demand our attention. They may be turned out of boxwood, ebony, or ebonite, or out of any hard wood strong enough and dense enough to allow of being turned down thin in the body, a very necessary requirement to bring the convolutions of wire as near the coil as possible without touching it. Some amateurs use the turned ends of cotton reels or spools, and glue them on to a tube of paper formed on the cores themselves. If this tube be afterwards well covered with melted paraffin wax, the plan answers admirably, but of course the bobbins become fixtures on the magnets. There are some persons who are clever enough to make firm bobbins out of brown paper (like rocket cases), with reel ends, that can be slipped off and on the magnet cores. To these I would say, "by all means at your command, do so if you can." The size of the bobbins for a 2½ in. bell should be: length 1¾ in., diameter of heads ¾ of an in., the length increasing ¼ of an in. and the diameter ⅛ of an in. for every additional ½ in. in the diameter of the bell. The holes throughout the bobbins should be of a size to fit the iron cores exactly, and the cores should project ⅛ of an inch above the end of the bobbins when these are fitted on. The wire to be wound on the bobbins is sold by all dealers in electrical apparatus. It is copper wire, covered with cotton or[Pg 68] with silk, to ensure insulation. Mention has already been made of what is meant by insulation at § 3, but, in order to refresh the reader's memory, Mr. G. Edwinson's words are quoted here. "To insulate, as understood by electricians, means to protect from leakage of the electric current, by interposing a bad conductor of electricity between two good conductors, thus insulating[11] or detaching them from electric contact."
The Bobbins, which are used to wind the wire that carries the magnetizing current, now need our focus. They can be made from boxwood, ebony, ebonite, or any other dense and sturdy hardwood that can be shaped thin in the middle—a crucial requirement to keep the wire coils as close to the core as possible without actually touching it. Some hobbyists use the ends of cotton reels or spools, gluing them onto a paper tube made around the cores themselves. If this tube is then well-coated with melted paraffin wax, this method works very well, but obviously, the bobbins become fixed to the magnets. Some people are skilled enough to create sturdy bobbins from brown paper (like rocket casings) with reel ends that can slide on and off the magnet cores. To those individuals, I say, "if you can, go for it." The dimensions for bobbins for a 2½ in. bell should be: length 1¾ in., diameter of heads ¾ in., with the length increasing by ¼ in. and the diameter by ⅛ in. for every additional ½ in. in bell diameter. The holes in the bobbins should be sized to fit the iron cores snugly, and the cores should extend ⅛ in. above the end of the bobbins when they are installed. The wire used to wind the bobbins is available from all electrical supply dealers. It is copper wire, covered with either cotton or silk for insulation. We've already discussed what insulation means at § 3, but to refresh your memory, here are Mr. G. Edwinson's words: "To insulate, as understood by electricians, means to protect from leakage of the electric current by placing a poor conductor of electricity between two good conductors, thus insulating[11] or separating them from electrical contact."
The following list will enable my readers to see at a glance the value of the substances mentioned here as conductors or insulators, the best conductors being arranged from the top downwards, and the bad conductors or insulators opposed to them in similar order, viz., the worst conductors or best insulators being at the top:—
The following list will allow my readers to quickly see the value of the substances mentioned here as conductors or insulators, with the best conductors listed from top to bottom, and the poor conductors or insulators listed in the same order, meaning the worst conductors or best insulators are at the top:—
Conductors. | Insulators. |
---|---|
Silver. | Paraffin Wax. |
Copper. | Guttapercha. |
Iron. | Indiarubber. |
Brass. | Shellac. |
All Other Metals. | Varnishes. |
Metallic Solutions. | Sealing Wax. |
Metallic Salts. | Silk and Cotton. |
Wet Stone. | Dry Clothing. |
Wet Wood. | Dry Wood. |
Oil, Dirt and Rust. |
It will be seen, on reference to the above, that copper is a good conductor, being excelled by silver alone in this respect; and that silk and cotton are bad conductors. When, therefore, a copper wire is bound round with silk or with cotton, even if two or more strands of such a covered wire be superimposed, since these are electrically separated by the non-conducting covering, no escape of electricity from one strand to the other can take place, and the strands are said to be insulated. If the copper wire had been coiled naked round a bobbin, each convolution touching its neighbour, the current would not have circled round the whole length of the coils of wire, but would have leapt across from one coil to the other, and thus the desired effect would not have been obtained. A similar result, differing only in degree, would occur if a badly insulating wire were used, say one in which the covering had been worn in places, or had been badly wound, so as to expose patches of bare copper wire. If the insulation of a wire be suspected, it should be immersed in hot melted paraffin wax, and then hung up to drain and cool. The size of wire to be used on a 2½ in. bell should be No. 24 B. W. G., the size falling two numbers for each ½ in. increase in the diameter of the bell. In these wires the higher the number, the finer the size, No. 6 being 1/5 and No. 40 being 1/200 of an inch in diameter. Silk-covered wire has an advantage over cotton-covered wire, inasmuch as the insulating material occupies less space, hence the convolutions of wire lie closer together. This is important, as the current has less effect on the iron if removed further[Pg 70] from it, the decrease being as the square of the distance that the current is removed from the wire. Magnets coiled with silk-covered wire admit also of better finish, but for most purposes cotton-covered wire will give satisfaction, especially if well paraffined. This wire must be wound on the bobbins, from end to end regularly, with the coils side by side, as a reel of cotton is wound. This may be done on a lathe, but a little practice will be necessary before the inexperienced hand can guide the wire in a regular manner. If, however, the spool of wire have a metal rod passed up its centre, and this be held in the hand at a distance of a foot or more from the bobbin on the lathe, the wire will almost guide itself on, providing the guiding hand be allowed to follow its course. With a little care, the wire for these little magnets may be wound entirely by hand. Before commencing to wind on the bobbins, just measure off 8 in. of the wire (not cutting it off) and coil this length around a pencil, to form a small coil or helix. The pencil may then be withdrawn from the helix thus formed, which serves to connect the wire with one of the points of contact. This free end is to be fastened outside the bobbin by a nick in the head; or the ⅛ in. length, before being formed into a helix, may be pushed through a small hole made on the head of the bobbin, so that 8 in. project outside the bobbin, which projecting piece may be coiled into a helix as above described. The wire should now be wound exactly as a reel of cotton is wound, in close coils from end to end, and then back again, until three layers of[Pg 71] wire have been laid on, so that the coiling finishes at the opposite end to that at which it began. To prevent this uncoiling, it should be fastened by tying down tightly with a turn or two of strong silk. The wire should now be cut from the hank, leaving about 2 in. of free wire projecting at the finishing end of each bobbin. In cases where many bobbins have to be wound, either for bells, for relays, or for indicator coils, a device similar to that illustrated at Fig. 21 A may be employed. This electric bobbin winder consists in a table which can be stood on a lathe or near any other driving wheel. Two carriers, C C, somewhat similar to the back centre and poppet head of a lathe, hollow inside, and furnished with a spring and sliding piston spindle, stand one at each end of this table. The sliding spindle of the one carries at its extremity a pulley, A, by means of which motion can be transmitted from the band of the driving wheel. The sliding spindles, B B, are fitted with recesses and screws, H H H H, by means of which the temporary wooden cores, or the permanent iron cores, of the bobbins can be held while the bobbins are being wound. The bobbin is placed as shown at D; a flat piece of metal, E, hinged at G, presses against the bobbin, owing to the spring F. The centre figure shows details of the carrier, C, in section. At the bottom is shown the spool of wire on a standard L. The wire passes from this spot between the two indiarubber rollers, M M, on to the bobbin D.
It can be seen from the above that copper is a good conductor, surpassed only by silver in this regard, while silk and cotton are poor conductors. Therefore, when a copper wire is wrapped with silk or cotton, even if two or more strands of this covered wire are stacked together, since they are electrically separated by the non-conducting covering, there can be no transfer of electricity from one strand to another, and the strands are considered insulated. If the copper wire had been coiled bare around a bobbin, with each turn touching its neighbor, the current would not flow through the entire length of the wire coils but would jump from one coil to another, and the desired effect would not be achieved. A similar outcome, though to a different degree, would occur if a poorly insulating wire were used, such as one where the covering has worn in spots or has been wrapped poorly, exposing areas of bare copper wire. If the insulation of a wire is in doubt, it should be dipped in hot melted paraffin wax and then hung up to drain and cool. The recommended wire size for a 2½ in. bell is No. 24 B.W.G., decreasing by two numbers for every ½ in. increase in the bell's diameter. In these wires, a higher number means a finer size, with No. 6 measuring 1/5 and No. 40 measuring 1/200 of an inch in diameter. Silk-covered wire has an advantage over cotton-covered wire because the insulating material takes up less space, allowing the wire turns to be closer together. This matters, as the current affects the iron less when it is further away, with the decrease being proportional to the square of the distance from the wire. Magnets wrapped with silk-covered wire also have a better finish, but for most applications, cotton-covered wire will work well, especially if properly paraffined. This wire must be wound on the bobbins evenly from end to end, with the coils placed side by side, just like a reel of cotton is wound. This can be done on a lathe, but a bit of practice is needed before a beginner can guide the wire smoothly. However, if the spool of wire has a metal rod passed through its center, and this rod is held in hand about a foot or more from the bobbin on the lathe, the wire will almost guide itself on, as long as the guiding hand is allowed to follow its path. With a bit of care, the wire for these small magnets may be wound entirely by hand. Before starting to wind on the bobbins, measure off 8 in. of the wire (without cutting it) and wrap this length around a pencil to create a small coil or helix. The pencil can then be removed from the helix, which serves to connect the wire with one of the contact points. This free end should be secured outside the bobbin by a notch in the head; alternatively, the ⅛ in. length, before being wound into a helix, can be pushed through a small hole made in the bobbin's head, so that 8 in. extends outside the bobbin, and this projecting piece can then be coiled into a helix as previously described. The wire should now be wound just like a reel of cotton, in tight coils from end to end, and then back again, until three layers of wire have been applied, finishing at the end opposite from where it started. To prevent uncoiling, it should be secured tightly with a turn or two of strong silk. The wire should then be cut from the hank, leaving about 2 in. of free wire extending at the finished end of each bobbin. In situations where many bobbins need to be wound, either for bells, relays, or indicator coils, a device like the one shown at Fig. 21 A may be used. This electric bobbin winder consists of a table that can be placed on a lathe or near any other driving wheel. Two carriers, C C, somewhat like the back center and poppet head of a lathe, hollow inside, and equipped with a spring and sliding piston spindle, are located at each end of the table. The sliding spindle of one carries a pulley, A, through which motion can be conveyed from the belt of the driving wheel. The sliding spindles, B B, have recesses and screws, H H H H, that hold the temporary wooden cores or the permanent iron cores of the bobbins while they are being wound. The bobbin is placed as shown at D; a flat piece of metal, E, hinged at G, presses against the bobbin due to the spring F. The center figure shows details of the carrier, C, in section. At the bottom is the spool of wire on a stand L. The wire runs from this point between the two rubber rollers, M M, onto the bobbin D.
When the bobbins have been wound, they may be slipped over the magnet cores. They should fit pretty tightly; if they do not, a roll of paper may be put round[Pg 72] the magnet cores, to ensure their not slipping when the bell is at work. The helix ends of the bobbins should stand uppermost, as shown at Fig. 22 A. A short length of the lower free ends of wire (near the base or yoke) should now be bared of their covering, cleaned[Pg 73] with emery paper, twisted together tightly, as shown at Fig. 22 B, soldered together, and any excess of wire cut off with a sharp pair of pliers. To prevent any chance electrical leakage between this bared portion of the wire and the iron, it should be carefully coated with a little melted guttapercha, or Prout's electric glue.
Once the bobbins are wound, they can be placed over the magnet cores. They should fit snugly; if they don't, wrapping a piece of paper around the magnet cores can help keep them from slipping when the bell operates. The helix ends of the bobbins should be facing upwards, as shown at Fig. 22 A. Next, a short section of the lower free ends of wire (near the base or yoke) should be stripped of its insulation, cleaned with emery paper, tightly twisted together as shown at Fig. 22 B, soldered, and any excess wire cut off with sharp pliers. To prevent any potential electrical leakage between this stripped portion of the wire and the iron, it should be carefully coated with a bit of melted guttapercha or Prout's electric glue.
Of course, if the operator has any skill at winding, he may wind both bobbins with one continuous length of wire, thus avoiding joins, taking care that the direction of the winding in the finished coils be as shown at Fig. 22 B; that is to say, that the wire from the under side of one bobbin, should pass over to the next in the same way as the curls of the letter S.
Of course, if the operator is skilled at winding, they can wind both bobbins with one continuous length of wire, avoiding any joins. It's important to ensure that the winding direction in the finished coils is as shown at Fig. 22 B; in other words, the wire from the under side of one bobbin should pass over to the next just like the curls of the letter S.
The part that next claims our consideration is the[Pg 74] armature, with its fittings. The armature is made out of 5/16 square bar iron, of the best quality, soft, and well annealed, and filed up smooth and true. The proportionate length is shown at Figs. 23 and 24; and the size of the iron for other bells is regulated in the same ratio as that of the cores. Two methods of making and attaching the springs and hammers are shown. Fig. 24 shows the section of an armature fitted with back spring and contact spring in one piece. This is cut out of hard sheet-brass, as wide as the armature, filed or hammered down to the desired degree of springiness, then filed up true on the edges. It may be attached to the iron of the armature, either by soldering, by rivetting, or by means[Pg 75] of two small screws. Rivetting is, perhaps, the best mode, as it is not liable to shake loose by the vibration of the hammer. The spring at its shank end may be screwed or rivetted to the bracket. Mr. Edwinson considers this the better form of contact spring. The other form is made in two pieces, as shown at Fig. 23, where two strips of hard brass are cut off, of the width of the armature, and the edges filed. A slot is then cut in the back end of the armature to receive the two brass strips, and these are soldered into it. The top strip is then bent back over the armature to form the contact-spring, the other strip being soldered or rivetted to a small bracket of angle brass. In either case a short rod of stout hard brass wire is rivetted or screwed into the free end of the armature, and to the end of this rod is screwed or soldered the metal bead, or bob, which forms the hammer or "clapper" of the bell. The next portion to be made is the contact pillar, or bracket, with its screw, as shown at Fig. 25. This may either be a short stout pillar of ¼ in. brass rod, about 1 in. high, tapped on one side to receive the screw, which should be fitted with a back nut; or it may, as shown in the figure, be made out of a stout piece of angle brass. The exact size and length of the screw is immaterial; it must, however, be long enough to reach (when put in its place behind the contact spring) the spring itself, and still have a few threads behind the back nut to spare. The screw[Pg 76] should be nicely fitted to the pillar, and the lock nut should clench it well, as when once the adjustment of the parts is found which gives good ringing, it is advisable that no motion should take place, lest the perfection of ringing be interfered with. Some makers use a "set screw" at the side of the pillar wherewith to hold the contact screw; others split the pillar and "spring" it against the contact screw; but, all things considered, the back nut gives the greatest satisfaction. When the bell is in action, a tiny spark is produced at every make and break of contact between the contact spring and this screw. This spark soon corrodes the end of the screw and the back of the spring if brass alone is used, as this latter rusts under the influence of the spark. To prevent this, a piece of platinum must be soldered or rivetted to the spring, at the point where the screw touches, as shown at Fig. 26, and also at the extremity of the contact screw itself. It is better to rivet the platinum than to solder it, as the platinum is very apt to absorb the solder, in which case it rusts quickly, and the goodness of the contact is soon spoiled, when the bell ceases to ring. To rivet the platinum piece on to the spring, as shown at Fig. 26, it is only needful to procure a short length of No. 16 platinum wire, say ⅛ in., then, having drilled a corresponding hole at the desired spot in the contact spring, put the platinum wire half way through the hole, and give it one or two sharp blows on an anvil, with a smooth (pened) hammer.[Pg 77]
The next part we need to consider is the [Pg 74] armature, along with its fittings. The armature is made from 5/16 square bar iron of high quality, soft, well-annealed, and filed smooth and true. The appropriate length is shown in Figs. 23 and 24; the size of the iron for other bells is adjusted using the same ratio as that of the cores. Two methods for making and attaching the springs and hammers are demonstrated. Fig. 24 shows a section of an armature fitted with a back spring and contact spring as a single piece. This is cut from hard sheet brass, as wide as the armature, filed or hammered to the required level of springiness, and then filed smooth on the edges. It can be attached to the armature's iron either by soldering, riveting, or using two small screws. Riveting is probably the best method, as it won’t shake loose due to the vibration of the hammer. The spring at its shank end may be screwed or riveted to the bracket. Mr. Edwinson believes this is the better design for the contact spring. The other design uses two pieces, as shown at Fig. 23, where two strips of hard brass are cut to the width of the armature and have their edges filed. A slot is then made at the back end of the armature to hold the two brass strips, which are then soldered in place. The top strip is bent back over the armature to create the contact spring, while the other strip is either soldered or riveted to a small angle brass bracket. In both cases, a short rod of strong hard brass wire is riveted or screwed into the free end of the armature, and to the end of this rod, a metal bead or bob is either screwed or soldered to form the hammer or "clapper" of the bell. The next part to create is the contact pillar or bracket, with its screw, as shown at Fig. 25. This can either be a short, sturdy pillar made of ¼ inch brass rod, about 1 inch tall, tapped on one side to hold the screw, which should have a back nut fitted; or, as depicted in the figure, it can be made from a robust piece of angle brass. The exact size and length of the screw aren’t critical; it just needs to be long enough to reach (when positioned behind the contact spring) the spring itself, leaving a few threads behind the back nut. The screw should fit well in the pillar, and the lock nut should secure it tightly, since once the proper adjustment of the parts is found that produces a good ringing, it’s best to avoid any movement to preserve the quality of the ringing. Some manufacturers use a "set screw" on the side of the pillar to hold the contact screw; others split the pillar and "spring" it against the contact screw; however, generally, the back nut provides the best satisfaction. When the bell operates, a small spark occurs each time contact is made and broken between the contact spring and this screw. This spark quickly corrodes the end of the screw and the back of the spring if made of brass alone, since brass rusts under the influence of the spark. To avoid this, a piece of platinum must be soldered or riveted to the spring where the screw touches, as shown at Fig. 26, and also at the end of the contact screw itself. It's preferable to rivet the platinum rather than solder it, as platinum tends to absorb solder, which can lead to quick rusting and degrade the contact, causing the bell to stop ringing. To rivet the platinum piece onto the spring, as shown at Fig. 26, just get a short length of No. 16 platinum wire, about ⅛ inch, and after drilling a corresponding hole at the desired point in the contact spring, insert the platinum wire halfway through the hole and give it one or two sharp blows on an anvil with a smooth (pene) hammer.[Pg 77]
This will at once rivet it in its place, and spread it sufficiently to make a good surface for contact. The screw must likewise be tipped with platinum, by having a small hole bored in the centre of its extremity, of the same diameter as the platinum wire, which must then be pushed in, and rivetted by hammering the end, and burring the sides of the screw. Whichever method be adopted, care must be taken that the platinum tip on the screw and the speck on the contact spring are adjusted so as to touch exactly in their centres. It will be hardly worth while for the amateur to cast or even turn up his own bells (which are generally of the class known as clock gongs), as these can now be procured so cheaply already nickelled (see Fig. 28). The bell must be adjusted on its pillar (see Fig. 29A), which is itself screwed into a hole in the base-plate, where it is held by a nut. The adjustment of the bell is effected by placing it over the shoulder of the pillar, and then clenching it down by screwing over it one or other of the nuts shown at Fig. 29. The bell should clear the base, and should be at such a height as to be struck on its edge by the hammer or clapper attached to the armature, Figs. 23 and 24. We still need, to complete our bell, two binding screws, which may take either of the forms shown at Fig. 27; and an insulating washer, or collar, made of ebonite or boxwood, soaked in melted paraffin, to prevent the contact pillar (Fig. 25) making electrical[Pg 78] contact with the metal base. The best shape to be given to these washers is shown at Fig. 30. They consist in two thin circlets of wood or ebonite, that will just not meet when dropped, one on the one side, and one on the other of the hole through which the shank of the contact pillar passes when set up on the base-plate. If a wooden base be used below the metal base-plate, then only one washer, or collar, need be used—that is, the one above—since the screw of the pillar will pass into the wood, and this is not a conductor. If the metal base alone be used, both washers must be employed, and a small nut (not so large as the washer) used to tighten up and hold the pillar firm and immovable in its place opposite the contact spring.
This will immediately secure it in place and spread it out enough to create a good surface for contact. The screw must also have a platinum tip, which requires a small hole drilled in the center of its end, matching the diameter of the platinum wire. This wire must then be inserted and secured by hammering the end and flattening the sides of the screw. Whatever method is used, it is crucial to ensure that the platinum tip on the screw and the dot on the contact spring are aligned to touch perfectly at their centers. It wouldn't be worthwhile for a hobbyist to cast or even make their own bells (typically known as clock gongs) since these can now be easily obtained at a low cost, already nickel-plated (see Fig. 28). The bell needs to be positioned on its pillar (see Fig. 29A), which is screwed into a hole in the base plate and secured by a nut. Adjusting the bell involves placing it over the top of the pillar and tightening it down by screwing on one of the nuts shown at Fig. 29. The bell should not touch the base and should be at a height where it can be struck on its edge by the hammer or clapper attached to the armature, as shown in Figs. 23 and 24. To complete our bell assembly, we still need two binding screws, which can take either form shown at Fig. 27; and an insulating washer or collar made of ebonite or boxwood, soaked in melted paraffin, to prevent the contact pillar (Fig. 25) from making electrical contact with the metal base. The ideal design for these washers is illustrated at Fig. 30. They consist of two thin rings of wood or ebonite that will not touch when dropped, one on each side of the hole through which the shank of the contact pillar passes when mounted on the base plate. If a wooden base is used beneath the metal base plate, then only one washer or collar is needed—that is, the one above—because the screw of the pillar will go into the wood, which is not a conductor. If only the metal base is used, both washers must be used, along with a small nut (smaller than the washer) to tighten and keep the pillar steady and immovable in its position opposite the contact spring.
Having now all the parts at hand, we can proceed to fit them together, which is done as follows:—The bell pillar, with its bell attached, is fastened by its shank[Pg 79] into the hole shown near B, Fig. 17, where it is screwed up tight by the square nut shown at Fig. 29 c. In the same manner, we must fasten the contact pillar, or bracket, shown at Fig. 24 A. Whichever form be used, we must take great care that it be insulated from metallic contact with the metal base-plate by washers, as shown at Fig. 30 (similar washers must be used for the two binding screws if the whole base-plate be made in metal). This being done, the metal frame, Fig. 18, is put in position on the wooden base, as shown at Fig. 17, and screwed down thereto by the screws indicated at s s s. The magnet may then be screwed down to the metal frame as shown. The small bracket of angle brass marked B, in Figs. 23 and 24, is next screwed into its place; that is, in such a position that the armature stands squarely facing the poles of the electro-magnet, but not quite touching them (say 1/16 of an inch for a 2½ in. bell). In setting up this and the contact pillar, the greatest care must be taken that the platinum tip of the contact screw, Fig. 25, should touch lightly the centre of the platinum speck at the back of the spring, Figs. 23 and 24, shown full size at Fig. 26.
Having all the parts ready, we can now put them together as follows: The bell pillar, with its bell attached, is secured by its shank[Pg 79] into the hole located near B, Fig. 17, where it is tightened with the square nut shown at Fig. 29 c. Similarly, we need to attach the contact pillar, or bracket, shown at Fig. 24 A. Whichever type we use, it's important to ensure that it is insulated from any metallic contact with the metal base plate using washers, as illustrated at Fig. 30 (the same type of washers must be applied to the two binding screws if the whole base plate is made of metal). Once this is done, the metal frame, Fig. 18, is positioned on the wooden base, as indicated at Fig. 17, and secured with the screws marked s s s. The magnet can then be attached to the metal frame as shown. The small angle brass bracket marked B, in Figs. 23 and 24, is then fixed in place; it should be positioned so that the armature is directly facing the poles of the electromagnet, but not quite touching them (around 1/16 of an inch for a 2½ inch bell). When setting up this and the contact pillar, it is crucial that the platinum tip of the contact screw, Fig. 25, lightly touches the center of the platinum speck at the back of the spring, as shown in Figs. 23 and 24, which are displayed full size at Fig. 26.
The free ends of the helically coiled electro-magnet wires should now be inserted into short lengths of small indiarubber tubing (same as used for feeding bottles), the extremities being drawn through and 1 in. of the copper wire bared of its covering for the purpose of making good metallic contact with the connections. One of these ends is to be soldered, or otherwise metallically connected, to the angle brass carrying the armature, spring[Pg 80] and clapper, the other being similarly connected with the left-hand binding-screw, shown at Fig. 17. Another short length of wire (also enclosed in rubber tubing) must be arranged to connect the contact screw pillar Fig. 17, with the right-hand binding-screw. When this has been done, we may proceed to test the working of the bell by connecting up the binding screws with the wires proceeding from a freshly-charged Leclanché cell. If all have been properly done, and the connections duly made, the armature should begin to vibrate at once, causing the "bob," or hammer, to strike the bell rapidly; that is, provided the platinum tipped screw touches the platinum speck on the contact spring. Should this not be the case, the screw must be turned until the platinum tip touches the platinum speck. The armature will now begin to vibrate. It may be that the clapper runs too near the bell, so that it gives a harsh, thuddy buzz instead of a clear, ringing sound; or, possibly, the clapper is "set" too far from the bell to strike it. In either case a little bending of the brass wire carrying the clapper (either from or towards the bell, as the case may dictate) will remedy the defect. It is also possible that the armature itself may have been set too near, or too far from the electro-magnet. In the latter case, the clapper will not vibrate strongly enough, in the former the vibration will be too short, and the clapper may even stick to the poles of the electros, especially if these have not been carefully annealed. A little bending of the spring, to or from the magnets, will remedy these deficiencies, unless the dis[Pg 81]tance be very much too great, in which case the bending of the spring would take the platinum tip out of the centre of the platinum speck.
The loose ends of the coiled electromagnet wires should now be inserted into short pieces of small rubber tubing (the same kind used for baby bottles), with one inch of the copper wire stripped for a good metal contact with the connections. One end should be soldered or otherwise connected to the brass angle that holds the armature, spring[Pg 80] and clapper, while the other end should be similarly connected to the left-hand binding screw, shown at Fig. 17. Another short wire (also inside rubber tubing) must connect the contact screw pillar Fig. 17 to the right-hand binding screw. After that, we can test the bell's operation by connecting the binding screws with wires from a freshly charged Leclanché cell. If everything is done correctly and the connections are made, the armature should start vibrating immediately, causing the "bob" or hammer to hit the bell rapidly, as long as the platinum-tipped screw touches the platinum spot on the contact spring. If this isn’t happening, adjust the screw until the platinum tip makes contact with the platinum spot. The armature will start to vibrate now. It’s possible that the clapper is too close to the bell, creating a harsh, thudding buzz instead of a clear ring; alternatively, the clapper may be too far away to strike the bell. In either case, bending the brass wire holding the clapper (either towards or away from the bell, depending on the situation) will fix the issue. The armature itself might also be positioned too close or too far from the electromagnet. If it's too far, the clapper won’t vibrate strongly enough; if it’s too close, the vibration will be too short, and the clapper might stick to the electromagnet poles, especially if they haven't been properly annealed. A little bending of the spring, towards or away from the magnets, will help fix these problems unless the distance is significantly too large, in which case bending the spring could misplace the platinum tip from the center of the platinum spot.
§ 43. Having thus constructed an efficient electric bell we may proceed to study its action and notice some of the defects to which it may be subject. In the first place, if we connect up the bell with the battery as shown in Fig. 17, viz., the left-hand binding-screw with the wire proceeding from the carbon of the Leclanché, and the right-hand screw with the wire from the zinc, then, if the platinum tipped screw touches the platinum speck, at the back of the contact spring, a current of electricity flows from the left-hand binding-screw all round the coils of the electro-magnets, passes along the contact spring and platinum speck, thence to the platinum tipped screw along the short length of wire to the right-hand binding-screw, whence it returns to the zinc element of the battery, thus completing the circuit. The current, in thus passing around the electro-magnet cores, converts them, pro tem., into a powerful magnet (see § 13); con[Pg 82]sequently, the armature, with its contact spring and hammer, is pulled towards the electro-magnets and at the same time gives a blow to the bell. Now, if instead of having the platinum speck attached to a flexible spring, it had been attached bodily to the rigid iron armature, directly the electro-magnets felt the influence of the current, the platinum speck would have also been pulled out of contact with the platinum screw, therefore the electro-magnet cores would have immediately lost their magnetism (see § 13, last five lines). This would have been disadvantageous, for two reasons: 1st, because the stroke of the hammer would have been very short, and consequently the ring of the bell very weak; and, 2nd, because, as even the softest iron requires some appreciable time for the electric current to flow round it to magnetise it to its full capacity, it would need a much greater battery power to produce a given stroke, if the contact were so very short. The use of an elastic contact spring is, therefore, just to lengthen the time of contact. But the electro-magnets, even when the flexible spring is used, do actually pull the platinum speck out of contact with the platinum screw. When this takes place, the circuit is broken, and no more current can flow round the electro-magnets, the spring reasserts its power, and the contact is again made between the contact screw and contact spring, to be again rapidly broken, each break and make contact being accompanied by a correspondingly rapid vibration of the armature, with its attendant clapper, which thus sets up that characteristic rapid ringing which has earned for these[Pg 83] bells the name of trembling, chattering, or vibrating bells.
§ 43. Now that we've built an efficient electric bell, we can examine how it works and identify some of its potential flaws. First, if we connect the bell to the battery as illustrated in Fig. 17, meaning the left binding screw is connected to the wire from the carbon of the Leclanché, and the right screw is connected to the wire from the zinc, when the platinum-tipped screw touches the platinum speck at the back of the contact spring, an electric current flows from the left binding screw through the coils of the electro-magnets, along the contact spring and platinum speck, then to the platinum-tipped screw and back along the short wire to the right binding screw, returning to the zinc element of the battery, completing the circuit. As the current moves around the cores of the electro-magnets, it temporarily turns them into powerful magnets (see § 13); consequently, the armature, with its contact spring and hammer, is drawn toward the electro-magnets and simultaneously strikes the bell. Now, if the platinum speck were attached to the rigid iron armature instead of a flexible spring, as soon as the electro-magnets were energized, the platinum speck would be pulled away from the platinum screw, causing the electro-magnet cores to immediately lose their magnetism (see § 13, last five lines). This would be a problem for two reasons: first, the hammer's stroke would be very short, resulting in a weak ring from the bell; second, since even the softest iron takes a noticeable amount of time for the current to flow through it to fully magnetize, we would need a lot more battery power to produce a specific stroke with such a brief contact. Therefore, the purpose of the elastic contact spring is to extend the contact time. However, even with the flexible spring, the electro-magnets do indeed pull the platinum speck away from the platinum screw. When this happens, the circuit breaks, and no more current can pass through the electro-magnets, allowing the spring to regain its force, resulting in the contact being reestablished between the contact screw and contact spring, only to be broken again quickly. Each time the contact is made and broken, the armature vibrates rapidly, along with its clapper, creating that distinct rapid ringing sound that has led to these bells being called trembling, chattering, or vibrating bells.
§ 44. From a careful consideration of the last two sections it will be evident that the possible defects of electric bells may be classed under four heads: viz., 1st, Bad contacts; 2nd, Bad adjustment of the parts; 3rd, Defective insulation; 4th, Warpage or shrinkage of base. We will consider these in the above order. Firstly, then, as to bad contacts. Many operators are content with simply turning the terminal wires round the base of the binding-screws. Unless the binding-screws are firmly held down on to the wires by means of a back nut, a great loss is sure to occur at these points, as the wires may have been put on with sweaty hands, when a film of oxide soon forms, which greatly lowers the conductivity of the junction. Again, at the junction points of the wires with the contact angle brass and contact pillar, some workmen solder the junctions, using "killed spirits" as a flux. A soldered contact is certainly the best, electrically speaking, but "killed spirits," or chloride of zinc, should never be used as a flux in any apparatus or at any point that cannot be washed in abundance of water, as chloride of zinc is very deliquescent (runs to water), rottens the wire, and spoils the insulation of the adjacent parts. If solder be used at any parts, let resin be used as a flux. Even if any excess of resin remain on the work, it does no harm and does not destroy the insulation of any of the other portions. Another point where bad contact may arise is at the platinum contacts. Platinum is a metal which[Pg 84] does not rust easily, even under the influence of the electric spark given at the point of contact. Therefore, it is preferred to every other metal (except, perhaps, iridium) for contact breakers. Platinum is an expensive metal, the retail price being about 30s. an ounce, and as it is nearly twice as heavy as lead (Lead 11. Platinum 21·5) very little goes to an ounce. For cheap bells, therefore, there is a great temptation to use some other white metal, such as silver, german silver, platinoid, etc.
§ 44. After carefully looking at the last two sections, it’s clear that the potential issues with electric bells can be grouped into four categories: 1st, Poor contacts; 2nd, Improper adjustment of the components; 3rd, Faulty insulation; 4th, Warping or shrinkage of the base. We will discuss these in that order. First, let's talk about poor contacts. Many operators are just satisfied with twisting the terminal wires around the binding screws. Unless the binding screws are securely tightened onto the wires with a back nut, a significant loss is likely to happen at these points, especially if the wires were connected with sweaty hands, which allows a layer of oxide to form that significantly reduces conductivity. Additionally, at the junctions of the wires with the contact angle brass and the contact pillar, some workers solder these connections, using "killed spirits" as a flux. Although a soldered connection is the best option, electrically speaking, "killed spirits," or zinc chloride, should never be used as a flux in any equipment or at any point that can't be thoroughly rinsed with water since zinc chloride is highly deliquescent (absorbs moisture), damages the wire, and undermines the insulation of nearby components. If solder is used anywhere, resin should be the chosen flux. Even if some excess resin remains on the work, it won't cause issues and will not jeopardize the insulation of the other parts. Another area where poor contact can occur is at the platinum contacts. Platinum is a metal that doesn't rust easily, even with the electric spark at the contact point. That's why it’s preferred over all other metals (except possibly iridium) for contact breakers. Platinum is costly, with a retail price of around 30s. per ounce, and since it’s nearly twice as dense as lead (Lead 11, Platinum 21.5), very little of it is needed for an ounce. Therefore, for budget-friendly bells, there’s a strong temptation to use another white metal, like silver, German silver, or platinoid, etc.
The tip of the platinum screw may be tested for its being veritably platinum in the following mode: Touch the tip with the stopper of a bottle containing aquafortis, so as to leave a tiny drop on the extreme point of the suspected platinum. If it boils up green, or turns black, it is not platinum; if it remains unaltered, it may be silver or platinum. After it has stood on the tip for a minute, draw it along a piece of white paper, so as to produce a streak of the acid. Expose the paper for a few minutes to sunlight. If the streak turns violet or pinky violet, the metal is silver; if the paper simply shows a slightly yellowish streak, the metal is platinum. The tip of the platinum screw must be carefully dried and cleaned after this trial before being replaced.
To check if the tip of the platinum screw is actually platinum, do the following: Touch the tip with the stopper of a bottle containing nitric acid, leaving a tiny drop on the tip of the suspected platinum. If it bubbles up green or turns black, it is not platinum; if it stays the same, it could be silver or platinum. After a minute, drag it across a piece of white paper to leave a streak of the acid. Expose the paper to sunlight for a few minutes. If the streak turns violet or pinkish violet, the metal is silver; if the paper just shows a slightly yellowish streak, the metal is platinum. Make sure to carefully dry and clean the tip of the platinum screw after this test before putting it back.
Secondly, as to bad adjustment. It is evident that the magnets and the armature must stand at a certain distance apart to give the best effects with a given battery power. The distance varies from 1/24 in. in the very smallest, to ⅛ in. in large bells. Sometimes (but only in very badly made instruments) the armature adheres to the poles of the electro-magnet. This is due to residual[Pg 85] magnetism (see § 14), and points to hard or unannealed iron in the cores or armature. As a make-shift, this defect may be partially remedied by pasting a thin piece of paper over that surface of the armature which faces the poles of the electro-magnets. Another bad adjustment is when the platinum screw does not touch fairly on the centre of the platinum speck, but touches the spring or the solder. Rust is then sure to form, which destroys the goodness of the contact. To adjust the contact spring at the right distance from the platinum screw, hold the hammer against the bell or gong. The armature should now just not touch the poles of the electro-magnet. Now screw up the platinum screw until it clears the contact spring by about the thickness of a sheet of brown paper (say 1/50 of an inch). Let the hammer go, and notice whether the contact spring makes good contact with the platinum screw. This may be tried by the Leclanché cell as well, so as to make sure of the character of the ringing. When this has been satisfactorily adjusted the back-nut or set screw may be tightened, to insure that the vibration of the hammer shall not alter the adjustment. It sometimes happens that the spring that bears the armature is itself either too strong (or set back too far) or too weak. In the former case, the electro-magnet cannot pull the armature with sufficient force to give a good blow; in the latter, the spring cannot return the armature, with its attendant contact spring, back to its place against the platinum screw. To ascertain which of these two defects obtains, it is only necessary, while the bell is in action, to press[Pg 86] the spring lightly with a bit of wire, first towards and then away from the electro-magnets. If the ringing is improved in the first case, the spring is too strong; if improvement takes place in the latter case, the spring is too weak. The third source of inefficient action, defective insulation, is not likely to occur in a newly-made bell, except by gross carelessness. Still, it may be well to point out where electrical leakage is likely to occur, and how its presence may be ascertained, localized, and remedied. If the wire used to wind the electro-magnet be old, badly covered, or bared in several places in winding, it probably will allow the current to "short circuit," instead of traversing the whole length of the coils. If this be the case, the magnet will be very weak: the magnet of a 2½-in. bell should be able to sustain easily a 1 lb. weight attached by a piece of string to a smooth piece of ½-in. square iron placed across its poles, when energized by a single pint Leclanché cell. If it will not do this, the insulation may be suspected. If the wire has been wound on the bare cores (without bobbins), as is sometimes done, bared places in the wire may be touching the iron. This may be ascertained by connecting one pole of a bottle bichromate, or other powerful battery, with one of the wires of the electro-magnet coils, and drawing the other pole of the battery across the clean iron faces of the electro-magnet poles. If there is any leakage, sparks will appear on making and breaking contact. Nothing but unwinding and rewinding with a well covered wire can remedy these defects. The other points where the insulation may[Pg 87] be defective are between the binding screws and the base, if this be all of metal; or between the contact spring block and the base, and the contact pillar. It is also probable (if the connecting wires have not been covered with indiarubber tubing, as recommended) that leakage may be taking place between these wires and some portion of the metal work of the base or frame. This must be carefully examined, and if any point of contact be observed, a little piece of Prout's elastic glue, previously heated, must be inserted at the suspected places. With regard to the binding screws, if they stand on the wooden base, their insulation (unless the base be very damp indeed) will be sufficiently good; but if the base is entirely metallic, then ebonite or boxwood washers must be used to insulate them from contact with the base-plate. With regard to the contact spring block and the platinum screw pillar, it is permissible that one or the other should not be insulated from the base or frame; but one or the other must be insulated by means of ebonite or other insulating washers. Personally, I prefer to insulate both; but in many really good bells only the platinum screw pillar is thus insulated. Any such leakage can be immediately detected by holding one pole of a powerful battery against the suspected binding-screw, or block, or pillar, and while in this position, drawing the other pole across some bare iron portion of the frame or metal base. Sparks will appear if there is any leakage.
Secondly, regarding poor alignment. It's clear that the magnets and the armature need to be a certain distance apart to work effectively with a specific battery power. This distance ranges from 1/24 in. for the smallest bells to ⅛ in. for larger ones. Sometimes, although only in very poorly made instruments, the armature sticks to the poles of the electromagnet. This happens due to residual[Pg 85] magnetism (see § 14), indicating the presence of hard or unannealed iron in the cores or armature. As a temporary fix, you can slightly cover the armature's surface that faces the poles of the electromagnets with thin paper. Another misalignment occurs when the platinum screw doesn't make proper contact with the center of the platinum spot, but instead touches the spring or the solder. Rust is likely to form in this case, which compromises the quality of the contact. To adjust the contact spring to the right distance from the platinum screw, press the hammer against the bell or gong. The armature should now just not touch the poles of the electromagnet. Next, tighten the platinum screw until it clears the contact spring by about the thickness of a sheet of brown paper (around 1/50 of an inch). Release the hammer and check if the contact spring makes good contact with the platinum screw. You can also use a Leclanché cell for this test to ensure the ringing quality. Once it’s properly adjusted, tighten the back-nut or set screw to ensure that the hammer's vibrations don't alter the setup. Sometimes, the spring that supports the armature can be either too strong (or set too far back) or too weak. If it's too strong, the electromagnet can't pull the armature with enough force to deliver a solid strike; if it's too weak, the spring won't return the armature, along with the contact spring, back to its position against the platinum screw. To identify which issue is occurring, while the bell is functioning, lightly press the spring with a piece of wire, first towards and then away from the electromagnets. If the ringing improves when pressed towards the electromagnets, the spring is too strong; if it improves when pressed away, the spring is too weak. The third cause of ineffective operation is faulty insulation, which is unlikely to happen in a newly made bell unless there's significant carelessness involved. However, it’s worth pointing out where electrical leakage might happen, and how to detect it, locate it, and fix it. If the wire used to wind the electromagnet is old, poorly insulated, or bare in a few places, it might allow the current to "short circuit" instead of flowing through the entire length of the coils. If this is the case, the magnet will be weak: a 2½-in. bell should easily hold a 1 lb. weight tied with a string to a smooth piece of ½-in. square iron placed across its poles when powered by a single pint Leclanché cell. If it can't do this, the insulation may be questionable. If the wire is wound around bare cores (without bobbins), as sometimes done, exposed sections of the wire might be touching the iron. You can check for this by connecting one pole of a bottle bichromate or another powerful battery to one of the wires of the electromagnet coils, and moving the other pole of the battery across the clean iron surfaces of the electromagnet poles. If there's any leakage, sparks will appear when you make and break contact. The only way to correct these issues is to unwind and rewind with properly insulated wire. Other areas where insulation might fail are between the binding screws and the base (if the base is all metal), or between the contact spring block and the base, and the contact pillar. If the connecting wires aren't covered with rubber tubing, as recommended, leakage might also occur between these wires and some part of the metallic work of the base or frame. This must be thoroughly examined, and if any contact points are found, a small piece of heated Prout's elastic glue should be inserted at those spots. Concerning the binding screws, if they're on a wooden base, their insulation (unless the base is extremely damp) should be good enough. However, if the base is entirely metal, ebonite or boxwood washers are necessary to insulate them from contact with the base-plate. For the contact spring block and the platinum screw pillar, it is acceptable for one or the other not to be insulated from the base or frame, but one of them must be insulated using ebonite or other insulating washers. Personally, I prefer both to be insulated, but many well-made bells only insulate the platinum screw pillar. Any leakage can be quickly identified by holding one pole of a powerful battery against the suspected binding screw, block, or pillar, and while in that position, moving the other pole across some bare iron area of the frame or metal base. Sparks will show up if there’s any leakage.
The fourth defect—that is, warpage or shrinkage of the base—can only occur in badly-made bells, in which the[Pg 88] entire base is of wood. A cursory examination will show whether the board is warped or swollen, or whether it has shrunk. Warping or swelling will throw the electro-magnet too far from the armature, or "set" the pillar out of place; shrinkage, on the contrary, will bring the parts too close together and jamb the magnets, the armature, and the contact pillar into an unworkable position.
The fourth issue—warping or shrinking of the base—only happens in poorly made bells that have a wooden base. A quick look will reveal if the board is warped or swollen, or if it has shrunk. Warping or swelling can move the electromagnet too far from the armature or misalign the pillar; on the other hand, shrinkage can bring the parts too close together and jam the magnets, armature, and contact pillar into a nonfunctional position.
§ 45. Before quitting the subject of the defects of bells, it may not be out of place to mention that no bell that is set to do real work should be fitted up without a cover or case. The dust which is sure to accumulate, not to speak of damp and fumes, etc., will certainly militate against good contacts and good action if this important point be neglected. The cover or case generally takes the form of a shallow box, as shown at Fig. 32, and may be made from ¼-in. teak, mahogany, or walnut, dovetailed together and well polished. It is fastened to the base in the same manner as the sides of a Dutch clock, by means of studs, hooks and eyes. At the bottom of the box is cut a slot, of sufficient width and length to admit the play of the hammer shank.
§ 45. Before moving on from the topic of bell defects, it's worth noting that any bell designed for real use should always have a cover or case. The dust that inevitably builds up, along with moisture and fumes, will certainly interfere with proper contacts and function if this crucial aspect is overlooked. The cover or case typically takes the shape of a shallow box, as shown at Fig. 32, and can be made from ¼-inch teak, mahogany, or walnut, dovetailed together and nicely polished. It's attached to the base in the same way as the sides of a Dutch clock, using studs, hooks, and eyes. At the bottom of the box, there's a slot cut out, wide and long enough to allow the hammer shank to move freely.
In the annexed table is given a general idea of the proportion which should be observed in the construction of bells of different sizes. It must be noted that if the bells are to be used at long distances from the[Pg 89] battery, rather more of a finer gauge of wire must be employed to wind the magnets than that herein recommended, unless, indeed, relays be used in conjunction with the bells.
In the attached table, you'll find a general idea of the proportions to follow when making bells of various sizes. It's important to note that if the bells will be used at long distances from the [Pg 89] battery, you should use a finer gauge of wire to wind the magnets than what is recommended here, unless, of course, you're using relays with the bells.
Table
Table
Showing proportions to be observed in the different parts of electric bells.
Showing proportions to observe in the different parts of electric bells.
Diameter of Bell. | Length of Magnet Cores. | Diameter of Magnet Cores. | Length of Bobbin. | Diameter of Bobbin Head. | B. W. G. of Wire on Bobbin. |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
2½'' | 2'' | 5/16'' | 1¾'' | ¾'' | 24 |
3 | 2¼ | ⅜ | 2 | ⅞ | 24 |
3½ | 2½ | 7/16 | 2¼ | 1 | 22 |
4 | 2¾ | ½ | 2½ | 1⅛ | 22 |
4½ | 3 | 9/16 | 2¾ | 1¼ | 20 |
5 | 3¼ | ⅝ | 3 | 1⅜ | 18 |
5½ | 3½ | 11/16 | 3¼ | 1½ | 16 |
6 | 3¾ | ¾ | 3½ | 1⅝ | 16 |
6½ | 4 | 13/16 | 3¾ | 1¾ | 16 |
7 | 4¼ | ⅞ | 4 | 1⅞ | 16 |
7½ | 4½ | 15/16 | 4¼ | 2 | 14 |
8 | 4¾ | 1 | 4½ | 2⅛ | 14 |
8½ | 5 | 1-1/16 | 4¾ | 2¼ | 14 |
9 | 5¼ | 1⅛ | 5 | 2⅜ | 14 |
9½ | 5½ | 1-3/16 | 5¼ | 2½ | 14 |
10 | 5¾ | 1¼ | 5½ | 2⅝ | 14 |
10½ | 6 | 1-5/16 | 5¾ | 2¾ | 12 |
11 | 6¼ | 1⅜ | 6 | 2⅞ | 12 |
11½ | 6½ | 1-7/16 | 6¼ | 3 | 10 |
12 | 6¾ | 1½ | 6½ | 3⅛ | 10 |
§ 47. We can now glance at several modifications in the shape and mode of action of electric bells and their congeners. Taking Figs. 33 A and B as our typical forms of trembling bell, the first notable modification is one by means of which the bell is made to give a single stroke only, for each contact with the battery. This form, which is known as the "single stroke bell," lends itself to those cases in which it may be required to transmit preconcerted signals; as also where it is desired to place many bells in one circuit. Fig. 34 illustrates the construction of the single stroke bell. It differs from the trembling bell in the mode in which the electro-magnet is connected up to the binding screws. In the trembling bell, Fig. 33, the circuit is completed through the platinum screw pillar, to the binding screw marked Z, hence the circuit is rapidly made[Pg 91] and broken as long as by any means contact is made with the battery, and the binding screws L and Z. But in the single stroke bell, Fig. 34, the wires from the electro-magnet are connected directly to the two binding screws L and Z, so that when contact is made with the battery, the armature is drawn to the poles of the electro-magnet, and kept there so long as the battery current passes. By this means, only one stroke or blow is given to the bell for each contact of the battery. Of course, directly the connection with the battery is broken, the spring which carries the armature and clapper flies back ready to be again attracted, should connection again be made with the battery. To regulate the distance of the armature from the poles of the electro-magnets, a set screw Q takes the place of the platinum screw in the ordinary form, while to prevent the hammer remaining in contact with the bell (which would produce a dull thud and stop the clear ring of the bell), a stop (g) is set near the end of the armature, or two studs are fixed on the tips of the poles of the electro-magnets. The mode of adjusting this kind of bell, so as to obtain the best effect, differs a[Pg 92] little from that employed in the case of the trembling bell. The armature must be pressed towards the poles of the electro-magnets, until it rests against the stop or studs. A piece of wood or cork may be placed between the armature and the set screw Q, to retain the armature in this position, while the rod carrying the hammer or clapper is being bent (if required) until the hammer just clears the bell. If it touches the bell, a thud instead of a ring is the result; if it is set off too far, the ring will be too weak. The armature can now be released, by removing the wood or cork, and the set screw Q driven forwards or backwards until the best effect is produced when tested with the battery. The tension of the armature spring must be carefully looked to in these single stroke bells. If it is too strong, the blow will be weak; if too weak, the hammer trembles, so that a clear single stroke is not obtainable, as the spring chatters.
§ 47. We can now take a look at some changes in the design and operation of electric bells and their similar devices. Referring to Figs. 33 A and B as our typical examples of vibrating bells, the first significant change allows the bell to make a single sound for each contact with the battery. This type, known as the "single stroke bell," is useful in situations where specific signals need to be transmitted or when multiple bells are connected in one circuit. Fig. 34 shows how the single stroke bell is constructed. It differs from the vibrating bell in how the electro-magnet is wired to the binding screws. In the vibrating bell, Fig. 33, the circuit completes through the platinum screw pillar to the binding screw labeled Z, so the circuit is rapidly made and broken as long as there’s contact with the battery and the binding screws L and Z. However, in the single stroke bell, Fig. 34, the wires from the electro-magnet connect directly to the two binding screws L and Z, which means when contact is made with the battery, the armature is pulled to the poles of the electro-magnet and stays there as long as the battery current flows. This results in just one stroke or sound from the bell for each battery connection. Naturally, as soon as the connection with the battery is cut, the spring that holds the armature and clapper snaps back, ready to be attracted again if the battery connection is restored. To adjust the distance between the armature and the poles of the electro-magnets, a set screw Q is used instead of the platinum screw found in the traditional model, while to prevent the hammer from touching the bell (which would create a dull sound and mute the ringing), a stop (g) is positioned near the end of the armature, or two studs are placed at the tips of the electro-magnet poles. Adjusting this type of bell for optimal performance differs slightly from the method used for the vibrating bell. The armature needs to be pressed towards the electro-magnet poles until it makes contact with the stop or studs. A piece of wood or cork can be inserted between the armature and set screw Q to hold the armature in place while the rod holding the hammer or clapper is bent (if necessary) until the hammer just clears the bell. If it touches, it will produce a dull thud instead of a clear ring; if set too far away, the ring will be weak. The armature can then be released by removing the wood or cork, and the set screw Q adjusted forward or backward until the best sound is achieved when tested with the battery. The tension of the armature spring must also be carefully monitored in these single stroke bells. If it’s too strong, the sound will be weak; if it’s too weak, the hammer will vibrate, preventing a clear single stroke, as the spring chatters.
§ 48. The continuous ringing bell is the modification which next demands our attention. In this, the ringing action, when once started by the push,[12] or other contact maker, having been touched, continues either until the battery is exhausted, or until it is stopped by the person in charge. The great use of this arrangement[Pg 93] is self-evident in cases of burglar alarms, watchman's alarms, etc., as the continuous ringing gives notice that the "call" has not received attention. The continuous ringing bell differs but little from the ordinary trembling bell. The chief difference lies in the addition of an automatic device whereby contact is kept up with the battery, even after the "push" contact has ceased. As it is desirable for the person in charge to be able to stop the ringing at will, without proceeding to the place where the "push" stands, so it is not usual to make the continuous ringing arrangement dependent on the "push," though, of course, this could be done, by causing it to engage in a catch, which would keep up the contact, when once made. Continuous ringing bells may be conveniently divided into two classes; viz., 1st, those in which a device is attached to the framework of the bell; which device, when once upset by the first stroke of the bell, places the bell in direct communication with the battery independent of the "push" or usual contact; and 2ndly, those in which a separate device is used, for the same purpose. This latter arrangement admits of the use of an ordinary trembling bell.
§ 48. The continuous ringing bell is the next modification that we need to discuss. In this type, the ringing action, once started by the push button,[12] or another contact maker, continues on its own until the battery runs out or until someone turns it off. This setup is obviously useful for burglar alarms, watchman alarms, and similar systems, as the continuous ringing signals that the "call" hasn't been addressed. The continuous ringing bell is quite similar to a standard trembling bell. The main difference is that it includes an automatic mechanism that keeps it connected to the battery, even after the "push" contact has stopped. Since it's important for the person in charge to be able to turn off the ringing at any time without going to the "push" location, it’s not common to make the continuous ringing system depend solely on the "push," though this is possible by using a catch that maintains the contact once it’s established. Continuous ringing bells can be categorized into two types: 1st, those where a device is attached to the bell's framework; this device, once activated by the first strike of the bell, connects the bell directly with the battery independent of the "push" or regular contact; and 2nd, those that use a separate device for the same purpose. The latter option allows for the use of a regular trembling bell.
Fig. 35 illustrates the action of bells of the first class. In the first place it will be noticed that there are three binding screws instead of two, as in the ordinary pattern, one marked C connected as usual with the carbon element of the battery; another marked L, which connects with line wire, and a third, Z, connected by means of a branch wire (shunt wire),[Pg 94] proceeding from the zinc of the battery. It will be seen, that if the battery current is by means of the push caused to flow through the coils of the electro-magnets, the armature is attracted as usual by them, and in moving towards them, releases and lets fall the lever contact, which, resting on the contact screw, completes the circuit between Z and C, so that the bell is in direct communication with its battery, independently of the push. Hence the bell continues ringing, until the lever is replaced. This can be[Pg 95] done, either by pulling a check string (like a bell-pull) attached to an eye in the lever, or by means of a press-button and counter-spring; as shown in Fig. 36, A and B.
Fig. 35 shows how the bells of the first class work. First, you'll notice that there are three binding screws instead of the usual two. One is marked C and connects to the carbon element of the battery; another is marked L, which connects to the line wire; and the third is Z, which connects through a branch wire (shunt wire),[Pg 94] coming from the zinc of the battery. If the battery current is activated via the push, it flows through the coils of the electro-magnets, causing the armature to be attracted as usual. As it moves towards the electro-magnets, it releases and drops the lever contact, which rests on the contact screw, completing the circuit between Z and C, allowing the bell to connect directly with its battery, independent of the push. Therefore, the bell keeps ringing until the lever is put back in place. This can be done by pulling a check string (like a bell-pull) connected to an eye in the lever, or by using a press-button and counter-spring, as shown in Fig. 36, A and B.
In continuous ringing bells of the second class, a detent similar to that shown at Fig. 35 D is used, but this, instead of being actuated by the electro-magnet belonging to the bell itself, is controlled by a separate and entirely independent electro-magnet, which, as it may be wound with many coils of fine wire, and have a specially light spring for the armature, can be made very sensitive. This second electro-magnet, which[Pg 96] serves only to make contact with a battery, is known as a Relay, and is extensively employed in many cases where it is desired to put one or more batteries into, or out of circuit, from a distance. The relay may be looked upon as an automatic hand, which can be made to repeat at a distant point contacts made or broken by hand at a nearer one. Fig. 37 shows this arrange[Pg 97]ment, attached to the same base board as the bell itself. On contact being made with the push, the current enters at C, circulates round the cores of the relay, thus converting it into a magnet. The armature a is thereby pulled to the magnet, and in so doing releases the detent lever, which falls on the contact screw, thus at one and the same time breaking the circuit through the relay, and making the circuit through the bell magnets B B´, back to the battery by Z. A second modification of this mode of causing an ordinary bell to ring continuously is shown at Fig. 38, the peculiar form of[Pg 98] relay used therewith being illustrated at Fig. 39. Here, the relay is placed on a separate base board of its own, and could, if necessary, be thrown out of circuit altogether, by means of a switch,[13] so that the bell can be used as an ordinary bell or continuous action at will. It will be noticed that the relay has in this sketch only one core. But the delicacy of the action is not impaired thereby, as the armature, by means of the steel spring s, is made to form part and parcel of the magnet, so that it becomes magnetised as well as the core, and is attracted with more force than it would be, if it were magnetically insulated. The battery current enters by the wires C and W, passes round the coils of the electro-magnet, and returns by Z. In so doing it energises the electro-magnet E, which immediately attracts its armature A. The forward movement of the armature A, releases the pivoted arm L, to which is attached a platinum-tipped contact prong P. This, it will be noticed, is in metallic connection with the pillar P', and with the base, and, therefore, through the wire W, with the battery. When the arm L falls, the contact prong completes the circuit to the bell, through the insulated pillar X. The relay is thus thrown out of the circuit at the same time that the bell is thrown in. A device similar to those illustrated at Fig. 36 can be employed to reset the arm L.
In continuous ringing bells of the second class, a detent similar to the one shown at Fig. 35 D is used, but instead of being triggered by the electromagnet connected to the bell itself, it is controlled by a separate, completely independent electromagnet. This electromagnet can be wound with many coils of fine wire and has a specially lightweight spring for the armature, making it very sensitive. This second electromagnet, which only connects to a battery, is called a Relay and is widely used in situations where you want to turn one or more batteries on or off from a distance. The relay can be thought of as an automatic hand that can replicate contacts made or broken manually at a nearby location. Fig. 37 shows this setup, attached to the same base board as the bell. When a push button is pressed, the current flows in at C, travels around the cores of the relay, turning it into a magnet. The armature a is pulled to the magnet, which releases the detent lever, causing it to fall onto the contact screw. This action simultaneously breaks the circuit through the relay and completes the circuit through the bell magnets B B', returning to the battery via Z. A second variation of this method for making a standard bell ring continuously is shown at Fig. 38, with the unique design of the relay used illustrated at Fig. 39. Here, the relay is placed on its own separate base board and can, if needed, be disconnected completely using a switch,[13], allowing the bell to function as a regular bell or continuously at will. It’s important to note that in this sketch, the relay has only one core. However, the sensitivity of its action isn’t diminished, as the armature, connected via the steel spring s, becomes an integral part of the magnet, thus being magnetized alongside the core and drawn in with greater force than it would if magnetically isolated. The battery current enters through the wires C and W, flows around the coils of the electromagnet, and returns through Z. This process energizes the electromagnet E, which immediately pulls in its armature A. As the armature A moves forward, it releases the pivoted arm L, which has a platinum-tipped contact prong P attached. This prong is connected to the pillar P', the base, and, therefore, through wire W, to the battery. When the arm L falls, the contact prong completes the circuit to the bell through the insulated pillar X. At the same time, the relay is disconnected from the circuit while the bell circuit is activated. A device similar to those shown at Fig. 36 can be used to reset the arm L.
A rather more complicated arrangement for continuous bell ringing is shown at Fig. 40. It is known[Pg 99] as Callow's, and is peculiarly adapted to ringing several bells from one attachment, etc. Owing to the relay in this form being wound with two sets of wires, it takes a little more battery power; but this disadvantage is compensated by its many good points. The following description, taken from F. C. Allsop's papers in the English Mechanic, will render the working of Callow's attachment perfectly clear. "When the button of the push P is pressed, the current in the main circuit flows from the positive pole C of the battery D through the relay coil a, and thence by the wire d and push P, to the zinc of the battery. This attracts the armature A of the relay R, closing the local bell circuit, the current flowing from C of the battery to armature A of the relay R, through contact post p, terminal L of the bell, through bell to terminal Z, and thence by the wire g to the zinc of the battery. Part of the current also flows along the wire from the bell terminal L through the relay coil b and switch W, to terminal Z of the bell, thus keeping the armature[Pg 100] of the relay down, after the main circuit (through the push) has been broken; the bell continuing to ring until the shunt circuit is broken by moving the arm of the switch W over to the opposite (or non-contact) side. The bell can also be stopped by short circuiting the relay, which can be effected by an ordinary push. It will be seen that more than one bell can be rung from the same attachment, and the bell can, by moving the arm of the switch W, be made continuous ringing or not, at will. If the arm of the switch is moved over to the opposite side to which it is shown in the figure, the shunt circuit of the bell through the relay is broken, and the bell will ring only so long as the button of the push is kept in. This continuous arrangement is very convenient for front doors, etc., where trouble is experienced in securing immediate attention to the summons. Instead of being taken to the switch, as in Fig. 40, the two wires are taken to a contact piece fixed on the side of the door frame, and so arranged that when the door is opened, it either short circuits or breaks the shunt circuit: thus when the push is pressed, the bell rings until the door is opened, the continual ringing of the bell insuring prompt attention."
A more complex setup for continuous bell ringing is shown at Fig. 40. It's called Callow's and is specifically designed to ring several bells from one attachment, etc. Because the relay in this version uses two sets of wires, it requires a bit more battery power; however, this drawback is offset by its many benefits. The following description, taken from F. C. Allsop's papers in the English Mechanic, clearly explains how Callow's attachment works. "When the button of push P is pressed, the current in the main circuit flows from the positive pole C of the battery D through the relay coil a, and then through wire d and push P, to the zinc of the battery. This attracts the armature A of the relay R, closing the local bell circuit, with the current flowing from C of the battery to armature A of the relay R, through contact post p, terminal L of the bell, through the bell to terminal Z, and then via wire g to the zinc of the battery. Part of the current also flows from the bell terminal L through relay coil b and switch W, to terminal Z of the bell, keeping the armature [Pg 100] of the relay down after the main circuit (through the push) has been broken; the bell continues to ring until the shunt circuit breaks when the arm of switch W is moved to the opposite (or non-contact) side. The bell can also be stopped by short-circuiting the relay with an ordinary push. It can be seen that more than one bell can be ringed from the same attachment, and the bell can be set to ring continuously or not by moving the arm of switch W at will. If the arm of the switch is moved to the opposite side from what's shown in the figure, the shunt circuit of the bell through the relay is broken, and the bell will only ring as long as the button of the push is pressed. This continuous setup is very convenient for front doors, etc., where it's difficult to get immediate attention to the call. Instead of being taken to the switch, as in Fig. 40, the two wires lead to a contact piece fixed on the side of the door frame, arranged so that when the door is opened, it either short-circuits or breaks the shunt circuit: this way, when the push is pressed, the bell rings until the door is opened, ensuring prompt attention with the continual ringing of the bell."
Mr. H. Thorpe, of 59, Theobald's Road, London, has devised a very ingenious arrangement for the continuous ringing of one or more bells for a stated period of time. This is shown at Fig. 40 A. It is set in action by pulling the ring outside the bottom of the core. The bell or bells then start ringing, as contact is[Pg 101] established and kept up. The novelty lies in the fact that the duration of the contact, and consequently of the ringing, can be accurately timed from 5 seconds to 30 seconds, by merely inserting a pin at different holes in the rod, as shown. After the bells have rung the required time the instrument automatically resets itself.
Mr. H. Thorpe, of 59 Theobald's Road, London, has created a clever device for the continuous ringing of one or more bells for a specific period. This is illustrated at Fig. 40 A. It starts working by pulling the ring at the bottom of the core. The bell or bells then begin to ring as contact is established and maintained. The innovation is that the duration of the contact, and thus the ringing, can be precisely timed from 5 seconds to 30 seconds by simply inserting a pin into different holes in the rod, as shown. After the bells have rung for the set time, the device automatically resets itself.
§ 49. The modifications we are now about to consider, differ from the ordinary bell, either in the shape or material of the bell itself, the relative disposition of the parts, or some structural detail; but not upon the introduction of any new principle. The most striking is certainly the Jensen bell, which is shown in section at Fig. 41.
§ 49. The modifications we are about to look at differ from a regular bell in the shape, material, arrangement of parts, or some structural detail; but they don’t introduce any new principle. The most notable is definitely the Jensen bell, which is shown in section at Fig. 41.
According to Mr. Jensen's system of electric bells, the bell may take any desired form, that of the ordinary church bell being preferred, and the electro-magnetic apparatus is placed entirely inside the bell itself. To attain this end the electro-magnetic apparatus must be compact in form. A single electro-magnet has pole pieces at each end opposite to which an armature is suspended from a pivot and balanced by the hammer of the bell. At the back of the armature there may be a make and break arrangement, whereby a continuous succession of strokes is effected, or this may be omitted,[Pg 102] in which case a single stroke is given when the contact with the battery is made, or both may be effected by separate wires, make contact with one wire, and a single stroke is struck; make it with the other and the current passes through the make and break and a succession of strokes is heard. When the contact-breaker is used, it is so arranged that a slight rub is caused at every stroke, so keeping the contact clean. The flexible break, with the ingenious wiping contact, is a great improvement over the ordinary screw, which often becomes disarranged.
According to Mr. Jensen's electric bell system, the bell can take any shape, although the design of a traditional church bell is preferred, and the electro-magnetic components are entirely housed within the bell itself. To achieve this, the electro-magnetic parts must be compact. A single electro-magnet has pole pieces at both ends, with an armature hanging from a pivot and balanced by the bell's hammer. At the back of the armature, there may be a make-and-break mechanism that allows for a continuous series of strikes, or this can be left out. In that case, a single strike occurs when the connection to the battery is made, or both functions can be activated through separate wires; contact one wire for a single strike, or the other for a series of strikes via the make-and-break. When the contact-breaker is in use, it's designed to cause a slight friction with each strike, keeping the contact clean. The flexible break with its clever wiping contact is a significant improvement over the typical screw, which often gets misaligned.
The form of the magnet is such that a considerable[Pg 103] degree of magnetic force is caused by a comparatively small battery power. The electro-magnetic apparatus being within the bell the latter forms a very effective and handsome shield for the former. Not only can the bell shield the electro-magnet from wet but the whole of the conducting wires as well.
The shape of the magnet is designed so that a significant amount of magnetic force is generated by a relatively small battery power. The electromagnetic device is housed inside the bell, which serves as an effective and attractive protective cover for it. The bell not only protects the electromagnet from moisture but also shields all of the wiring.
The bell may be screwed to a tube through which passes the conducting wire, which makes contact with an insulated metallic piece in the centre of the top of the bell. Both the wire and the contact piece are as completely shielded from the weather as if within the bell itself.
The bell can be attached to a tube that holds the conducting wire, which connects with an insulated metal piece in the center of the top of the bell. Both the wire and the contact piece are fully protected from the weather as if they were inside the bell.
The great point of departure is the discarding of the unsightly magnet box, and the hemispherical bell (see Fig. 32), and substituting a bell of the Church type (see Fig. 42), and placing inside it an electro-magnet specially arranged. The inventors use a single solenoidal magnet of a peculiar construction, by which the armature is attracted by both poles simultaneously. By this means less than half the usual quantity of wire is required, thus reducing the external resistance of the circuit one half. Moreover the armature, besides being magnetised by induction, as acted on in the ordinary method of making electric bells, is by Messrs. Jensen's plan directly polarised by being in actual magnetic contact by the connection of the gimbal (which is one piece with the armature) with the core iron of their magnet. It is thus induced to perform the largest amount of work with the smallest electro-motive force. Instead of the armature and clapper being in a[Pg 105][Pg 104] straight line attached to a rigid spring, which necessitates a considerable attractive power to primarily give it momentum, in the Jensen Bell the armature and hammer are in the form of an inverted U, and being perfectly balanced from the point of suspension, the lines of force from a comparatively small magnetic field suffice to set this improved form of armature into instant regular vibration. By using a flexible break and make arrangement instead of the usual armature spring and set screw (at best of most uncertain action), it is found that a much better result is attained, and by this device the armature can be set much nearer the poles of the magnet with sufficient traverse of the hammer. This is in strict accordance with the law of inverse squares, which holds that the force exerted between two magnetic poles is inversely proportionate to the square of the distance between them, or, in other words, that magnets increase proportionately in their power of attraction as they decrease in the square of the distance. It will now be seen why these bells require so little battery power to ring them: firstly, the armature and hammer are so perfectly balanced as to offer but little resistance; secondly, the external resistance to the current is reduced; and thirdly, the best possible use is made of the electro-magnetic force at disposal.
The main change starts with getting rid of the bulky magnet box and the hemispherical bell (see Fig. 32) and replacing it with a church-style bell (see Fig. 42) that has a specially arranged electro-magnet inside. The inventors use a single solenoidal magnet with a unique design that attracts the armature from both poles at the same time. This means less than half the usual amount of wire is needed, cutting the external resistance of the circuit by half. Additionally, the armature is not only magnetized by induction, which happens in the typical way of making electric bells, but is also directly polarized through the connection of the gimbal (which is part of the armature) to the core iron of their magnet. This setup allows it to do more work with less electro-motive force. Instead of having the armature and clapper in a straight line attached to a rigid spring, which requires a lot of power to get moving, the Jensen Bell features an armature and hammer shaped like an inverted U. This design is perfectly balanced at the suspension point, so a smaller magnetic field is enough to make this improved armature vibrate regularly and instantly. By using a flexible break-and-make setup instead of the typical armature spring and set screw (which can be unreliable), much better results are achieved. This also allows the armature to be placed much closer to the magnet poles while still having enough movement for the hammer. This follows the law of inverse squares, which states that the force between two magnetic poles decreases in proportion to the square of the distance between them, meaning that magnets get stronger as the distance decreases. It’s now clear why these bells use so little battery power: first, the armature and hammer are so well balanced that they offer minimal resistance; second, the external resistance to the current is lowered; and third, the electro-magnetic force is utilized as efficiently as possible.
§ 50. The next modification which demands attention is the so-called "Circular bell." This differs from the ordinary form only in having the action entirely covered by the dome. Except, perhaps, in point of appearance,[Pg 106] this presents no advantages to that. The bells known as "Mining bells" resemble somewhat in outward appearance the circular bell; but in these mining bells the action is all enclosed in strong, square teak cases, to protect the movement, as far as possible, from the effects of the damp. All the parts are, for the same reason, made very large and strong; the armature is pivoted instead of being supported on a spring, the hammer shank being long, and furnished with a heavy bob. The domes or bells are from 6 inches to 12 inches in diameter, and are generally fitted with single stroke movement, so as to enable them to be used for signalling. The hammer shank, with its bob, and the dome, which stands in the centre of the case, are the only parts left uncovered, as may be seen on reference to Figs. 43 A and B, where the exterior and interior of such a bell are shown.
§ 50. The next modification that needs attention is the so-called "Circular bell." This differs from the regular design only in that its mechanism is completely covered by the dome. Aside from its appearance, it doesn't offer any real advantages over the standard version. The bells known as "Mining bells" look somewhat like the circular bell on the outside; however, in these mining bells, the mechanism is fully enclosed within strong, square teak cases to protect the movement as much as possible from moisture. All the parts are, for the same reason, made very large and sturdy; the armature is pivoted rather than resting on a spring, the hammer shank is long, and it has a heavy bob. The domes or bells range from 6 inches to 12 inches in diameter and are usually equipped with a single stroke mechanism for signaling. The hammer shank and bob, along with the dome at the center of the case, are the only parts exposed, as can be seen in Figs. 43 A and B, which show the exterior and interior of such a bell.
§ 51. In the "Electric Trumpet," introduced by Messrs. Binswanger, of the General Electric Company, we have a very novel and effective arrangement of[Pg 107] the parts of an electric bell and telephone together. This instrument, along with its battery, line and push, is illustrated at Fig. 44, where A is a hollow brass cylinder, in which is placed an ordinary electro-magnet similar to Figs. 20 or 20 A. At the front end, near B, is affixed by its edges a thin disc of sheet iron, precisely as in the Bell telephone,[14] and over against it, at B, is an insulated contact screw, as in the ordinary trembling bell. On the disc of sheet iron, at the spot where the screw touches, is soldered a speck of platinum. The wires from the electro-magnet are connected, one to the upper binding screw, the other to the brass case of the instrument itself, which is in metallic communication[Pg 108] with the sheet iron disc. The return wire from the contact screw is shown attached to the insulated piece, and is fastened to another binding screw (not visible) on the base board. When contact is made with the battery, through the press or push, the magnet becomes energised, and pulls the iron disc or diaphragm towards it, causing it to buckle inwards. In doing this, contact is broken with the screw B; consequently the diaphragm again straightens out, as the magnet no longer pulls it. Again contact is made; when of course the same round of performances is continuously repeated. As the plate or diaphragm vibrates many hundreds of times per second, it sets up a distinctly musical and loud sound wave, not unlike the note of a cornet-a-piston, or a loud harmonium reed. With a number of these "trumpets," each diaphragm being duly tuned to its proper pitch, it would be possible to construct a novel musical instrument, working solely by electricity. The "pushes" need only take the form of pianoforte keys to render the instrument within the grasp of any pianoforte or organ player.
§ 51. In the "Electric Trumpet," introduced by Messrs. Binswanger of the General Electric Company, we have an innovative and effective combination of the parts of an electric bell and telephone. This device, along with its battery, line, and button, is shown at Fig. 44, where A is a hollow brass cylinder containing a standard electro-magnet similar to Figs. 20 or 20 A. At the front end, near B, there is a thin disc of sheet iron attached by its edges, just like in the Bell telephone, [14], and opposite it, at B, is an insulated contact screw, similar to that in a regular vibrating bell. On the iron disc, at the point where the screw touches, a small piece of platinum is soldered. The wires from the electro-magnet connect, one to the upper binding screw and the other to the brass casing of the instrument itself, which is electrically connected to the sheet iron disc. The return wire from the contact screw is attached to the insulated part and goes to another binding screw (not visible) on the base board. When the battery is connected through the button, the magnet gets energized and pulls the iron disc or diaphragm towards it, making it bend inward. In doing so, the contact with the screw B is broken; thus, the diaphragm straightens out again as the magnet no longer pulls it. Contact is reestablished, and this cycle of actions is continuously repeated. As the plate or diaphragm vibrates hundreds of times per second, it produces a clear musical and loud sound wave, similar to the note of a cornet-a-piston or a loud harmonium reed. With several of these "trumpets," each diaphragm properly tuned to its specific pitch, it would be possible to create a unique musical instrument that operates entirely on electricity. The "buttons" could simply be designed like piano keys, making the instrument accessible to any piano or organ player.
§ 52. Sometimes the gong or "dome" of the ordinary bell is replaced by a coil spring, as in the American clocks; sometimes quaint forms are given to the parts covering the "movement," so as to imitate the head of an owl, etc. But bells with these changes in outward form will not present any difficulty, either in fixing or in management, to those who have mastered the structural and working details given in this chapter.
§ 52. Sometimes the gong or "dome" of a regular bell is swapped out for a coil spring, like in American clocks; other times, unique shapes are used for the parts covering the "movement," like the head of an owl, etc. However, bells with these changes in exterior design won’t pose any issues in terms of repair or operation for those who understand the structural and functional details outlined in this chapter.
[10] "Amateur Work."
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ "Hobby Project."
[11] Insula in Latin means an island, hence an electrified body is said to be insulated when surrounded by non-conductors, as an island by the sea.
[11] Insula in Latin means an island, so an electrified body is described as insulated when it’s surrounded by non-conductors, just like an island is surrounded by water.
[12] A "push," of which several forms will hereafter be described and figured, consists essentially in a spring carrying a stud, standing directly over, but not touching, another stud, fixed to a base. The lower stud is connected to one terminal of battery, the spring is connected to the bell. When the spring is pressed down, the two studs come into contact, the current flows, and the bell rings.
[12] A "push," which will be described and shown in various forms later, basically consists of a spring with a stud on it that hovers directly above, but doesn’t touch, another stud that’s fixed to a base. The lower stud connects to one terminal of a battery, while the spring connects to the bell. When the spring is pressed down, the two studs touch, allowing the current to flow, and the bell rings.
CHAPTER IV.
ON CONTACTS, PUSHES, SWITCHES, KEYS, ALARMS,
AND RELAYS.
§ 53. All the appliances which have hitherto been described, would be utterly useless for the purposes intended, had we not at hand some means of easily, certainly and rapidly completing and breaking the circuit between the bell or bells, on the one hand, and the battery on the other. This necessary piece of apparatus, which is simply a contact maker, receives different names, dependent on its application. When it is intended to be actuated directly by hand, it is known as a "push," a "pressel," or "pull," according to the mode in which the contact is made. At Fig. 45, A, B, C, D, and E, show the outward forms of various "pushes," in wood and china, as sent out by the leading makers. (The ones figured are from Messrs. Binswanger & Co.) At F is a sectional view of one of these pushes, and G shows the interior when the cover has been removed. From these two latter illustrations it will be easily understood that the "push" consists essentially in two pieces of[Pg 110] metal one or both of which are springs, and one of which is connected with one of the wires from the battery, while the other is attached to the wire proceeding to the bell. When the button is pressed the upper spring comes into contact with the lower metal spring or plate. The circuit is now complete; hence the bell rings. But as soon as the finger is removed from the stud or button of the "push," the spring returns to its old place, contact being thereby broken when the bell ceases to ring, unless it be fitted with a continuous ringing arrangement (see § 48). In fastening the leading wires to these[Pg 111] pushes, care must be taken that the ends of the wires be scraped, and sand papered quite clean and bright, bent into a loop which must be inserted under the head of the screw that holds the wire to the spring pieces; the screws being then tightened up carefully to ensure a good grip and contact with the wires.
§ 53. All the devices we've talked about so far would be completely pointless for their intended use if we didn't have a way to easily, reliably, and quickly connect and disconnect the circuit between the bell or bells and the battery. This essential device, which is basically a contact maker, has different names based on how it's used. When it's meant to be operated directly by hand, it's called a "push," a "pressel," or a "pull," depending on how the connection is made. At Fig. 45, A, B, C, D, and E show the shapes of various "pushes" made of wood and china, as produced by the leading manufacturers. (The ones shown are from Messrs. Binswanger & Co.) At F is a sectional view of one of these pushes, and G shows the inside when the cover is removed. From these two illustrations, it's easy to see that the "push" consists primarily of two pieces of metal, one or both of which are springs, with one connected to one of the wires from the battery and the other connected to the wire leading to the bell. When the button is pressed, the upper spring touches the lower metal spring or plate. The circuit is now complete, so the bell rings. But when the finger is lifted off the "push" button, the spring returns to its original position, breaking the contact and stopping the bell from ringing, unless it has a continuous ringing feature (see § 48). When connecting the main wires to these pushes, it's important to ensure that the wire ends are scraped and sanded clean and shiny, bent into a loop, and inserted under the head of the screw that secures the wire to the spring pieces; the screws should be tightened carefully to ensure a strong grip and contact with the wires.
§ 54. A "pressel" (Fig. 46) is simply a push which instead of being made a fixture by being fastened in the wall or door, is attached to a metallic wired line, so that it is generally made to resemble somewhat in outward appearance the knob or tassel of the bell-pull of the last generation, the interior arrangement is precisely similar to that of the push; that is to say, the pressel consists in a pear-shaped or acorn-shaped hollow wooden box, with a projecting knob or button below. This button is attached to a spring, the tension of which keeps the knob protruding from the end of the box, and at the same time prevents contacts with the second spring at the bottom of the box. Two insulated wires, one from the battery, the other from the bell, are connected to separate screws at the top of the pressel. One of these screws connects with the lower spring, the other with the upper.
§ 54. A "pressel" (Fig. 46) is simply a push button that isn’t fixed in a wall or door but is instead linked to a metallic wired line. It usually looks a bit like the knob or tassel from bell-pulls of the past, but the internal setup is exactly the same as a regular push button. Essentially, the pressel is made up of a pear-shaped or acorn-shaped hollow wooden box, with a knob or button sticking out at the bottom. This button is connected to a spring that keeps the knob sticking out from the end of the box and also prevents it from touching the second spring at the bottom. Two insulated wires, one from the battery and the other from the bell, are attached to separate screws at the top of the pressel. One screw connects to the lower spring, and the other connects to the upper spring.
§ 55. The "pull" (Fig. 47), as its name implies, makes contact and rings the bell on being pulled. The[Pg 112] knob has a rather long shank bar, around which is coiled a pretty stiff spring. At the farther extremity is an ebonite or boxwood collar ending in a rather wider metal ring. The wires from the bell and battery are connected respectively to two flat springs, a a', by the screws b b'. When the knob is pulled, the metal collar touches both springs, and the circuit is completed. Closely allied to the "pull" is a form of bedroom contact, which combines pear-push or pressel and pull in one device. This will be readily understood on reference to Fig. 48. Another form of bedroom pull, with ordinary rope and tassel, consists in a box containing a jointed metal lever, standing over a stud, from which it is kept out of contact by a counter spring. To the projecting end of the lever is attached the bell rope. When this is pulled the lever touches the stud, contact is made, and the bell rings. This is clearly shown in Fig. 49 A. In all these contacts, except the door pull (Fig. 47) where the friction of the action of pulling keeps the surfaces[Pg 113] bright, the points of contact should be tipped with platinum. Another form of contact to be let in the floor of the dining-room, within easy reach of the foot of the carver, or other persons at the head of the table, is shown at Fig. 49 B.
§ 55. The "pull" (Fig. 47), as the name suggests, makes contact and rings the bell when pulled. The knob has a long shank bar with a fairly stiff spring coiled around it. At the far end is an ebonite or boxwood collar that ends in a wider metal ring. The wires from the bell and battery connect to two flat springs, a a', via the screws b b'. When the knob is pulled, the metal collar touches both springs, completing the circuit. Closely related to the "pull" is a type of bedroom contact that combines a pear-push or pressel and pull into one device. This will be easy to understand by looking at Fig. 48. Another type of bedroom pull, with a regular rope and tassel, consists of a box containing a jointed metal lever positioned over a stud, with a counter spring keeping it out of contact. The bell rope is attached to the projecting end of the lever. When pulled, the lever makes contact with the stud, completing the circuit and ringing the bell. This is clearly illustrated in Fig. 49 A. In all these contacts, except for the door pull (Fig. 47), where the friction from pulling keeps the surfaces shiny, the contact points should be tipped with platinum. Another type of contact can be installed in the dining room floor, within easy reach of the carver’s foot or other guests at the head of the table, as shown at Fig. 49 B.
Mr. Mackenzie has introduced a very ingenious contrivance whereby the ringer may know whether the bell at the distant end has rung. This is effected by inclosing in the push a device similar to that shown at Fig. 43 A. That is to say, an electro-magnet wound with wire, and surmounted by a thin iron disc, is placed in circuit with the line wires. The ringing of the bell rapidly magnetises and demagnetises the electro-magnet, and causes a humming sound, which clearly indicates whether the bell is ringing or not. As this device can be made very small, compact, and not liable to derangement, it is of easy application.
Mr. Mackenzie has created a clever device that lets the person ringing the bell know if the bell at the other end has actually rung. This works by including a mechanism in the push similar to what is shown at Fig. 43 A. Specifically, an electromagnet wound with wire and topped with a thin iron disc is connected with the line wires. When the bell rings, it quickly magnetizes and demagnetizes the electromagnet, producing a humming sound that clearly indicates if the bell is ringing or not. Since this device can be made very small, compact, and not prone to malfunction, it's easy to use.
The "burglar's pest" (as the contrivance we illustrate is called) is one of the most useful applications of[Pg 114] electricity for the protection of property against thieves. It consists usually, first, of a brass plate (Fig. 50), upon which a platinum contact piece is fixed, and second, of a spring made of hardened brass or steel insulated from the plate; or of a cylindrical box with a spiral spring inside (see Fig. 51). It is so arranged that as long as the stud is kept pressed in, the platinum points of contact are kept apart; this is the position when fixed in the rebate of a closed door or window; but as soon as opened, the stud passes outward through the hole, and the points of contact come together and complete the circuit of the wires in connection with the bell. The bell is best to be a continuous ringing one. It may be[Pg 115] fixed in the master's bedroom, or outside the premises in the street.
The "burglar's pest" (as this device is called) is one of the most useful ways to use[Pg 114] electricity to protect property from thieves. It usually consists of a brass plate (Fig. 50), with a platinum contact piece attached, and a spring made from hardened brass or steel that is insulated from the plate; or a cylindrical box with a spiral spring inside (see Fig. 51). It’s designed so that as long as the button is pressed, the platinum contact points remain apart; this is the position when it’s fixed in the groove of a closed door or window. But as soon as it's opened, the button pops out through the hole, and the contact points touch, completing the circuit of the wires connected to the bell. The bell should ideally be one that rings continuously. It can be installed in the owner’s bedroom or outside the property on the street.
Legge's Window Blind contact is an arrangement by which the blind is secured at the bottom by attaching it to a hook or button. A slight pressure against the blind (caused by anyone trying to enter after having broken a window) sets the electric bell in motion unknown to the intruder.
Legge's Window Blind contact is a setup that holds the blind at the bottom by connecting it to a hook or button. A little pressure on the blind (from someone trying to get in after breaking a window) triggers the electric bell without the intruder knowing.
A form of floor contact, which may be placed under a light mat or carpet, illustrated at Fig. 52, serves to give notice if anyone be waiting at the door, or stepping into places which are desired to be kept private. All these arrangements, to be serviceable, should be connected with continuous ringing bells (see § 48). Wherever it is likely that these arrangements may stand a long time[Pg 116] without being called into play, it is better to employ some form of contact in which a rubbing action (which tends to clean the surfaces and then make a good contact) is brought into play, rather than a merely dotting action. For this reason, spring contacts in which the springs connected with the wires are kept apart by an insulating wedge (shown at Fig. 53) as long as the door or window are kept closed, are preferred. In the case of windows, strips of brass let into the frame on each side of the sash, are thrown into contact by the springs a and a' in the sash itself, as shown at Fig. 54. For shop doors and others, where a short contact only is required, and this only when the door is opened, a contact such as shown at Fig. 55 is well adapted. It consists, as will be seen, in a peculiarly shaped pivoted trigger a, which is lifted forwards when the door is opened, so that it makes contact with the spring b. Owing to the curved shape of the arm of the[Pg 117] trigger, the contact is not repeated when the door is closed.
A type of floor sensor that can be placed under a light mat or carpet, shown at Fig. 52, alerts if someone is waiting at the door or entering areas meant to be kept private. To be effective, these systems should be linked to continuous ringing bells (see § 48). Where it's likely these systems will remain unused for a long time[Pg 116], it's better to use a contact method that involves a rubbing action (which helps clean the surfaces and ensures a good connection) instead of just a dotting action. For this reason, spring contacts that are kept apart by an insulating wedge (shown at Fig. 53) while the door or window is closed are preferred. For windows, brass strips embedded in the frame on either side of the sash are connected by the springs a and a' in the sash itself, as illustrated at Fig. 54. For shop doors and similar cases where only a brief contact is needed, which occurs only when the door opens, a contact like the one shown at Fig. 55 is suitable. It features a uniquely shaped pivoted trigger a that is lifted forward when the door opens, making contact with the spring b. Due to the curved shape of the trigger's arm, the contact does not happen again when the door is closed.
§ 57. In all forms of burglar or thief alarms, the ordinary system of having the circuit broken, until contact is made by the intruder involuntarily making contact at some point, presents one great disadvantage; and that is, that if "notre ami l'ennemi," viz., the thief or burglar, be anything of an electrician (and alas! to what base uses may not even science be perverted) he will begin by cutting all suspicious-looking wires before he[Pg 118] attempts to set about any serious work. This disadvantage may be entirely overcome by the adoption of a simple modification, known as the "closed circuit system" of bell ringing. For this the bells, etc., are continuously in contact with the batteries, but owing to the peculiar connections, do not ring unless the circuit is broken. To render the working of such a system clear to my readers, I quote the description given in the English Mechanic, by one of our leading electricians:—
§ 57. In all types of burglar and thief alarms, the usual method of having the circuit open until the intruder accidentally makes contact at some point has a significant drawback; if "our friend the enemy," meaning the thief or burglar, has any knowledge of electricity (and unfortunately, even science can be misused), they will start by cutting any suspicious-looking wires before attempting to do any serious work. This issue can be completely resolved by using a simple modification known as the "closed circuit system" for ringing bells. In this system, the bells, etc., are always connected to the batteries, but because of the specific connections, they won't ring unless the circuit is broken. To explain how such a system works to my readers, I will quote the description provided in the English Mechanic by one of our top electricians:—
Writing on the subject of Closed Circuit Bell-ringing, Mr. Perren Maycock says:—"This is principally adopted for alarm purposes. Its superiority over the open circuit system lies in the fact that notice is given on opening (breaking) the circuit, which is the reverse to the usual practice. In the ordinary method it becomes necessary to have a contact maker, differing in form for various purposes and situations, which, along with the leading wires, must be artfully concealed. All this entails great expense; besides which one can never be sure that the contacts and wires are in proper order without actually trying each one. On the other hand, with the "closed circuit" system, one has merely to place the wire in any convenient position, it being better seen than hidden. The very fact that alarm is given on breaking the contact renders the method applicable in circumstances and under conditions which would render the "open" method difficult and expensive, if not impossible. One can always be certain that everything is in order. The modern burglar, electrically educated[Pg 119] as regards common practise in such matters, would naturally make a point of cutting all wires that fall in his path. From these and other obvious considerations, it is evident how simple and yet how perfect a means of protection such a system provides. I will now proceed to explain the manner of application. The bell used differs from the ordinary, only in the arrangement of its external connections.
Writing about Closed Circuit Bell-ringing, Mr. Perren Maycock states: "This system is mainly used for alarm purposes. Its advantage over the open circuit system is that it notifies you when the circuit is opened (broken), which is the opposite of the usual practice. In the typical method, a contact maker is needed, varying in design for different uses and locations, which, along with the leading wires, must be cleverly hidden. This can be quite costly; plus, you can never be sure that the contacts and wires are functioning properly without checking each one. In contrast, with the 'closed circuit' system, you just need to place the wire anywhere convenient, as it's better seen than hidden. The fact that an alarm is triggered when the contact is broken makes this method useful in situations where the 'open' method would be complicated and expensive, if not impossible. You can always be sure everything is working correctly. A modern burglar, educated in common practices regarding such matters, would likely aim to cut any wires in their way. Given these and other obvious points, it’s clear how straightforward yet effective this system is for protection. I will now explain how it is applied. The bell used differs from the ordinary one only in the setup of its external connections."
Fig. 56 A represents a single-alarm circuit. When contact is broken externally, there is a closed circuit in which are the battery and bell magnet coils.[Pg 120] Consequently the armature is drawn away from the contact stud, close up to the electro-magnet, and is held so. When a break occurs, the armature flies back, completes the local circuit, and rings so long as the external circuit remains broken. There is a switch for use when the alarm is not required.
Fig. 56 A represents a single-alarm circuit. When the external contact is broken, a closed circuit is formed that includes the battery and bell magnet coils.[Pg 120] As a result, the armature is pulled away from the contact stud and is held close to the electromagnet. When a break happens, the armature snaps back, completes the local circuit, and rings as long as the external circuit stays broken. There’s a switch to use when the alarm isn’t needed.
Fig. 56 B represents a case in which notice is given at two places. By insulating a key as shown, reply signalling can be carried on between the points at which the bells are placed. A special gravity Daniell modification (§ 25) is used for this class of work (Fig. 57): a narrow lead cylinder, about 2" in diameter, watertight except at the bottom, where it opens out into an inverted cone, the surface of which is pierced with holes. This stands immersed in dilute sulphuric acid. A saturated solution of copper sulphate is next carefully introduced, so as to displace the acid upwards. Crystals of sulphate of[Pg 121] copper are introduced into the open end at the top of cylinder, to fill the perforated portion at the bottom. From the wooden cover of cell a thick flat ring of amalgamated zinc hangs suspended in the dilute acid. Care should be taken not to introduce the zinc till the two solutions have become well separated. During action this becomes coppered, while in contact with the sulphate of copper, but it is not attacked by the acid. It is, however, preferable to paint that portion of the lead, which is surrounded by the acid. The height of the cell is about 14."
Fig. 56 B represents a situation where notice is given in two locations. By insulating a key as shown, response signaling can occur between the points where the bells are located. A special gravity Daniell modification (§ 25) is used for this type of work (Fig. 57): a narrow lead cylinder, about 2" in diameter, waterproof except at the bottom, where it opens into an inverted cone with holes in its surface. This is submerged in dilute sulfuric acid. A saturated solution of copper sulfate is then carefully added to displace the acid upwards. Crystals of copper sulfate are added into the open end at the top of the cylinder to fill the perforated section at the bottom. A thick flat ring of amalgamated zinc hangs suspended in the dilute acid from the wooden cover of the cell. Care should be taken not to introduce the zinc until the two solutions have become well separated. During operation, this zinc becomes coated with copper while in contact with the copper sulfate but is not corroded by the acid. However, it is advisable to paint the part of the lead that is surrounded by the acid. The height of the cell is about 14."
It will be readily understood that if this latter system be employed, special contacts, which break contact when the pressure is removed, must be employed for the door or window contacts. A simple form is shown at Fig. 58.
It will be easily understood that if this latter system is used, special contacts that break the connection when the pressure is released must be used for the door or window contacts. A simple form is shown at Fig. 58.
§ 58. Another useful application of "contact" is for the notification of any rise or fall of temperature beyond certain fixed limits. The devices used for this purpose are known as "fire alarms," "frost alarms," and "thermometer alarms." The thermometer alarm is at once the most effective and trustworthy of the forms known, as, besides its delicacy, it has the advantage of being able to give notice of low, as well as of abnormally high temperature. The form usually given to the electric alarm thermometer, is well shown at Fig. 59. It consists in an[Pg 122] ordinary thermometer with a wire projecting into the tube to a certain point, say 100 degrees. The mercury in the bulb being also connected with another wire. When the temperature is within the usual climatic range, the mercury does not reach the upper wire. If by reason of fire or any other abnormal heat, the temperature rises beyond that to which the instrument is set, the mercury rises and touches the upper wire, contact is thus established, and the bell rings.
§ 58. Another practical use of "contact" is for alerting people to any increases or decreases in temperature beyond specific limits. The devices designed for this purpose are called "fire alarms," "frost alarms," and "thermometer alarms." The thermometer alarm is the most effective and reliable of all the options available, as it not only shows sensitivity but also the ability to notify of low temperatures in addition to dangerously high ones. The typical design of the electric alarm thermometer is clearly illustrated at Fig. 59. It consists of a regular thermometer with a wire extending into the tube to a designated point, like 100 degrees. The mercury in the bulb is also connected to another wire. When the temperature is within the normal climatic range, the mercury does not reach the upper wire. If due to fire or any other source of abnormal heat the temperature surpasses the set point, the mercury rises and makes contact with the upper wire, creating a connection, which triggers the bell to ring.
By giving the thermometer the shape of a letter U, it is possible to notify also a fall below a certain degree, as well as a rise beyond a certain fixed point. These thermometers are specially used by nurserymen and others, to warn them of the too great lowering of temperature, or vice versâ, in the houses under their charge.
By designing the thermometer in the shape of a U, it's possible to signal a drop below a certain temperature, as well as a rise above a specific fixed point. These thermometers are especially used by nurserymen and others to alert them to significant drops in temperature, or vice versa, in the areas they oversee.
Other forms of fire alarms are shown at Fig. 60 and 61. If a strip be built up of two thin layers of dissimilar metals riveted together, as the two metals do not expand at the same rate, the strip will bend to the right if heated, and to the left if cooled. In the instrument shown at Fig. 60, the application of heat causes the flexible strip carrying the contact screw, to bend over till it touches the lower stop, when, of[Pg 123] course, the bell rings. If two stops are employed instead of the lower one only, the bell will ring when a low temperature is reached, which causes the strip to bend in the opposite direction.
Other types of fire alarms are shown in Fig. 60 and 61. If you make a strip from two thin layers of different metals riveted together, the strip will bend to the right when heated and to the left when cooled, since the two metals don’t expand at the same rate. In the device shown at Fig. 60, applying heat causes the flexible strip with the contact screw to bend until it touches the lower stop, which makes the bell ring. If two stops are used instead of just the lower one, the bell will ring when it detects a low temperature that makes the strip bend in the opposite direction.[Pg 123]
At Fig. 61 is illustrated a novel form, in which the expansion of air causes contact to be made. It consists in an air chamber hermetically closed by a corrugated metal plate I, similar to that used in the aneroid barometers. When the temperature rises to a certain point, the expansion of the air in the chamber brings the[Pg 124] metallic plate into contact with the screw, as shown below. This closes the circuit and rings the bell in the usual manner. In all these fire or thermometer alarms, the exact degree of heat at which the bell shall ring, can be pretty accurately adjusted by means of the contact screws.
At Fig. 61, a new design is shown where the expansion of air creates contact. It features an air chamber sealed by a corrugated metal plate I, similar to what is used in aneroid barometers. When the temperature increases to a specific point, the expanding air in the chamber pushes the metallic plate against the screw, as illustrated below. This completes the circuit and rings the bell as usual. In all these fire or thermometer alarms, the precise temperature at which the bell rings can be accurately adjusted using the contact screws.
§ 59. Closely allied to these forms of contacts are the devices whereby an ordinary clock or watch can be made to arouse the over-drowsy sleeper by the ringing of an electric bell, which in this case should be of the continuous type. All these depend in their action upon some arrangement whereby when the hour hand of the clock or watch arrives at a certain given point in its travel, it makes contact between the battery and bell. In general the contact piece is attached bodily to the clock, but in the very ingenious arrangement illustrated at Fig. 62 (devised by Messrs. Binswanger) the contacts are attached to an outer case, and as the case of the watch itself forms one point of contact, any watch that will slip in the case, may be set to ring the bell.
§ 59. Related to these types of connections are the devices that allow a standard clock or watch to wake up a heavy sleeper by ringing an electric bell, which should be a continuous type in this case. All of these rely on a setup in which, when the hour hand of the clock or watch reaches a specific point, it connects the battery to the bell. Typically, the contact piece is firmly attached to the clock, but in the clever design shown at Fig. 62 (created by Messrs. Binswanger), the contacts are connected to an outer case, and since the watch itself serves as one contact point, any watch that fits into the case can be set to ring the bell.
Messrs. Gent, of Leicester, have also perfected an electric watchman's clock, which records the number of places the watchman in charge has visited or missed on his rounds. This we illustrate at Fig. 63. We quote Messrs. Gent's own words, in the following description:—
Messrs. Gent, of Leicester, have also developed an electric watchman’s clock that logs the number of locations the watchman in charge has visited or skipped during his rounds. We illustrate this at Fig. 63. We quote Messrs. Gent’s own words in the following description:—
"It consists of an eight-day clock, to which is attached a disc or table revolving upon a vertical axis and driven by the mechanism of the clock. The disc is covered with a sheet of paper, attached to it by a binding screw[Pg 125] so that it can be removed when used and a clean sheet substituted for it. Each sheet of paper is divided longitudinally into hours and, if necessary, parts of hours, and crosswise into as many divisions as there are places to be visited by the watchman—any number from one to twenty. Each division has a corresponding marker, which indicates, by the impression it makes upon the paper, the time the watchman visits the place connected with that marker. Wires are carried from the terminals of the clock, one to the battery, and one to each press-button fixed at the points intended to be visited by the watchman; another wire is carried from each press-button to the other end of the battery. The action is very simple: when the button is pressed in the current[Pg 126] passes through a coil carrying an armature and contact breaker with a point at the end of a long arm; a hammer-like motion is given to the pointer, and a distinct perforation made in the card. It is usual to have the press-button in a box locked up, of which the watchman only has the key.
It features an eight-day clock connected to a disc or table that rotates on a vertical axis, powered by the clock's mechanism. The disc is covered with a sheet of paper, attached by a binding screw[Pg 125] so it can be removed for use and replaced with a fresh sheet. Each sheet of paper is divided vertically into hours and, if needed, parts of hours, and horizontally into as many sections as there are locations for the watchman to visit—anywhere from one to twenty. Each section has a corresponding marker that indicates, through the impression it makes on the paper, the time the watchman visited the location associated with that marker. Wires extend from the clock terminals: one to the battery and one to each press-button installed at the designated locations for the watchman; another wire runs from each press-button to the other end of the battery. The operation is straightforward: when the button is pressed, the current flows through a coil that moves an armature and contact breaker with a pointed end on a long arm; this creates a hammer-like motion in the pointer, making a clear perforation in the card. Typically, the press-button is kept in a locked box, with the watchman being the only one with the key.
"The clock may be in the office or bedroom of the[Pg 127] manager or head of the establishment, who can thus, from time to time, satisfy himself of the watchman's vigilance. The record should be examined in the morning, and replaced by a clean sheet of card.
"The clock can be in the office or bedroom of the[Pg 127] manager or head of the establishment, allowing them to occasionally check on the watchman's attentiveness. The record should be reviewed in the morning and swapped out for a fresh sheet of paper."
"This clock received the special mention of Her Majesty's Commissioners in Lunacy, and has been adopted by some of the largest asylums in the country.
"This clock got special recognition from Her Majesty's Commissioners in Lunacy and has been adopted by some of the largest mental health facilities in the country."
"We have recently made an important improvement by adding a relay for every marker, thus enabling a local battery of greater power to be used for actuating the markers. This has made no alteration in the appearance of the clock, as the relays are contained within the cornice at the top of the clock case."
"We've recently made a significant upgrade by adding a relay for each marker, allowing a more powerful local battery to be used to activate the markers. This hasn't changed the look of the clock at all, since the relays are housed within the cornice at the top of the clock case."
§ 60. By means of a float, it is possible to give notice of the height of water in a tank, a reservoir, or even of the state of the tide. In these cases all that is needed is a float with an arm, having a suitable contact attached, so that when the water rises to the level of the float and lifts it, it causes the contact piece to complete the circuit through a set screw. Or the float may be attached to an arm having a certain play in both directions, i.e., up and down, within which no contact is made, as the arm has a contact piece on either side, which can touch either an upper or a lower contact screw, according to whether the tide is low or high, or whether the lock or tank is nearly empty or too full.
§ 60. Using a float, you can indicate the water level in a tank, reservoir, or even the state of the tide. In these situations, all that's needed is a float with an arm that has a suitable contact attached. When the water rises to the level of the float and lifts it, it causes the contact piece to close the circuit through a set screw. Alternatively, the float can be connected to an arm that can move up and down within a certain range, meaning no contact is made in that range, as the arm has a contact piece on either side that can connect with either an upper or lower contact screw, depending on whether the tide is low or high, or whether the lock or tank is almost empty or too full.
§ 61. Sometimes it is convenient to be able to ring an ordinary trembling bell continuously, as when a master wishes to wake a member of his family or a servant; or again, to cut a given bell or bells out of[Pg 128] circuit altogether. The arrangements by which this can be effected, are known as "switches." Of switches there are two kinds, namely, plugswitches or interruptors, and lever switches. The former consists essentially in two stout plates of brass affixed to a base board of any insulating material. These brass plates are set parallel to each other, a short distance apart, and the centre of the facing edge is hollowed out to take a brass taper plug. A binding or other screw is fixed to each brass plate, to connect up to the leading wires. When the plug is in its socket, the circuit between the two plates (and consequently between the battery and bell, etc.) is complete; when the plug is out, the contact is broken. This form of switch is subject to work out of order, owing to the fact that the taper plug gradually widens the hole, so that the contact becomes uncertain or defective altogether. By far the better form of switch is the lever switch, as shown at Fig. 64. This consists in a movable metal lever or arm, which is held by a strong spring in contact with the upper binding screw. It can be made to slide over to the right or left of the centre, at its lower or free end, as far as the binding screws or studs shown, which act at once as stops and point of connection to wires. When the arm or lever is in the centre no contact is made but if it be pushed over to the right, it slides on a[Pg 129] brass strip let into and lying flush with the base. Contact is thus made between the upper binding screw and the left-hand screw. If there is another brass strip on the left-hand side (as shown in the figure), contact may be made with another bell, etc., by sliding the arm to the left; or again, if no metal strip be placed on the left side the contact may be broken by pushing the arm towards the left-hand stud.
§ 61. Sometimes it's useful to ring a regular bell continuously, like when someone wants to wake a family member or a servant; or to completely disconnect a specific bell or bells from the circuit. The methods to achieve this are called "switches." There are two types of switches: plugswitches or interruptors, and lever switches. The first type consists of two sturdy brass plates attached to a base board made of insulating material. These brass plates are placed parallel to each other, a short distance apart, with a hollowed-out center on the facing edge to hold a brass taper plug. Each brass plate has a binding or other screw to connect to the main wires. When the plug is in its socket, the circuit between the two plates (and therefore between the battery and the bell, etc.) is complete; when the plug is removed, the connection is broken. This type of switch can malfunction because the taper plug gradually enlarges the hole, making the contact uncertain or totally defective. A much better type of switch is the lever switch, as shown at Fig. 64. This switch has a movable metal lever or arm, which is held in place by a strong spring that keeps it in contact with the upper binding screw. It can slide to the right or left from the center at its lower or free end, up to the binding screws or studs, which serve as both stops and connection points for wires. When the lever is centered, there is no contact made. If the lever is pushed to the right, it slides over a brass strip that is embedded and flush with the base. This makes contact between the upper binding screw and the left-hand screw. If there's another brass strip on the left side (as depicted in the figure), contact can be established with another bell by sliding the arm to the left; alternatively, if there's no metal strip on the left, the contact can be interrupted by pushing the arm toward the left-hand stud.
§ 62. A key is another form of contact, by means of which a long or short completion of circuit can be made by simply tapping on the knob. It is particularly useful when it is desired to transmit signals, either by ringing or otherwise. It consists, as may be seen at Fig. 65, of a lever or arm of brass, pivoted at its centre, furnished with a spring which keeps the portion under the knob out of contact with the stud in the front of the base-board. As both the stud and the lever are connected to binding screws communicating with the battery and bell, etc., it is evident that on depressing the key the circuit with the bell will be completed for a longer or shorter period, varying with the duration of the depression. Hence, either by using preconcerted signals of short and long rings to signify certain common words, such as a long ring for No, and a short one for Yes, or by an adaptation of the ordinary Morse code, intelligible conversation can be kept up between house and stable, etc., etc., by means of a key and a bell. As Mr. Edwinson has given much time to the elucidation of this system of bell signalling, I cannot do better[Pg 130] than quote his instructions, as given in Amateur Work:—
§ 62. A key is another way to make contact that allows for a long or short circuit to be completed just by tapping the knob. It’s especially handy for sending signals, whether by ringing or otherwise. It consists, as shown at Fig. 65, of a brass lever or arm that is pivoted at its center and equipped with a spring keeping the part under the knob away from the stud on the front of the baseboard. Since both the stud and the lever are connected to binding screws linked to the battery and bell, etc., it's clear that pressing the key will close the circuit with the bell for varying lengths of time, depending on how long you press it. Therefore, using predetermined signals of short and long rings to indicate certain common words—like a long ring for No and a short one for Yes—or adapting the regular Morse code, you can maintain an understandable conversation between the house and the stable, etc., using a key and a bell. Since Mr. Edwinson has spent a lot of time explaining this bell signaling system, I can do no better[Pg 130] than quote his instructions, as given in Amateur Work:—
"For this purpose preconcerted signals have been agreed upon or invented as required, and these have been found to be irksome and difficult to remember, because constructed without any reference to a definite plan. We may, however, reduce bell signals to a definite system, and use this system or code as a means to carry on conversation at a distance as intelligently as it can be done by a pair of telegraph instruments. In fact, the Morse telegraph code can be easily adopted for use with electric bells of the vibrating or trembling type, and its alphabet, as appended below, easily learnt. The letters of the alphabet are represented by long strokes and short strokes on the bell, as here shown.—
"For this purpose, agreed-upon or invented signals have been established as needed, but they have proven to be cumbersome and hard to remember, as they were created without a clear plan. However, we can simplify bell signals into a defined system and use this code to communicate over a distance as effectively as a pair of telegraph instruments. In fact, the Morse code can be easily adapted for use with vibrating or trembling electric bells, and the alphabet, provided below, is simple to learn. The letters of the alphabet are represented by long and short tones on the bell, as shown here.—
A | – — |
B | — – – – |
C | — – — – |
D | — – – |
E | – |
F | – – — – |
G | — — – |
H | – – – – |
I | – – |
J | – — — — |
K | — – — |
L | – — – – |
M | — — |
N | — – |
O | — — — |
P | – — — – |
Q | — — – – – |
R | – — – |
S | – – – |
T | — |
U | – – — |
V | – – – — |
W | – — — |
X | — – – — |
Y | — – — — |
Z | — — – – |
Ch | — — — |
Ä (æ) | – — – — |
Ö (œ) | — — — – |
Ü (ue) | – – — — |
1 | – — — — |
2 | – – — — — |
3 | – – – — — |
4 | – – – – — |
5 | – – – – – |
6 | — – – – – |
7 | — — – – – |
8 | — — — – – |
9 | — — — – |
0 | — — — — |
"It will be noticed that the strokes to represent a letter do not in any case exceed four, and that all the figures are represented by five strokes of varying length to each[Pg 131] figure. Stops, and other marks of punctuation, are represented by six strokes, which are in their combination representations of two or three letters respectively, as shown below:—
"It can be observed that the strokes used to represent a letter never exceed four, and that all figures are made up of five strokes of different lengths for each figure. Stops and other punctuation marks are represented by six strokes, which, in their combined form, represent two or three letters respectively, as shown below:—
Comma | (,) | by | A A A | or | – — – — – — |
Full stop | (.) | " | I I I | " | – – – – – – |
Interrogation | (?) | " | U D | " | – – — — – – |
Hyphen | (-) | " | B A | " | — – – – – — |
Apostrophe | (') | " | W G | " | – — — — — – |
Inverted commas | (") | " | A F | " | – — – – — – |
Parenthesis | ( ) | " | K K | " | — – — — – — |
Semi-colon | (;) | " | K Ch | " | – — — — — — |
Surprise | (!) | " | N Ch | " | — – — — — — |
Colon | (:) | " | I Ch | " | – – — — — — |
"In sending signals to indicate stops, no regard must be had to the letters which they represent; these are only given as aids to memory, and are not to be represented separately on the bell. Bell signals must be given with a certain amount of regularity as to time; indeed, to carry on a conversation in this way it is necessary to be as punctilious in time as when playing a piece of music on a piano, if the signals are to be understood. The dots of the signal should therefore be represented in time by one, and the dashes by two, whilst the spaces between words and figures where a stop does not intervene should be represented by a pause equal to that taken by a person counting three, the space between a word and a stop being of the same duration. To make this more clear[Pg 132] I give an example. The mistress signals to her coachman:—
"When sending signals to indicate stops, you shouldn't focus on the letters they represent; these are just memory aids and shouldn't be displayed separately on the bell. Bell signals need to be given with a certain regularity in timing; in fact, to have a conversation this way, you need to be as precise with timing as you would be when playing a piece on the piano if you want the signals to be understood. The dots of the signal should be represented by one, and the dashes by two, while the pauses between words and figures where there isn't a stop should be equal to the time taken by someone counting three, with the pause between a word and a stop being the same length. To clarify this[Pg 132], I'll give an example. The mistress signals to her coachman:—"
G | E | T | T | H | E | ||
— — – | – | — | — | – – – – | – | ||
2 2 1 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 2 | 1 1 1 1 | 1 | 3 |
C | A | R | R | I | A | G | E | |
— – — – | – — | – — – | – — – | – – | – — | — — – | – | |
2 1 2 1 | 1 2 | 1 2 1 | 1 2 1 | 1 1 | 1 2 | 2 2 1 | 1 | 3 |
R | E | A | D | Y |
– — – | – | – — | — – – | — – — — |
1 2 1 | 1 | 1 2 | 2 1 1 | 2 1 2 2 |
"The coachman replies:—
"The driver replies:—"
R | E | A | D | Y |
– — – | – | – — | — – – | — – — — |
1 2 1 | 1 | 1 2 | 2 1 1 | 2 1 2 2 |
"When the mistress is ready she signals:—
"When the lady is ready, she gives a signal:—
B | R | I | N | G | T | H | E | ||
— – – – | – — – | – – | — – | — — – | — | – – – – | – | ||
2 1 1 1 | 1 2 1 | 1 1 | 2 1 | 2 2 1 | 3 | 2 | 1 1 1 1 | 1 | 3 |
C | A | R | R | I | A | G | E |
— – — – | – — | – — – | – — – | – – | – — | — — – | – |
2 1 2 1 | 1 2 | 1 2 1 | 1 2 1 | 1 1 | 1 2 | 2 2 1 | 1 |
"And the coachman replies with a single long ring to signify that he understands. It will be found convenient to have an answering signal from the receiving end of the line to each word separately. This must be sent in the pause after each word, and consists of the short signal E – when the word is understood, or the double short signal I – – when the word is not understood. A negative reply to a question may be given by the[Pg 133] signal for N — –, and an affirmative by the signal for Æ – — – —; other abbreviations may be devised and used where desired. The code having been committed to memory, it will be quite easy to transpose the words and send messages in cypher when we wish to make a confidential communication; or the bells may be muffled under a thick cloak, and thus, whilst the measured beats are heard by the person for whom the signal is intended, others outside the room will not be annoyed by them."
"And the coachman responds with a long ring to show that he understands. It’s useful to have a signal back from the receiving end for each word separately. This should be sent in the pause after each word, using the short signal E – when the word is understood, or the double short signal I – – when it isn't. A negative reply to a question can be given by the signal for N – –, and an affirmative by the signal for Æ – — – —; other abbreviations can be created and used as needed. Once the code is memorized, it will be easy to shift the words around and send messages in code when we want to communicate privately; or the bells can be muffled under a thick cloak, so that while the measured taps can be heard by the person for whom the signal is meant, others outside the room won't be disturbed by them."
§ 63. At § 48, we noticed that a device known as a Relay is a convenient, if not an essential mode of working continuous ringing bells. Here we will direct our attention to its structural arrangement, and to its adaptations. Let us suppose that we had to ring a bell at a considerable distance, so far indeed that a single battery would not energise the electro-magnets of an ordinary bell, sufficiently to produce a distinct ring. It is evident that if we could signal, ever so feebly, to an attendant at the other end of the line to make contact with another battery at the distant end of the line to his bell, by means, say, of a key similar to that shown at Fig. 65, we should get a clear ring, since this second battery, being close to the bell, would send plenty of current to energise the bell's magnets.[Pg 134] But this would require a person constantly in attendance. Now the relay does this automatically; it relays another battery in the circuit. The manner in which it effects this will be rendered clear, on examination of Fig. 66. Here we have an armature A attached to a light spring, which can play between an insulated stop C, and a contact screw B. The play of this armature can be regulated to a nicety by turning the screws B or C. These two screws are both borne by a double bent arm (of metal) affixed to the pillar D. This pillar is separated from the rest of the frame by an insulating collar or washer of ebonite, so that no current can pass from E to D, unless the armature be pulled down so as to make contact with the contact screw B. Just under the armature, stands the electro-magnet G, which when energised can and does pull down the armature A. It will be readily understood that if we connect the wires from the electro-magnet G, to the wires proceeding from the battery and push (or other form of contact) at the distant station, the electro-magnet, being wound with a large quantity of fine wire, will become sufficiently magnetized to pull the armature down through the small space intervening between C and B; so that if the screws D and E are connected respectively to the free terminals of a[Pg 135] battery and bell coupled together at the nearer station, this second battery will be thrown into circuit with the bell, and cause it to ring as well and as exactly as if the most skilful and most trustworthy assistant were in communication with the distant signaller. Every tap, every release of the contact, (be it push, key, or switch) made at the distant end, will be faithfully reproduced at the nearer end, by the motion of the armature A. For this reason we may use a comparatively weak battery to work the relay, which in its turn brings a more powerful and local battery into play, for doing whatever work is required. In cases where a number of calls are required to be made simultaneously from one centre, as in the case of calling assistance from several fire engine stations at once, a relay is fixed at each station, each connected with its own local battery and bell. The current from the sending station passes direct through all the relays, connecting all the local batteries and bells at the same time. This is perhaps the best way of ringing any number of bells from one push or contact, at a distant point. Ordinary trembling bells, unless fitted with an appropriate contrivance, cannot well be rung if connected up in series. This is owing to the fact that the clappers of the bells do not all break or make contact at the same time, so that intermittent ringing and interruptions take place. With single stroke bells, this is not the case, as the pulling down of the armature does not break the contact.
§ 63. At § 48, we noticed that a device known as a Relay is a convenient, if not essential, way to operate continuous ringing bells. Here, we will focus on its structure and adaptations. Let's say we need to ring a bell from a significant distance, so much so that a single battery can't power the electromagnets of a regular bell enough to produce a clear ring. Clearly, if we could send even a weak signal to someone at the other end of the line to connect another battery to their bell using a key similar to what’s shown at Fig. 65, we would get a strong ring. This second battery, being close to the bell, would provide sufficient current to energize the bell's magnets.[Pg 134] But this would require someone to be constantly present. Now, the relay does this automatically; it relays another battery in the circuit. The way it does this will become clear when we examine Fig. 66. Here, we have an armature A attached to a light spring, which can move between an insulated stop C and a contact screw B. The movement of this armature can be finely adjusted by turning the screws B or C. Both screws are held by a double bent arm (made of metal) attached to the pillar D. This pillar is isolated from the rest of the frame by an insulating collar or washer of ebonite, so no current can pass from E to D unless the armature is pulled down to make contact with the contact screw B. Just below the armature is the electromagnet G, which, when powered, can pull down the armature A. It's easy to see that if we connect the wires from the electromagnet G to the wires from the battery and push (or make any type of contact) at the distant station, the electromagnet, wound with a large amount of fine wire, will become sufficiently magnetized to pull the armature down through the small gap between C and B. Thus, if screws D and E are connected to the free terminals of a battery and bell linked together at the closer station, this second battery will connect with the bell and cause it to ring as effectively as if the most skilled and reliable assistant were in communication with the distant signaller. Every tap and release of the contact (whether it’s a push, key, or switch) made at the distant end will be accurately mirrored at the nearer end by the movement of the armature A. For this reason, we can use a relatively weak battery to operate the relay, which in turn activates a stronger local battery to perform whatever tasks are needed. In situations where multiple calls need to be made simultaneously from one center, like calling for help from several fire stations at once, a relay is installed at each station, each linked to its local battery and bell. The current from the sending station flows directly through all the relays, activating all local batteries and bells at the same time. This is probably the best way to ring multiple bells from one push or contact at a remote location. Regular trembling bells, unless fitted with a suitable mechanism, cannot easily be rung if connected in series. This is because the clappers of the bells do not all make contact at the same time, leading to intermittent ringing and interruptions. With single stroke bells, this isn't an issue since pulling down the armature does not break the contact.
§ 64. We now have to consider those contrivances by means of which it is possible for an attendant to[Pg 136] know when a single bell is actuated by a number of pushes in different rooms, etc., from whence the signal emanates. These contrivances are known as indicators. Indicators may be conveniently divided into 3 classes, viz.:—1st, indicators with mechanical replacements; 2nd, those with electrical replacements; and 3rdly, those which are self replacing. Of the former class we may mention two typical forms, namely, the ordinary "fall back" indicator, and the drop indicator. All indicators depend in their action on the sudden magnetisation of an electro-magnet by the same current that works the electric bell at the time the call is sent. To understand the way in which this may be effected, let the reader turn to the illustration of the Relay (Fig. 66), and let him suppose that the pillar D, with its accompanying rectangle B C, were removed, leaving only the electro-magnet G, with its frame and armature A. If this armature holds up a light tablet or card, on which is marked the number of the room, it is evident that any downward motion of the armature, such as would occur if the electro-magnet were energised by a current passing around it, would let the tablet fall, so as to become visible through a hole cut in the frame containing this contrivance. It is also equally evident that the card or tablet would require replacing by hand, after having once fallen, to render it capable of again notifying a call. Fig. 67 shows the working parts of one of these "drop" indicators, as sent out by Messrs. Binswanger. In another modification, known as Thorpe's "Semaphore Indicator," we have a most[Pg 137] ingenious application of the same principle in a very compact form. In this (Fig. 68), the electro-magnet is placed directly behind a disc-shaped iron armature, on which is painted or marked the number of the room etc. (in this case 4); this armature is attached by a springy shank to the drop bar, shown to the left of the electro-magnet. In front of the armature is a light metal disc, also pivoted on the drop bar. This engages in a catch above, when pushed up so as to cover the number. When pushed up, the spring of the armature retains it in its place so that the number is hidden. When the current passes around the electro-magnet, the armature is pulled toward it, and thus frees the covering disc, which therefore falls, and displays the number. The ordinary form of "fall back" indicator (a misnomer, by the way, since the indicator falls forwards) is well illustrated at Fig 69. Here we have an ordinary electro-magnet A, with its wires w w' standing over an armature B attached to a spring C, which bears on its lower extremity, a toothed projection which serves to hold up the short arm of the bent lever D, which supports the number plate E. When the electro-magnet A is energised by the current, it pulls up the armature B, which releases the detent D from the tooth C; the number plate therefore falls forwards, as[Pg 138] shown by the dotted lines, and shows itself at the aperture E´, which is in front of the indicator frame. To replace the number out of sight, the attendant pushes back the plate E, till it again engages the bent lever D in the tooth C. This replacement of the number plate, which the attendant in charge is obliged to perform, gives rise to confusion, if through carelessness it is not effected at once, as two or more numbers may be left showing at one time. For this reason, indicators which require no extraneous assistance to replace them, are preferred by many. Indicators with electrical replacements meet in part the necessities of the case. This form of indicator consists usually of a permanent bar magnet pivoted near its centre, so that it can hang vertically between the two poles of an electro-magnet placed at its lower extremity. The upper extremity carries the number plate, which shows through the aperture in the frame. This bar magnet is made a trifle heavier at the upper end, so[Pg 139] that it must rest against either the one or other pole of the electro-magnet below. If the north pole of the bar magnet rests against the right hand pole of the electro-magnet when the number does not show, we can cause the bar magnet to cross over to the other pole, and display the number by sending a current through the electro-magnet in such a direction as to make its right hand pole a north pole, and its left hand a south pole. This is because the two north poles will repel each other, while the south will attract the north. On being once tilted over, the bar magnet cannot return to its former position, until the person who used the bell sends a current in the opposite direction (which he can do by means of a reversing switch), when the poles of the electro-magnet being reversed, the bar magnet will be pulled back into its original position. Indicators of this class, owing to the fact that their replacement depends on the polarity of the bar magnet, are also known as "polarised indicators."
§ 64. We now need to look at the devices that allow an attendant to know when a single bell is activated by multiple pushes from different rooms, etc., and where the signal is coming from. These devices are called indicators. Indicators can be conveniently divided into three classes: 1st, indicators with mechanical resets; 2nd, those with electrical resets; and 3rd, those that reset themselves. In the first category, we can mention two typical types: the ordinary "fall back" indicator and the drop indicator. All indicators operate based on the sudden magnetization of an electromagnet by the same current that powers the electric bell when the call is sent. To understand how this works, let the reader refer to the illustration of the Relay (Fig. 66) and imagine that the pillar D and its rectangle B C are removed, leaving only the electromagnet G with its frame and armature A. If this armature holds up a light tablet or card with the room number marked on it, it’s clear that any downward movement of the armature, as would happen if the electromagnet is energized, would cause the tablet to fall and become visible through a hole cut in the frame that holds this device. It’s also clear that the card or tablet would need to be manually replaced after it falls in order to notify a call again. Fig. 67 shows the working parts of one of these "drop" indicators, as supplied by Messrs. Binswanger. In another version, known as Thorpe's "Semaphore Indicator," we have a clever application of the same principle in a compact form. In this (Fig. 68), the electromagnet is placed directly behind a disc-shaped iron armature, which has the room number painted or marked on it (in this case, 4); this armature is attached by a springy shank to the drop bar shown to the left of the electromagnet. In front of the armature is a lightweight metal disc that is also pivoted on the drop bar. This disc catches above when pushed up to cover the number. When pushed up, the spring of the armature keeps it in place so that the number is hidden. When the current flows through the electromagnet, the armature is pulled toward it, freeing the covering disc which falls and reveals the number. The standard "fall back" indicator (a misnomer, by the way, as it actually falls forwards) is illustrated at Fig 69. Here we have an ordinary electromagnet A, with its wires w w' positioned over an armature B attached to a spring C, which has a toothed projection on its lower end that holds up the short arm of the bent lever D, which supports the number plate E. When the electromagnet A is energized by the current, it pulls up the armature B, releasing the detent D from the tooth C; the number plate then falls forward, as shown by the dotted lines, and becomes visible at the opening E' in front of the indicator frame. To put the number back out of sight, the attendant pushes the plate E back until it re-engages the bent lever D in the tooth C. This replacement of the number plate, which the attendant on duty must do, can lead to confusion if it's not done immediately, as two or more numbers might be left visible at the same time. For this reason, many prefer indicators that don’t require external assistance to reset. Indicators with electrical resets partially address this issue. This type of indicator usually consists of a permanent bar magnet pivoted near its center, allowing it to hang vertically between the two poles of an electromagnet located at its lower end. The upper end carries the number plate, which is visible through the opening in the frame. This bar magnet is slightly heavier at the top so that it will rest against one or the other pole of the electromagnet below. If the north pole of the bar magnet is resting against the right hand pole of the electromagnet when the number is not showing, we can make the bar magnet switch to the other pole and display the number by sending a current through the electromagnet to change its right-hand pole to a north pole and its left-hand pole to a south pole. This happens because two north poles will repel each other, while the south pole will attract the north pole. Once tilted, the bar magnet cannot return to its original position until the person who activated the bell sends a current in the opposite direction (which can be done using a reversing switch), at which point the poles of the electromagnet are reversed, pulling the bar magnet back to its original position. Indicators of this type, due to their reliance on the polarity of the bar magnet, are also referred to as "polarized indicators."
§ 65. For general efficiency and trustworthiness, the pendulum indicator; as shown at Fig. 70, is unsurpassed. It consists of an electro-magnet with prolongation[Pg 140] at the free end on which is delicately pivoted a soft iron armature. From the centre of this armature hangs, pendulum fashion, a light brass rod carrying a vane of fluted silver glass, or a card with a number on it, as may be found most convenient. This vane or card hangs just before the aperture in the indicator frame. Stops are usually placed on each side of the pendulum rod to limit the swing. When the electro-magnet is magnetised by the passage of the current, the armature is pulled suddenly on one side, and then the pendulum swings backwards and forwards in front of the aperture for some minutes before it comes to rest. When fitted with silver fluted glass, the motion of the vane is clearly visible even in badly lighted places. As the pendulum, after performing several oscillations, comes to rest by itself in front of the aperture, this indicator requires no setting. Messrs. Binswanger fit these indicators with double core magnets, and have a patented adjustment for regulating the duration of the swings of the pendulum, which may be made to swing for two or three minutes when the circuit is completed by pressing the push; it then returns to its normal position, thus saving the servant the trouble of replacing the "drop."
§ 65. For overall efficiency and reliability, the pendulum indicator; as shown at Fig. 70, is unmatched. It features an electromagnet with an extension at the free end where a soft iron armature is gently pivoted. From the center of this armature hangs a lightweight brass rod that swings like a pendulum, carrying either a vane made of fluted silver glass or a numbered card, depending on what is most convenient. This vane or card hangs right in front of the opening in the indicator frame. Stops are usually placed on each side of the pendulum rod to restrict its swing. When the electromagnet is activated by the current flow, the armature is quickly pulled to one side, causing the pendulum to swing back and forth in front of the opening for several minutes before it stops. When fitted with silver fluted glass, the movement of the vane is easily visible even in poorly lit areas. As the pendulum, after making several swings, naturally comes to a stop in front of the opening, this indicator requires no manual adjustment. Messrs. Binswanger equip these indicators with double core magnets and have a patented feature for adjusting the duration of the pendulum swings, allowing it to swing for two or three minutes when the circuit is completed by pressing the button; it then returns to its original position, saving the user the hassle of replacing the "drop."
Messrs. Gent, of Leicester, have also patented a device in connection with this form of indicator, which we give in the patentee's own words:—"The objection so[Pg 141] frequently urged against the use of Electric Bells, that the servants cannot be depended upon to perform the operation of replacing the signals, cannot any longer apply, for the pendulum signals require no attention whatever. It consists of an electro-magnet having forks standing up in which V openings are made. An armature of soft iron, with a piece of thin steel projecting at each end lies suspended at the bottom of the V opening, a brass stem carrying the signal card is screwed into the armature, the action being, that when a current is allowed to pass through the electro-magnet the armature with the pendulum is drawn towards it and held there until the current ceases to pass, when it instantly looses its hold of the armature, which swings away and continues to oscillate for two or three minutes, so that if the servant happens to be out of the way, it may be seen on her return which pendulum has been set in motion. The Pendulum Indicator we have recently patented is entirely self-contained. The magnet has its projecting poles riveted into the brass base which carries the flag. The flag is constructed as Fig. 70, but swings in closed bearings, which prevents its jerking out of its place, and enables us to send it out in position ready for use. It will be seen this patented improvement makes all screws and plates as formerly used for securing the parts unnecessary. It will be seen at once that this is simplicity itself, and has nothing about it which may by any possibility be put out of order, either by warping or shrinking of the case or carelessness of attendants."
Messrs. Gent, from Leicester, have also patented a device related to this type of indicator, which we present in the inventor's own words:—"The common complaint against Electric Bells, that you can't rely on servants to reset the signals, is no longer valid, because the pendulum signals require no attention at all. It consists of an electro-magnet with forks that have V-shaped openings. An armature made of soft iron, with a piece of thin steel sticking out at each end, hangs at the bottom of the V opening. A brass stem attached to the signal card is screwed into the armature. When an electric current flows through the magnet, the armature with the pendulum is pulled towards it and stays there until the current stops. When the current ceases, it instantly releases the armature, which swings away and continues to oscillate for two to three minutes, so if the servant happens to be away, they can see which pendulum was activated when they return. The Pendulum Indicator we recently patented is entirely self-contained. The magnet has its poles riveted into the brass base that holds the flag. The flag is made as Fig. 70, but swings in sealed bearings, which keeps it stable and allows us to send it out ready for use. This patented improvement makes all screws and plates previously used to secure the parts unnecessary. It's clear that this is simplicity itself, with nothing that could possibly go wrong due to warping or shrinking of the case or carelessness of the attendants."
There is only one point that needs further notice[Pg 142] with regard to these pendulum indicators, and that is, that since the rapid break and make contact of the ringing bell interferes somewhat with the proper action of the indicator magnet, it is always advisable to work the indicator by means of a relay (fixed in the same frame) and a local battery. This is shown in Fig. 71, where a second pair of wires attached to C and C, to the extreme right of the indicator frame, are brought from the same battery to work the indicator and contained relay. It is not advisable, however, with the pendulum indicator, to use the same battery for the indicator; the relay should throw a local battery into the indicator circuit. In Fig. 71 six pushes are shown to the left of the indicator frame. These, of course, are supposed to be in as many different rooms.[Pg 143]
There’s just one thing that needs more attention[Pg 142] regarding these pendulum indicators, and that is, since the quick breaking and making contact of the ringing bell disrupts the proper function of the indicator magnet, it’s always best to operate the indicator using a relay (located in the same frame) and a local battery. This is illustrated in Fig. 71, where a second pair of wires connected to C and C, on the far right of the indicator frame, leads from the same battery to power the indicator and the contained relay. However, it’s not recommended to use the same battery for the pendulum indicator; the relay should switch a local battery into the indicator circuit. In Fig. 71, six buttons are depicted to the left of the indicator frame. These are expected to be in different rooms.[Pg 143]
We close this chapter with an engraving of a very compact and neat form of drop indicator devised by Messrs. Gent, and called by them a "Tripolar Indicator." It consists, as the name implies, of a single magnet, having one end of the iron core as one pole, the other end extending on each side like a V, forming, as it were, three poles. Though but one bobbin is used, the effect is very powerful. There are no springs or other complications, so that the arrangement is adapted for ship use, as are also those represented at Figs. 67 and 68. Pendulum and fall-back indicators, as well as polarised indicators, owing to the delicacy of the adjustments, are unfitted for use on board ship, or in the cabs of lifts, where the sudden jolts and jerks are sure to move the indicators, and falsify the indications. The tripolar indicator is illustrated at Fig. 72.
We end this chapter with a detailed illustration of a very compact and well-designed drop indicator created by Messrs. Gent, which they refer to as a "Tripolar Indicator." As the name suggests, it features a single magnet, with one end of the iron core functioning as one pole, while the other end extends on each side like a V, effectively creating three poles. Although it only uses one bobbin, its effect is quite powerful. There are no springs or other complexities, making it suitable for use on ships, just like those shown in Figs. 67 and 68. Pendulum and fall-back indicators, along with polarized indicators, are not suitable for use on ships or in lift cabs due to their sensitive adjustments, which can easily be disturbed by sudden jolts and jerks, leading to incorrect readings. The tripolar indicator is depicted at Fig. 72.
CHAPTER V.
ON WIRING, CONNECTING UP, AND LOCALISING FAULTS.
§ 66. However good may be the bells, indicators, batteries, etc., used in an electric bell installation, if the wiring be in any wise faulty, the system will surely be continually breaking down, and giving rise to dissatisfaction. It is therefore of the highest importance that the workman, if he value his good name, should pay the greatest attention to ensure that this part of his work be well and thoroughly done. This is all the more necessary, since while the bells, batteries, relays, pushes, etc., are easily got at for examination and repair, the wires, when once laid, are not so easily examined, and it entails a great deal of trouble to pull up floor boards, to remove skirtings etc., in order to be able to overhaul and replace defective wires or joints. The first consideration of course, is the kind and size of wire fitted to carry the current for indoor and outdoor work. Now this must evidently depend on three points. 1st, The amount of current (in ampères) required to ring the bell. 2nd, The battery power it is intended to employ. 3rd, The distance to which the lines are to be carried. From[Pg 145] practical experience I have found that it is just possible to ring a 2½" bell with ½ an ampère of current. Let us consider what this would allow us to use, in the way of batteries and wire, to ring such a bell. The electro-motive force of a single Leclanchè cell is, as we have seen at § 38, about 1·6 volt, and the internal resistance of the quart size, about 1·1 ohm. No. 20 gauge copper wire has a resistance of about 1·2 ohm to the pound, and in a pound (of the cotton covered wire) there are about 60 yards. Supposing we were to use 60 yards of this wire, we should have a wire resistance of 1·2 ohm, an internal resistance of 1·1 ohm, and a bell resistance of about 0·1 of an ohm, altogether about 2·4 ohms. Since the E.M.F. of the cell is 1·6 volt, we must divide this by the total resistance to get the amount of current passing. That is to say:—
§ 66. No matter how good the bells, indicators, batteries, etc., are in an electric bell setup, if the wiring has any faults, the system will consistently break down, leading to dissatisfaction. It’s crucial for the technician, if they care about their reputation, to pay close attention to make sure this part of their work is done well and thoroughly. This is even more important because, while the bells, batteries, relays, buttons, etc., are easy to access for inspection and repair, the wires, once laid down, are much harder to check. It can be quite a hassle to lift floorboards or remove skirting boards just to inspect or replace faulty wires or connections. The first thing to consider is the type and gauge of wire needed for both indoor and outdoor work. This clearly depends on three factors: 1st, the amount of current (in amperes) necessary to ring the bell. 2nd, the battery power intended for use. 3rd, the distance the lines will cover. From practical experience, I've found that it's possible to ring a 2½" bell with ½ an ampere of current. Let’s look at what this allows us to use for the batteries and wire to ring such a bell. The electromotive force of a single Leclanché cell is, as we’ve seen at § 38, about 1.6 volts, and the internal resistance of the quart size is about 1.1 ohms. No. 20 gauge copper wire has a resistance of about 1.2 ohms per pound, and a pound of the cotton-covered wire contains about 60 yards. If we were to use 60 yards of this wire, we would have a wire resistance of 1.2 ohms, an internal resistance of 1.1 ohms, and a bell resistance of about 0.1 ohms, totaling about 2.4 ohms. Since the E.M.F. of the cell is 1.6 volts, we need to divide this by the total resistance to find out the amount of current flowing. That is to say:—
Ohms. | Volts. | Ampères. |
2·4) | 1·60 | (0·66, |
or about 2/3 of an ampère; just a little over what is absolutely necessary to ring the bell. Now this would allow nothing for the deterioration in the battery, and the increased resistance in the pushes, joints, etc. We may safely say, therefore, that no copper wire, of less diameter than No. 18 gauge (48/1000 of an inch diameter) should be used in wiring up house bells, except only in very short circuits of two or three yards, with one single bell in circuit; and as the difference in price between No. 18 and No. 20 is very[Pg 146] trifling, I should strongly recommend the bell-fitter to adhere to No. 18, as his smallest standard size. It would also be well to so proportion the size and arrangement of the batteries and wires, that, at the time of setting up, a current of at least one ampère should flow through the entire circuit. This will allow margin for the weakening of the battery, which takes place after it has been for some months in use. As a guide as to what resistance a given length of copper wire introduces into any circuit in which it may be employed, I subjoin the following table of the Birmingham wire gauge, diameter in 1,000ths of an inch, yards per lb., and resistance in ohms per lb. or 100 yards, of the wires which the fitter is likely to be called upon to employ:—
or about 2/3 of an amp; just slightly more than what is absolutely needed to ring the bell. Now, this wouldn't account for any deterioration in the battery or the increased resistance in the pushes, joints, etc. So, we can safely say that no copper wire smaller than No. 18 gauge (48/1000 of an inch diameter) should be used for wiring house bells, except maybe in very short circuits of two or three yards with a single bell in the circuit. Also, since the price difference between No. 18 and No. 20 is minimal, I strongly recommend that the bell installer stick to No. 18 as the smallest standard size. It would also be wise to size and arrange the batteries and wires so that, at the time of setup, at least one amp should flow through the entire circuit. This will account for the battery's weakening that happens after it's been in use for a few months. As a reference for the resistance a given length of copper wire adds to any circuit, I've included the following table of the Birmingham wire gauge, showing diameter in thousandths of an inch, yards per pound, and resistance in ohms per pound or 100 yards for the wires that the installer is likely to use:—
Table of Resistance and lengths per lbs. & 100 yards of cotton covered copper wires.
Table of Resistance and lengths per lbs. & 100 yards of cotton covered copper wires.
Birmingham Wire Gauge. | Diameter in 1000th of an inch. | Yards per lb. | Ohms. per lb. | Ohms. per 100 yards. |
---|---|---|---|---|
No. 12 | 100 | 9 | 0·0342 | 0·0038 |
14 | 80 | 15 | 0·0850 | 0·0094 |
16 | 62 | 24 | 0·2239 | 0·0249 |
18 | 48 | 41 | 0·6900 | 0·0766 |
20 | 41 | 59 | 1·2100 | 0·1333 |
22 | 32 | 109 | 3·1000 | 0·3444 |
§ 67. Whatever gauge wire be selected, it must be carefully insulated, to avoid all chance contact with nails, staples, metal pipes or other wires. The best insulation for wires employed indoors is gutta-percha, surrounded with a coating of cotton wound over it, except only in cases when the atmosphere is excessively dry. In these,[Pg 147] as the gutta-percha is apt to crack, india-rubber as the inner coating is preferable. If No. 18 wire be used, the thickness of the entire insulating coating should be thick enough to bring it up to No. 10 gauge, say a little over 1/10th inch in diameter. There is one point that will be found very important in practice, and that is to have the cotton covering on the wires leading to the bells of a different colour from that on the return wires; in other words, the wires starting from the zinc poles of the battery to the bells, indicators, relays, etc., should be of a different colour from that leading from the carbon poles to the bells, etc. Attention to this apparently trifling matter, will save an infinite amount of trouble in connecting up, repairing, or adding on fresh branch circuits. For outdoor work, wire of the same gauge (No. 18) may generally be used, but it must be covered to the thickness of 1/10" with pure gutta-percha, and over this must be wound tape served with Stockholm tar. Wires of this description, either with or without the tarred tape covering, may be obtained from all the leading electricians' sundriesmen. Many firms use copper wire tinned previous to being insulated. This tinning serves two good purposes, 1st, the copper wire does not verdigris so easily; 2ndly, it is more easily soldered. On the other hand, a tinned wire is always a little harder, and presents a little higher resistance. Whenever wires are to be joined together, the ends to be joined must be carefully divested of their covering for a length of about three inches, the copper carefully cleaned by scraping and sand-papering, twisted tightly[Pg 148] and evenly together, as shown in Fig. 73 A, and soldered with ordinary soft solder (without spirits), and a little resin or composite candle as a flux. A heavy plumber's soldering iron, or even a tinman's bit, is not well adapted for this purpose, and the blowpipe is even worse, as the great heat melts and spoils the gutta-percha covering. The best form of bit, is one made out of a stout piece of round copper wire ¼" thick with a nick filed in its upper surface for the wire to lie in (see Fig. 73 B). This may be fastened into a wooden handle, and when required heated over the flame of a spirit lamp. When the soldering has been neatly effected, the waste ends a and b of the wire should be cut off flush. The wire must then be carefully covered with warm Prout's elastic or softened gutta-percha, heated and kneaded round the wire with the fingers (moistened so as not to stick) until the joint is of the same size as the rest of the covered wire. As a further precaution, the joints should be wrapped with a layer of tarred tape. Let me strongly dissuade[Pg 149] the fitter from ever being contented with a simply twisted joint. Although this may and does act while the surfaces are still clean, yet the copper soon oxidises, and a poor non-conducting joint is the final result.
§ 67. No matter what gauge wire you choose, it must be properly insulated to prevent any chance of contact with nails, staples, metal pipes, or other wires. The best insulation for indoor wires is gutta-percha, covered with a layer of cotton wrapped around it, except in very dry conditions. In these cases, since gutta-percha can crack, it's better to use rubber as the inner coating. If you are using No. 18 wire, the total thickness of the insulating coating should make it equivalent to No. 10 gauge, which is just over 1/10th inch in diameter. One important point in practice is to ensure that the cotton covering on the wires leading to the bells is a different color from that on the return wires. In other words, the wires going from the zinc poles of the battery to the bells, indicators, relays, etc., should be a different color than those coming from the carbon poles to the bells, etc. Paying attention to this seemingly minor detail can save a lot of trouble when connecting, repairing, or adding new branch circuits. For outdoor work, generally, you can use wire of the same gauge (No. 18), but it must be covered to a thickness of 1/10" with pure gutta-percha, and over that, tape treated with Stockholm tar must be wrapped. Wires of this type, whether with or without the tarred tape, are available from all major electrical supply vendors. Many companies use copper wire that has been tinned before insulation. This tinning has two benefits: firstly, it prevents the copper wire from tarnishing as easily; secondly, it makes soldering easier. However, tinned wire is always slightly harder and has a bit more resistance. When joining wires, the ends to be connected must be stripped of insulation for about three inches, the copper cleaned by scraping and sanding, tightly twisted together as shown in Fig. 73 A, and soldered with ordinary soft solder (without spirits) and a little resin or composite candle as a flux. A heavy plumbing soldering iron, or even a tinman's bit, is not ideal for this job, and using a blowpipe is even worse since the intense heat can melt and damage the gutta-percha insulation. The best tool is a bit made from a thick piece of round copper wire ¼" thick with a notch filed in its upper surface for the wire to sit in (see Fig. 73 B). This can be attached to a wooden handle and heated over the flame of a spirit lamp when needed. Once the soldering is done neatly, the excess ends a and b of the wire should be cut off flush. Then, the wire must be carefully covered with warm Prout's elastic or softened gutta-percha, which is heated and kneaded around the wire with fingers (moistened to prevent sticking) until the joint matches the size of the rest of the covered wire. As an extra precaution, the joints should be wrapped with a layer of tarred tape. I strongly advise the installer not to settle for a simply twisted joint. While this might work while the surfaces are clean, the copper will quickly oxidize, leading to a poor non-conducting joint in the end.
"That'll do" will not do for electric bell-fitting.
"That'll do" is not acceptable for installing an electric bell.
§ 68. Whenever possible, the wiring of a house, etc., for bell work, should be done as soon as the walls are up and the roof is on. The shortest and straightest convenient route from bell to battery, etc., should always be chosen where practicable to facilitate drawing the wire through and to avoid the loss of current which the resistance of long lengths of wire inevitably entails. The wires should be run in light zinc tubes nailed to the wall.
§ 68. Whenever possible, the wiring for bells in a house should be done as soon as the walls are up and the roof is on. The shortest and straightest route from the bell to the battery should always be chosen when practical to make it easier to pull the wire through and to minimize the loss of current that comes with long lengths of wire. The wires should be run in light zinc tubes attached to the wall.
In joining up several lengths of tubing, the end of one piece of tube should be opened out considerably of a trumpet shape for the other piece to slip in; and the end of this latter should also be slightly opened out, so as not to catch in the covering of any wire drawn through it. The greatest care must be exercised in drawing the wires through the tubes or otherwise, that the covering be not abraded, or else leakage at this point may take place. In cases where tubes already exist, as in replacing old crank bells by the electric bells, the new wires can be drawn through the tubes, by tying the ends of the new wire to the old wire, and carefully pulling this out, when it brings the new wire with it. Or if the tubes are already empty, some straight stout wire may be run through the tubes, to which the new[Pg 150] wires may be attached, and then drawn through, using, of course, every possible precaution to avoid the abrasion of the insulating covering of the wire, which would surely entail leakage and loss of current. All the old fittings, cranks, levers, etc., must be removed, and the holes left, carefully filled with dowels or plaster. In those cases where it is quite impossible to lay the wires in zinc or wooden tubes (as in putting up wires in furnished rooms already papered, etc.), the wires may be run along the walls, and suspended by staples driven in the least noticeable places; but in no case should the two wires (go and return) lie under the same staple, for fear of a short circuit. It must be borne in mind that each complete circuit will require at least two wires, viz., the one leading from the battery to the bell, and the other back from the bell to the battery; and these until connection is made between them by means of the "contact" (pull, push, or key) must be perfectly insulated from each other. In these cases, as far as possible, the wires should be laid in slots cut in the joists under the floor boards, or, better still, as tending to weaken the joists less, small holes may be bored in the joists and the wires passed through them; or again, the wires may be led along the skirting board, along the side of the doorpost, etc., and when the sight of the wires is objectionable, covered with a light ornamental wood casing. When the wires have been laid and the position of the "pushes," etc., decided upon, the blocks to which these are to be fastened must be bedded in the plaster. These blocks may be either square or circular[Pg 151] pieces of elm, about 3 inches across, and 1 inch thick, bevelled off smaller above, so as to be easily and firmly set in the plaster. They may be fastened to the brickwork by two or three brads, at such a height to lie level with the finished plaster. There must of course be a hole in the centre of the block, through which the wires can pass to the push. When the block has been fixed in place, the zinc tube, if it does not come quite up to the block, should have its orifice stopped with a little paper, to prevent any plaster, etc., getting into the tube. A little care in setting the block will avoid the necessity of this makeshift. A long nail or screw driven into the block will serve to mark its place, and save time in hunting for it after the plastering has been done. When the blocks have been put in their places, and the plastering, papering, etc., done, the wires are drawn through the bottom hole of the push (after the lid or cover has been taken off), Fig. 74, and a very small piece of the covering of the wire having been removed from each wire, and brightened by sand papering, one piece is passed round the shank of the screw connected with the lower spring, shown to the right in Fig. 74, and the other round the shank of the screw connected to the upper spring, shown to the left in the Fig. The screws must be loosened to enable the operator to pass the wire under their heads. The screws must then be tightened up to clench the wire quite firmly. In doing this, we must guard against three[Pg 152] things. Firstly, in pulling the wire through the block, not to pull so tightly as to cut the covering against the edge of the zinc tube. Secondly, not to uncover too much of the wire, so as to make contact between the wires themselves either at the back of the push, or at any other part of the push itself. Thirdly, to secure good contact under the screws, by having the ends of the wires quite clean, and tightly screwed down.
When connecting several lengths of tubing, one end of a tube should be flared out significantly, like a trumpet, to allow the other piece to slide in easily. The end of that piece should also be slightly opened up to avoid snagging on the insulation of any wire passing through. It's crucial to take great care when pulling the wires through the tubes or any other means to ensure the insulation isn't damaged, as this could cause leaks. In instances where tubes already exist, such as replacing old crank bells with electric bells, you can pull the new wires through the tubes by tying the ends of the new wires to the old wires and carefully pulling them out, which will bring the new wires along. If the tubes are empty, you can use a sturdy straight wire to run through the tubes, attaching the new wires to it and pulling them through while taking all possible precautions to avoid damaging the insulation, which would lead to leaking and loss of current. All old fittings, cranks, levers, etc., should be removed, and the resulting holes should be carefully filled with dowels or plaster. If it's not feasible to run the wires in zinc or wooden tubes (for example, in furnished rooms that have already been wallpapered), the wires can be run along the walls and secured with staples in the least noticeable areas. However, the two wires (supply and return) should never lie under the same staple to prevent short circuits. Remember that each complete circuit requires at least two wires: one going from the battery to the bell and the other returning from the bell to the battery. Until they are connected through the "contact" (pull, push, or key), they must be well insulated from each other. Whenever possible, the wires should be laid in notches cut into the joists beneath the floorboards; if that's not ideal, small holes can be bored into the joists for the wires to pass through. Alternatively, the wires can be run along the skirting boards or door frames, and if their visibility is an issue, they can be covered with a light decorative wooden casing. After laying the wires and deciding where to place the "pushes," the blocks to which these will be fastened should be set into the plaster. These blocks can be square or circular pieces of elm, about 3 inches wide and 1 inch thick, tapered down at the top for easy and firm setting in plaster. They should be secured to the brickwork with two or three brads, positioned at a height that aligns with the finished plaster. Each block needs a hole in the center for the wires to pass through to the push. Once the block is fixed in place, if the zinc tube doesn't reach the block, its opening should be sealed with a small piece of paper to keep any plaster or debris from getting inside. Being careful when positioning the block will prevent the need for this workaround. A long nail or screw driven into the block can help mark its location, saving time when locating it after the plastering is finished. Once the blocks have been installed and the plaster and wallpaper applied, the wires are pulled through the bottom hole of the push (after removing the lid or cover), and after stripping a small section of insulation from each wire and cleaning them with sandpaper, one wire is wrapped around the screw connected to the lower spring, shown to the right in the illustration, and the other around the screw connected to the upper spring, shown to the left. The screws need to be loosened to allow the wires to be looped under their heads. After that, the screws must be tightened securely to hold the wires in place. In this process, we need to be cautious about three things. First, while pulling the wire through the block, be careful not to pull so hard that it damages the insulation against the edge of the zinc tube. Second, avoid stripping too much insulation from the wire, which could lead to contact between the wires behind the push or at any other point on the push itself. Third, ensure a good connection under the screws by keeping the ends of the wires clean and securely tightened.
§ 69. In all cases where the wires have to be taken out of doors, such as is necessitated by communication from house to outhouses, stables, greenhouses, etc., over head lines (No. 18 gauge, gutta-percha tape and tar covering) should be used. Where overhead lines are not admissible, either as being eyesores, or otherwise, the wires may be laid in square wooden casings of this section ┗━┛, the open part of which must be covered by a strip of wood laid over it. The wood must have been previously creosoted, in the same manner as railway sleepers. This mode admits of easy examination. Iron pipes must, however, be used if the lines have to pass under roads, etc., where there is any heavy traffic. And it must be borne in mind that however carefully the iron pipes, etc., be cemented at the joints, to make them watertight, there will always be more electrical leakage in underground lines than in overhead ones. In certain rare cases it may be needful to use iron wires for this purpose instead of copper; in this case, as iron is six or seven times a worse conductor than copper, a much heavier wire must be employed to get the same effect. In other[Pg 153] words, where iron wire is used, its section must be not less than seven times that of the copper wire which it replaces.
§ 69. In all situations where wires need to be run outside, such as for communication between the main house and outbuildings, stables, greenhouses, etc., overhead lines (No. 18 gauge, covered with gutta-percha and tar) should be used. If overhead lines are not an option due to aesthetics or other reasons, the wires can be placed in square wooden casings from this section ┗━┛, with the open side covered by a wooden strip placed on top. The wood must be treated with creosote, similar to railway sleepers. This approach allows for easy inspection. However, iron pipes must be used if the lines go under roads or areas with heavy traffic. Keep in mind that, no matter how carefully the iron pipes are sealed at the joints to prevent leaks, there will always be more electrical leakage in underground lines compared to overhead ones. In rare cases, it may be necessary to use iron wires instead of copper; in this situation, since iron is six or seven times less conductive than copper, a much thicker wire must be used to achieve the same result. In other[Pg 153] words, when using iron wire, its diameter must be at least seven times larger than the copper wire it replaces.
§ 70. It is always preferable, where great distance (and, consequently, greater expense) do not preclude it, to use wire for the leading as well as for the returning circuit. Still, where for any reason this is not practicable, it is perfectly admissible and possible to make a good return circuit through the earth, that is to make the damp soil carry the return current (see § 37). As recommended at the section just quoted, this earth circuit must have at each extremity a mass of some good conductor plunged into the moist ground. In towns, where there are plenty of water mains and gas mains, this is a matter of no difficulty, the only point being to ensure good contact with these masses of metal. In other places a hole must be dug into the ground until the point of constant moisture is reached; in this must be placed a sheet of lead or copper, not less than five square feet surface, to which the earth wires are soldered, the hole then filled in with ordinary coke, well rammed down to within about six inches of the surface, and then covered up with soil well trodden down. In making contact with water or gas pipes, care must be taken to see that these are main pipes, so that they do lead to earth, and not to a cistern or meter only, as, if there are any white or red lead joints the circuit will be defective. To secure a good contact with an iron pipe, bare it, file its surface clean, rub it over with a bit of blue stone (sulphate of copper) dipped in water; wipe it quite[Pg 154] dry, bind it tightly and evenly round with some bare copper wire (also well cleaned), No. 16 gauge. Bring the two ends of the wire together, and twist them up tightly for a length of three or four inches. Now heat a large soldering bit, put some resin on the copper wire, and solder the wire, binding firmly down to the iron pipe. Do likewise to the projecting twist of wire, and to this twist solder the end of the return wire. On no account should the two opposite earth wires be soldered to water mains and gas mains at the same time, since it has been found that the different conditions in which these pipes find themselves is sufficient to set up a current which might seriously interfere with the working of the battery proper. Sometimes there is no means of getting a good earth except through the gas main: in this case we must be careful to get to the street side of the meter, for the red lead joints will prevent good conductivity being obtained. In out of the way country places, if it is possible to get at the metal pipe leading to the well of a pump, a very good "earth" can be obtained by soldering the wires to that pipe, in the same manner as directed in the case of the water main. The operator should in no case be contented with a merely twisted joint, for the mere contact of the two metals (copper and iron) sets up in the moist earth or air a little electric circuit of its own, and this speedily rusts through and destroys the wires. The following suggestions, by Messrs. Gent, on the subject of wiring, are so good, that we feel that we shall be doing real service to the reader to quote them here in full:[Pg 155]—
§ 70. Whenever possible, and when distance (and thus higher costs) don't make it impractical, it's better to use wires for both the outgoing and return circuits. However, if that's not feasible, it's completely acceptable and possible to create a good return circuit through the earth, which means using moist soil to carry the return current (see § 37). As advised in the previous section, this earth circuit needs to have some good conductor placed in wet ground at both ends. In towns, where there are many water and gas pipes, this is straightforward; the only thing to ensure is good connections with these metal masses. In other areas, you need to dig a hole until you reach a consistent moisture level; place a sheet of lead or copper, at least five square feet in size, in the hole and solder the earth wires to it. Then, fill the hole with regular coke, compacting it down to about six inches below the surface, and cover it with well-packed soil. When connecting to water or gas pipes, make sure they are main pipes, leading to the earth and not just to a cistern or meter, as white or red lead joints will create a faulty circuit. To ensure a solid connection with an iron pipe, strip it down, file the surface clean, rub it with a piece of blue stone (copper sulfate) dipped in water; dry it completely, wrap it tightly and evenly with clean bare copper wire (No. 16 gauge). Connect the ends of the wire, twisting them tightly for three or four inches. Heat a large soldering iron, apply some resin to the copper wire, and solder it down firmly to the iron pipe. Do the same with the twisted wire, and then solder the end of the return wire to this twist. Under no circumstances should the two opposite earth wires be connected to both water mains and gas mains at the same time, as the differing conditions of these pipes can create a current that may disrupt the battery's function. Sometimes, the only good earth available is through the gas main: in such cases, ensure you're on the street side of the meter to avoid red lead joints, which will impede conductivity. In rural areas, if you can access the metal pipe that connects to a pump well, soldering the wires to that pipe can provide an excellent "earth," just as with the water main. The operator should never settle for just a twisted joint, as the simple contact of copper and iron creates a small electric circuit in the moist soil or air, which quickly rusts and damages the wires. The following suggestions from Messrs. Gent regarding wiring are so valuable that we believe it's important to present them here in full:[Pg 155]—
"1st.—The description of wire to be used. It is of the utmost importance that all wires used for electric bell purposes be of pure copper and thoroughly well insulated. The materials mostly employed for insulating purposes are indiarubber, gutta-percha, or cotton saturated with paraffin. For ordinary indoor work, in dry places, and for connecting doors and windows with burglar alarms, or for signalling in case of fire, indiarubber and cotton covered wires answer well; but for connecting long distances, part or all underground, or along walls, or in damp cellars or buildings, gutta-percha covered wire is required, but it should be fixed where it will not be exposed to heat or the sun, or in very dry places, as the covering so exposed will perish, crack, and in time fall off. This may be, to some extent, prevented by its being covered with cotton; but we recommend for warm or exposed positions a specially-prepared wire, in which rubber and compound form the insulating materials, the outside being braided or taped.
1st.—Description of the wire to be used. It’s extremely important that all wires used for electric bell purposes are made of pure copper and are thoroughly insulated. The materials commonly used for insulation are rubber, gutta-percha, or cotton soaked in paraffin. For regular indoor use, in dry areas, and for connecting doors and windows to burglar alarms or signaling in case of fire, rubber and cotton-covered wires work well; however, for long-distance connections, especially those that are partly or completely underground, or along walls, or in damp basements or buildings, gutta-percha covered wire is necessary. It should be installed where it won’t be exposed to heat, sunlight, or very dry places since the insulation can degrade, crack, and eventually fall off. This can be somewhat mitigated by covering it with cotton; however, we recommend a specially-prepared wire for warm or exposed locations, where rubber and a compound are used as insulating materials, with a braided or taped outer layer.
"For ordinary house work, we refer to lay a wire of No. 18 or 20 copper, covered to No. 14 or 11 with gutta-percha, and an outer covering of cotton, which we called the 'battery' wire, this being the wire which conveys the current from the battery to every push, etc., no matter how many or in what position. The reason for selecting this kind is, that with the gutta-percha wires the joints may be more perfectly covered and made secure against damp. This is of the utmost importance in the case of 'battery wires,' as the current is always[Pg 156] present and ready to take advantage of any defect in the insulation to escape to an adjoining wire, or to 'earth,' and so cause a continuous waste of current. The wires leading from the pushes to the signalling apparatus or bell we call the 'line' wires. In these, and the rest of the house wires, the perfect covering of the joints is important. For line wires we usually prefer No. 18 or 20 copper, covered with indiarubber, and an outer coating of cotton, well varnished. In joining the 'battery wires,' the place where the junction is to be made must be carefully uncovered for the distance of about an inch; the ends of the wire to be joined, well cleaned, and tightly twisted together; with the flame of a spirit lamp or candle the joint must be then heated sufficiently to melt fine solder in strips when held upon it, having first put a little powdered resin on the joint as a flux; the solder should be seen to run well and adhere firmly to the copper wire. A piece of gutta-percha should then be taken and placed upon the joint while warm, and with the aid of the spirit lamp and wet fingers, moulded round until a firm and perfect covering has been formed. On no account use spirits in soldering. With the line wire, it is best, as far as possible, to convey it all the way from the push to the signal box or bell in one continuous length. Of course, when two or more pushes are required to the same wire, a junction is unavoidable. The same process of joining and covering, as given for the battery wire, applies to the line wire. Where many wires are to be brought down to one position, a large tube may be buried in the wall, or a wood[Pg 157] casing fixed flush with the plaster, with a removable front. The latter plan is easiest for fixing and for making alterations and additions. For stapling the wires, in no case should the wires be left naked. When they pass along a damp wall, it is best to fix a board and loosely staple them. In no case allow more than one wire to lie under the same staple, and do not let the staples touch one another. In many cases, electric bells have been an incessant annoyance and complete failure, through driving the staples tight up to the wires, and several wires to the same staple,—this must not be done on any account. A number of wires may be twisted into a cable, and run through a short piece of gutta-percha tube, and fastened with ordinary gas hooks where it is an advantage to do so. In running the wires, avoid hot water pipes, and do not take them along the same way as plumber pipes. Underground wires must be laid between pieces of wood, or in a gas or drain pipe, and not exposed in the bare earth without protection, as sharp pieces of stone are apt to penetrate the covering and cause a loss; in fact, in this, as in every part of fixing wires, the best wire and the best protection is by far the cheapest in the end. The copper wire in this case should not be less than No. 16 B.W.G., covered with gutta-percha, to No. 9 or 10 B.W.G., and preferably an outer covering of tape or braid well tarred. Outside wire, when run along walls and exposed to the weather, should be covered with rubber and compound, and varnished or tarred on an outer covering of tape or braid. Hooks or staples must be well galvanised to prevent[Pg 158] rusting, and fixed loosely. If the wire is contained within an iron pipe, a lighter insulation may be used: but the pipe must be watertight. In a new building, wires must be contained within zinc or copper bell tubes. A ⅜ inch tube will hold two wires comfortably. The tubes should be fixed to terminate in the same positions in the rooms as ordinary crank bell levers,—that is, about three feet from the floor. At the side of the fireplace a block of wood should be fixed in the wall before any plaster is put on, and the end of the tube should terminate in the centre of the same. A large nail or screw may be put in to mark the place, so that the end of the tube may be found easily when the plastering is finished. Bend the tube slightly forward at the end, and insert a short peg of wood to prevent dirt getting into the tube. Do the same at the side of, or over the bed in bedroom. If the tubes are kept clean, the wires may be easily drawn up or down as the case may require. The best way is to get a length of ordinary copper bell wire, No. 16, sufficient to pass through the tube, and having stretched it, pass it through and out at the other end. Here have your coils of insulated wire, viz., one battery wire, which is branched off to every push, and one line wire, which has to go direct to the indicator or bells, and having removed a short portion of the insulation from the end of each, they are tied to the bare copper wire and drawn through. This is repeated wherever a push is to be fixed throughout the building. In making connection with binding screws or metal of any kind, it is of the utmost importance that everything should be perfectly clean[Pg 159]. Joints in wire, whether tinned or untinned, must be soldered and covered. We cannot impress this too earnestly on fixers. Never bury wires in plaster unprotected, and in houses in course of erection, the tubes only should be fixed until the plastering is finished, the wires to be run in at the same time that the other work is completed."
"For regular household wiring, we use No. 18 or 20 copper wire, insulated to No. 14 or 11 thickness with gutta-percha, and an outer layer of cotton, which we refer to as the 'battery' wire. This wire carries the current from the battery to each button or switch, regardless of how many there are or their arrangement. We choose this type because gutta-percha covers the joints better, making them more secure against moisture. This is crucial for 'battery wires' since the current is always active and can escape through any insulation defect, causing a continuous loss of current. The wires connecting the buttons to the signaling devices or bells are called 'line' wires. A good covering at the joints is important for these and other household wires. For 'line wires,' we typically prefer No. 18 or 20 copper, wrapped in rubber, and an outer layer of cotton that is well varnished. When joining 'battery wires,' the junction area must be uncovered for about an inch; clean the wire ends well and twist them tightly together. Using a spirit lamp or candle, heat the joint enough to melt thin solder when it’s applied, having first sprinkled a little powdered resin on it as flux; the solder should flow well and bond firmly with the copper wire. Next, take a piece of gutta-percha and place it over the warm joint, then mold it around with the help of the spirit lamp and wet fingers until you have a strong seal. Never use spirits when soldering. For 'line wire,' it's best, wherever possible, to run it continuously from the button to the signal box or bell. However, if you need multiple buttons on the same wire, a junction is unavoidable. The process for joining and covering it is the same as for the battery wire. When bringing several wires down to one spot, you can bury a large tube in the wall or install a wooden casing flush with the plaster, featuring a removable front. The latter option is easier for adjustments. When fastening wires, they should never be left exposed. If they run along a damp wall, it’s best to attach a board and loosely staple them. Do not allow more than one wire under the same staple, and prevent staples from touching each other. Many times, electric bells have failed or caused annoyance due to staples being tight against the wires or several wires sharing the same staple—this must be avoided at all costs. You can twist multiple wires into a cable and run it through a short piece of gutta-percha tube, securing it with regular gas hooks if it helps. When running wires, steer clear of hot water pipes, and don’t route them alongside plumbing. Underground wires should be laid between wooden pieces or in a gas or drain pipe and must not be left exposed in bare soil, as sharp stones can pierce the insulation and create a loss; in fact, the best wire and protection are usually the most cost-effective in the long run. The copper wire in this scenario should be at least No. 16 B.W.G., covered with gutta-percha to No. 9 or 10 B.W.G., and preferably have an outer protective layer of tape or braided material that is well tarred. Outside wire, when installed on walls and exposed to the elements, should be covered with rubber and a protective compound, then varnished or tarred and wrapped in tape or braid. Hooks or staples must be well-galvanized to avoid rusting and should be loosely secured. If the wire is inside an iron pipe, a lighter insulation can be used, but the pipe must be watertight. In new constructions, wires should be placed in zinc or copper bell tubes. A ⅜ inch tube can comfortably hold two wires. The tubes should be installed to end in the same places in the rooms as standard crank bell levers—about three feet off the floor. Before plastering, fix a block of wood in the wall next to the fireplace, with the tube's end positioned in the center. A big nail or screw can mark the spot for easy locating after the plaster is done. Tilt the tube slightly forward at the end and insert a small wooden peg to keep dirt out. Do the same near or above the bed in bedrooms. If the tubes remain clean, the wires can be easily pulled up or down as needed. The best method is to take a length of standard No. 16 copper bell wire that can pass through the tube, stretch it, and push it through to the other end. Then have your rolls of insulated wire, meaning one battery wire that branches off to each button, and one line wire that connects directly to the indicators or bells. Strip a small section of insulation off each end, tie them to the bare copper wire, and pull them through. Repeat this process wherever a button is being installed throughout the building. When connecting with binding screws or any metal, it's crucial that everything is perfectly clean[Pg 159]. All wire joints, whether tinned or untinned, must be soldered and insulated. We cannot stress this enough to those doing the installation. Never bury unprotected wires in plaster, and during construction, only the tubes should be installed until the plastering is complete; the wires should be routed in at the same time as finishing other work."
§ 71. The wires having been laid by any of the methods indicated in the preceding five sections, the fixer is now in a position to connect up. No two houses or offices will admit of this being done in exactly the same way; but in the following sections most of the possible cases are described and illustrated, and the intelligent fixer will find no difficulty, when he has once grasped the principle, in making those trifling modifications which the particular requirements may render necessary. The first and simplest form, which engages our attention, is that of a single bell, battery, and push, connected by wire only. This is illustrated at Fig. 75. Here we see that the bell is connected by means of one of the wires to the zinc pole of the battery, the push or other contact being connected to the carbon pole of the same battery. A second wire unites the other screw of the push or contact with the second binding screw of the bell. There is no complete circuit until the push is pressed, when the current circulates from the carbon or positive pole of the battery, through the[Pg 160] contact springs of the push, along the wire to the bell, and then back again through the under wire to the zinc or negative pole of the battery.[15] It must be clearly understood that the exact position of battery, bell, and push is quite immaterial. What is essential is, that the relative connections between battery, bell, and push be maintained unaltered. Fig. 76 shows the next simplest case, viz., that in which a single bell and push are worked by a single cell through an "earth" return (see § 70). Here the current is made to pass from the carbon pole of the battery to the push, thence along the line wire to the bell. After passing through the bell, it goes to the right-hand earth-plate E, passing through the soil till it reaches the left-hand earth-plate E, thence back to the zinc pole of the battery. It is of no consequence to the working of the bell whether the battery be placed between the push and the left-hand earth-plate, or between the bell and the right-hand earth-plate; indeed, some operators prefer to keep the battery as near to the bell as possible. At Fig. 77 is shown the mode by which a single battery and single bell can be made to ring from two (or more) pushes situated in different rooms. Here it is evident that, whichever of the two[Pg 161] pushes be pressed, the current finds its way to the bell by the upper wire, and back home again through the lower wire; and, even if both pushes are down at once, the bell rings just the same, for both pushes lead from the same pole of the battery (the carbon) to the same wire (the line wire).
§ 71. Now that the wires have been installed using any of the methods described in the previous five sections, the installer is ready to connect everything. No two homes or offices will allow this to be done in exactly the same way; however, the following sections describe and illustrate most possible scenarios, and a knowledgeable installer will have no trouble, once they understand the concept, making the minor adjustments needed for specific requirements. The first and simplest setup we will look at involves a single bell, battery, and push, connected by wire only. This is shown at Fig. 75. Here, the bell connects to one of the battery's zinc terminals via a wire, while the push or other contact is linked to the carbon terminal of the same battery. A second wire connects the other terminal of the push or contact to the second binding terminal of the bell. The circuit is incomplete until the push is pressed, which allows the current to flow from the carbon or positive terminal of the battery, through the push's contact springs, along the wire to the bell, and then back through the lower wire to the zinc or negative terminal of the battery. [15] It’s important to note that the exact placement of the battery, bell, and push doesn’t matter. What's vital is to keep the relative connections between the battery, bell, and push unchanged. Fig. 76 illustrates the next simplest scenario, where a single bell and push are activated by one battery cell through an "earth" return (see § 70). In this case, the current flows from the battery's carbon terminal to the push, then along the line wire to the bell. After passing through the bell, the current travels to the right-hand earth plate E, moving through the ground until it reaches the left-hand earth plate E, and then back to the zinc terminal of the battery. It doesn’t matter to the bell’s operation whether the battery is positioned between the push and the left-hand earth plate, or between the bell and the right-hand earth plate; in fact, some users prefer to keep the battery as close to the bell as possible. At Fig. 77, we see how a single battery and bell can be activated by two (or more) pushes located in different rooms. It's clear that, no matter which of the two pushes is pressed, the current reaches the bell through the upper wire and returns through the lower wire; even if both pushes are pressed simultaneously, the bell will ring just the same, as both pushes connect from the same terminal of the battery (the carbon) to the same wire (the line wire).
In Fig. 78, we have a slight modification of the same arrangement, a front-door pull contact being inserted in the circuit; and here, in view of the probably increased resistance of longer distance, two cells are supposed to be employed instead of one, and these are coupled up in series (§ 40), in order to overcome this increased resistance.
In Fig. 78, we have a small change in the same setup, with a front-door pull contact added to the circuit; and here, considering the likely increased resistance from the longer distance, two cells are assumed to be used instead of one, and these are connected in series (§ 40) to overcome the increased resistance.
The next case which may occur is where it is desired to ring two or more bells from one push. There are two manners of doing this. The first mode is to make the current divide itself between the two bells, which are then said to be "in parallel." This mode is well illustrated both at Figs. 79 and 80. As in these cases the current has to divide itself among the bells, larger cells must be used, to provide for the larger demand; or[Pg 162] several cells may be coupled up in parallel (§ 40). At Fig. 79 is shown the arrangement for two adjoining rooms; at Fig. 80, that to be adopted when the rooms are at some distance apart. If, as shown at Fig. 81, a switch similar to that figured in the cut Fig. 64 be inserted at the point where the line wires converge to meet the push, it is possible for the person using the push to ring both bells at once, or to ring either the right-hand or the left-hand bell at will, according to whether he turns the arm of the switch-lever on to the right-hand or left-hand contact plate.
The next scenario that may arise is when you want to ring two or more bells with one push. There are two ways to do this. The first method is to let the current split between the two bells, which are then considered to be "in parallel." This method is well demonstrated in both Figs. 79 and 80. Since the current has to share itself among the bells in these cases, larger batteries must be used to meet the higher demand; or[Pg 162] several batteries can be connected in parallel (§ 40). At Fig. 79, the setup for two adjacent rooms is shown; at Fig. 80, you can see the setup for when the rooms are at some distance from each other. If, as shown in Fig. 81, a switch similar to the one depicted in cut Fig. 64 is inserted where the line wires converge to connect to the push, the person using the push can ring both bells at once, or choose to ring either the right-hand or left-hand bell by turning the lever arm of the switch to the right or left contact plate.
The second mode of ringing two or more bells from one push is that of connecting one bell to the other, the right-hand binding screw of the one to the left-hand binding screw of the next, and so on, and then connecting up the whole series of bells to the push and battery, as if they were a single bell. This mode of disposing the bells is called the series arrangement. As we have already noticed at § 63, owing to the difference in the times at which[Pg 163] the different contact springs of the various bells make contact, this mode is not very satisfactory. If the bells are single stroke bells, they work very well in series; but, to get trembling bells to work in series, it is best to adopt the form of bell recommended by Mr. F. C. Allsop. He says: "Perhaps the best plan is to use the form of bell shown at Fig. 82, which, as will be seen from the figure, governs its vibrations, not by breaking the circuit, but by shunting its coils. On the current flowing round the electro-magnet, the armature is attracted, and the spring makes contact with the lower screw.[Pg 164] There now exists a path of practically no resistance from end to end. The current is therefore diverted from the magnet coils, and passes by the armature and lower screw to the next bell, the armature falling back against the top screw, and repeating the previous operation so long as the circuit is closed. Thus, no matter how many bells there be in the series, the circuit is never broken. This form of bell, however, does not ring so energetically as the ordinary form, with a corresponding amount of battery power."
The second way to ring two or more bells with one push is to connect one bell to another, linking the right-hand binding screw of one bell to the left-hand binding screw of the next, and so on. Then, connect the entire series of bells to the push and battery, as if they were just one bell. This setup is called the series arrangement. As we already mentioned at § 63, because the contact springs of the different bells activate at different times, this method isn’t very effective. Single stroke bells work well in series; however, for trembling bells to function in series, it’s best to use the type of bell suggested by Mr. F. C. Allsop. He says: "Perhaps the best plan is to use the type of bell shown at Fig. 82, which, as you can see from the figure, controls its vibrations not by breaking the circuit but by shunting its coils. When the current flows through the electro-magnet, the armature is attracted, and the spring makes contact with the lower screw. There is then a path with almost no resistance from end to end. Therefore, the current is redirected from the magnet coils and goes through the armature and lower screw to the next bell, allowing the armature to fall back against the top screw and repeat the previous process as long as the circuit remains closed. Thus, regardless of how many bells are in the series, the circuit is never interrupted. However, this type of bell doesn’t ring as powerfully as the standard type, which requires a corresponding amount of battery power."
Fig. 83 illustrates the mode in which a bell, at a long distance, must be coupled up to work with a local battery and relay. The relay is not shown separately, but is supposed to be enclosed in the bell case. Here, on pressing the push at the external left-hand corner, the battery current passes into the relay at the distant station, and out at the right-hand earth-plate E returning to the left-hand earth-plate E. In doing this, it throws in circuit (just as long as the push is held down) the right-hand local battery, so that the bell rings by the current sent by the local battery, the more delicate relay working by the current sent from the distant battery.[Pg 165]
Fig. 83 shows how a bell, from a long distance, needs to be connected to work with a local battery and relay. The relay isn't displayed separately, but it's assumed to be inside the bell case. When you press the button at the external left corner, the battery current flows into the relay at the distant station and out through the right-hand earth plate E, returning to the left-hand earth plate E. While this happens, it connects (as long as the button is pressed) the right-hand local battery, so the bell rings due to the current from the local battery, while the more sensitive relay operates from the current coming from the distant battery.[Pg 165]
At Fig. 84, we have illustrated the mode of connecting up a continuous ringing bell, with a wire return. Of course, if the distance is great, or a roadway, etc., intervene, an overhead line and an earth plate may replace the lines shown therein, or both lines may be buried. It is possible, by using a Morse key (Fig. 65) constructed so as to make contact in one direction when not pressed down, and in the other when pressed down, to signal from either end of a circuit, using only one line wire and one return. The mode of connecting up for this purpose is shown at Fig. 85. At each end we have a battery and bell, with a double contact Morse key as shown, the Morse key at each end being connected through the intervention of the line wire through the central stud. The batteries and bells at each[Pg 166] station are connected to earth plates, as shown. Suppose now we depress the Morse key at the right-hand station. Since by so doing, we lift the back end of the lever, we throw our own bell out of circuit, but make contact between our battery and the line wire. Therefore the current traverses the line wire, enters in the left-hand Morse key, and, since this is not depressed, can, and does, pass into the bell, which therefore rings, then descends to the left-hand earth-plate, returning along the ground to the battery from whence it started at the right-hand E. If, on the contrary, the left-hand Morse key be depressed, while the right-hand key is not being manipulated, the current traverses in the opposite direction, and the right-hand bell rings. Instead of Morse keys, double contact pushes (that is, pushes making contact in one direction when not pressed, and in the opposite when pressed) may advantageously be employed. This latter arrangement is shown at Fig. 86.
At Fig. 84, we have shown how to connect a continuous ringing bell with a wire return. If the distance is long or if there's a road or something similar in the way, an overhead line and an earth plate can replace the lines shown here, or both lines can be buried. By using a Morse key (Fig. 65) designed to make contact in one direction when not pressed and in the other when pressed, it's possible to signal from either end of a circuit using just one line wire and one return. The setup for this purpose is shown at Fig. 85. At each end, we have a battery and bell with a double contact Morse key as illustrated. The Morse key at each end connects through the line wire via the central stud. The batteries and bells at each station connect to earth plates, as shown. Now, if we press down the Morse key at the right-hand station, we lift the back end of the lever, disconnecting our own bell from the circuit but making contact between our battery and the line wire. As a result, the current travels through the line wire, enters the left-hand Morse key, and since it’s not being pressed down, it passes into the bell, which rings, and then goes down to the left-hand earth plate, returning through the ground to the battery at the right-hand E. Conversely, if the left-hand Morse key is pressed while the right-hand key is not being used, the current moves in the opposite direction, and the right-hand bell rings. Instead of Morse keys, double contact pushes (which make contact in one direction when not pressed and in the opposite when pressed) can be used effectively. This latter setup is shown at Fig. 86.
It is also possible, as shown at Fig. 87, to send signals from two stations, using but one battery (which, if the distance is great, should be of a proportionate number of cells), two bells, and two ordinary pushes. Three[Pg 167] wires, besides the earth-plate or return wire, are required in this case. The whole of the wires, except the return, must be carefully insulated. Suppose in this case we press the right-hand button. The current flows from the battery along the lower wire through this right-hand push and returns to the distant bell along the top wire, down the left-hand dotted wire back to the battery, since it cannot enter by the left-hand press, which, not being pushed, makes no contact. The left-hand bell therefore rings. If, on the other hand, the left-hand push be pressed, the current from the carbon of the battery passes through the left-hand push, traverses the central line wire, passes into the bell, rings it, and descends to the right-hand earth plate E, traverses the earth circuit till it reaches the left-hand earth plate E, whence it returns to the zinc pole of the battery by the lower dotted line.
It’s also possible, as shown at Fig. 87, to send signals from two stations using just one battery (which, if the distance is long, should have a proportionate number of cells), two bells, and two regular buttons. In this case, three wires, in addition to the ground plate or return wire, are needed. All the wires, except the return, must be properly insulated. If we press the right button, the current flows from the battery along the bottom wire through this right button and returns to the distant bell along the top wire, then down the left dotted wire back to the battery, since it can’t enter through the left button, which isn't pressed and doesn’t make contact. So, the left bell rings. If, on the other hand, the left button is pressed, the current from the carbon of the battery goes through the left button, travels along the central line wire, enters the bell, rings it, and goes down to the right ground plate E, traversing the ground circuit until it reaches the left ground plate E, from where it returns to the zinc pole of the battery via the lower dotted line.
Fig. 88 shows how the same result (signalling in both directions) may be attained, using only two wires, with earth return, and two Morse keys. The direction of the current is shown by the arrows. Both wires must be insulated and[Pg 168] either carried overhead or underground, buried in tubes. Fig. 89 shows the proper mode of connecting the entire system of bells, pushes, etc., running through a building. The dotted lines are the wires starting from the two poles of the battery (which should consist of more cells in proportion as there is more work to do), the plain lines being the wires between the pushes and the bell and signalling box. In this illustration a door-pull is shown to the extreme left. Pendulum indicators are usually connected up as shown in this figure, except that the bell is generally enclosed in the indicator case. The wire, therefore, has to be carried from the left-hand screw of the indicator case direct to the upper dotted line, which is the wire returning to the zinc pole of the battery. N.B.—When the wires from the press-buttons are connected with the binding-screw, of the top of or inside of the indicator case, the insulating material of the wires, at the point where connection is to be made, must be removed, and the wires carefully cleaned and tightly clamped down.
Fig. 88 demonstrates how the same outcome (signaling in both directions) can be achieved using just two wires, with an earth return, and two Morse keys. The direction of the current is indicated by the arrows. Both wires must be insulated and[Pg 168] should be either carried overhead or buried underground in tubes. Fig. 89 illustrates the correct way to connect the entire system of bells, buttons, etc., throughout a building. The dotted lines represent the wires extending from the two battery terminals (which should have more cells depending on the workload), while the solid lines connect the buttons to the bell and signaling box. In this diagram, a door pull is shown on the far left. Pendulum indicators are typically connected as shown in this figure, except that the bell is usually housed inside the indicator case. Therefore, the wire must run from the left-hand terminal of the indicator case directly to the upper dotted line, which is the wire returning to the zinc terminal of the battery. N.B.—When connecting the wires from the push buttons to the binding screw at the top or inside of the indicator case, the insulating material of the wires must be removed at the connection point, and the wires must be carefully cleaned and securely clamped down.
When it is desired to connect separate bells to ring[Pg 169] in other parts of the building, the quickest way is to take a branch wire out of the nearest battery wire (the wire coming from the carbon pole), and carry it to the push or pull, from thence to the bell, and from the bell back to the zinc of the battery.
When you want to connect different bells to ring[Pg 169] in other areas of the building, the fastest method is to take a branch wire from the nearest battery wire (the wire coming from the carbon pole), and run it to the push button or pull switch, then to the bell, and back to the zinc of the battery.
§ 72. We should advise the fixer always to draw out a little sketch of the arrangement he intends to adopt in carrying out any plan, as any means of saving useless lengths of wire, etc., will then easily be seen. In doing this, instead of making full sketches of batteries, he may use the conventional signs ▍▏ for each cell of the battery, the thick stroke meaning the carbon, the thin one the zinc. Pushes may be represented by (·), earth-plates by [E] and pulls, switches, &c., as shown in the annexed cut, Fig. 90, which illustrates a mode of connecting up a lodge with a house, continuous bells being used, in such a way that the lodge bell can be made to ring from the lodge pull, the house bell ringing or not, according to the way the switch (shown at top left-hand[Pg 170] corner) is set. As it is set in the engraving, only the lodge bell rings.
§ 72. We should suggest that the fixer always sketch out a quick layout of the setup he plans to use for any project, as this will help identify any unnecessary lengths of wire and similar items. Instead of detailed sketches of batteries, he can use the standard symbols ▍▏ for each battery cell, where the thick line represents the carbon and the thin line represents the zinc. Pushes can be shown by (·), earth plates by [E], and pulls, switches, etc., as illustrated in the accompanying diagram, Fig. 90, which demonstrates a way to connect a lodge with a house, using continuous bells so that the lodge bell can be triggered from the lodge pull, while the house bell can either ring or not, depending on how the switch (shown in the top left-hand corner) is adjusted. In the drawing, only the lodge bell rings.
§ 73. There are still two cases of electric bell and signal fitting, to which attention must be directed. The first is in the case of ships. Here all the connections can be made exactly as in a house, the only exception to be made being that the indicators must not be of the pendulum, or other easily displaced type; but either of the form shown at Fig. 67 or 68, in which the electro-magnet has to lift a latch to release the fall or drop, against a pretty stiff spring. Besides being thus firmly locking, so as not to be affected by the ship's motion, all the wood work should be soaked in melted paraffin wax, the iron work japanned, and the brass work well lacquered, to protect all parts from damp. The second case requiring notice is that of lifts. Every well-appointed lift should be fitted with electric bells and[Pg 171] indicators. In the cab of the lift itself should be placed an electric bell, with as many double contact pushes and indicators as there are floors to be communicated with. At the top and at the bottom of the left shaft, as near to the landing side as possible, must be set two stout wooden blocks (oak, elm, or other non-perishable wood). From top to bottom of the shaft must then be stretched, in the same manner as a pianoforte is strung, on stout metal pins, with threading holes and square heads, as many No. 12 or 14 bare copper wires as there are floors or landings, and two more for the battery and return wire respectively. Care must be taken that these wires are strung perfectly parallel, and that they are stretched quite taut, but not strained, otherwise they will surely break. To the top of the cab, and in connection in the usual manner by wires with the bell and indicator (which, as in the case of ships, must be of the locking type, lest the jolts of the cab disturb their action) must be attached a number of spoonbill springs, which press against the naked wires running down the shaft. The shape of these springs (which should be of brass) at the part where they press against the bare wires, is similar to that of the spoon break of a bicycle. Some operators use rollers at the end of the spring instead of spoonbills, but these latter rub the wires and keep up good contact, while the rollers slip over the wires and do not keep them clean. By means of these springs, the current from the batteries, which are best placed either at the top of the lift itself, or in one of the adjacent rooms (never at the bottom of the shaft, owing to the damp which always reigns there),[Pg 172] can be taken off and directed where it is desired, precisely as if the batteries were in the cab itself. It is usual (though not obligatory) to use the two wires furthest from the landing as the go and return battery wires, and from these, through the other wires, all desired communication with the landings can be effected. To obtain this end, it will be necessary to furnish every landing with a double contact push and bell, and each bell and push must be connected up to the shaft wires in the following mode:—
§ 73. There are still two situations involving electric bells and signal fittings that need attention. The first one pertains to ships. Here, all the connections can be made just like in a house, with the only exception being that the indicators must not be of the pendulum or other easily movable type; instead, they should be similar to the forms shown at Fig. 67 or 68, where the electromagnet has to lift a latch to release the drop against a pretty stiff spring. Besides being securely locked so they won’t be affected by the ship's motion, all wooden parts should be soaked in melted paraffin wax, the metal parts should be coated, and the brass components well lacquered to protect all parts from moisture. The second case needing attention is that of lifts. Every well-equipped lift should have electric bells and [Pg 171] indicators. In the lift cab, there should be an electric bell, with as many double contact buttons and indicators as there are floors to connect with. At the top and bottom of the lift shaft, as close to the landing side as possible, two strong wooden blocks (oak, elm, or another durable wood) must be installed. From top to bottom of the shaft, a number of No. 12 or 14 bare copper wires should be stretched on sturdy metal pins, with threaded holes and square heads, corresponding to the number of floors or landings, plus two additional wires for the battery and return. Care must be taken to ensure these wires are strung perfectly parallel and stretched tight, but not overly strained, or they will break. Connected at the top of the cab, and wired to the bell and indicator (which, like in the case of ships, must be of the locking type to avoid disturbance from the cab's jolts), should be several spoonbill springs that press against the bare wires running down the shaft. The shape of these springs (which should be made of brass) at the point where they press against the wires is similar to that of a bicycle's spoon brake. Some technicians use rollers at the end of the spring instead of spoonbills, but the spoonbills rub the wires and ensure good contact, while rollers slip over the wires and don't keep them clean. These springs allow the current from the batteries, ideally placed either at the top of the lift or in an adjacent room (never at the bottom of the shaft due to the humidity there), [Pg 172] to be accessed and directed wherever needed, just as if the batteries were located in the cab. It's common (though not required) to use the two wires farthest from the landing as the go and return battery wires, and from these, through the other wires, all necessary communication with the landings can be established. To achieve this, each landing must be equipped with a double contact button and bell, and each bell and button must be connected to the shaft wires in the following manner:—
A wire must be led from the lower contact spring of the double contact push, to the main battery carbon wire in the shaft. A second wire is led from the upper contact stop of the double contact push to the bell, and thence to the main battery zinc wire on the shaft. Lastly, a third wire is taken from the upper contact spring of the push and connected to that particular wire in the shaft which by means of the spoonbill springs connects the particular push and indicator in the cab, destined to correspond with it. It will be seen that with the exception of using the rubbing spoonbill springs and return wires in the shaft, this arrangement is similar to that illustrated at Fig. 87.
A wire should be run from the lower contact spring of the double contact push to the main battery carbon wire in the shaft. A second wire goes from the upper contact stop of the double contact push to the bell, and then to the main battery zinc wire on the shaft. Finally, a third wire connects from the upper contact spring of the push to the specific wire in the shaft that connects the particular push and indicator in the cab, designed to match with it. It's clear that except for using the rubbing spoonbill springs and return wires in the shaft, this setup is similar to what’s shown at Fig. 87.
A glance at Fig. 91 will render the whole system of wiring and connecting up with lifts and landing, perfectly clear. In connecting the branch lines to the main bare copper wires in the shaft, in order that the spoonbill springs should not interfere with them, they (the ends of the branch wires) must be bent at right angles, like a letter L, and the upright portion soldered neatly[Pg 173] to the back of the shaft wire. Any solder which may flow over to the front of the wire must be carefully scraped off to prevent any bumps affecting the smooth working of the contact springs. It will be evident on examination of Fig. 91, that if any of the pushes on the landings be pressed, the circuit is completed between the battery at the top, through the two battery wires[Pg 174] to the bell and one of the indicators to the cab, and, on the other hand, that if a push be pressed in the cab, a corresponding bell on the landing will be rung, precisely as in Fig. 87.
A look at Fig. 91 will make the entire system of wiring and connections for lifts and landings perfectly clear. When connecting the branch lines to the main bare copper wires in the shaft, to ensure that the spoonbill springs don’t interfere, the ends of the branch wires should be bent at right angles, like an L shape, and the upright part should be neatly soldered[Pg 173] to the back of the shaft wire. Any solder that flows to the front of the wire must be carefully scraped off to avoid bumps that could disrupt the smooth operation of the contact springs. It will be clear upon reviewing Fig. 91 that if any of the buttons on the landings are pressed, the circuit completes between the battery at the top, through the two battery wires[Pg 174] to the bell and one of the indicators in the cab. Conversely, if a button is pressed in the cab, a corresponding bell on the landing will ring, just like in Fig. 87.
Some fitters employ a many-stranded cable to convey the current to and from the battery to the cab and landing, instead of the system of stretched wires herein recommended; but this practice cannot be advocated, as the continual bending and unbending of this cable, repeated so frequently every day, soon breaks the leading wires contained in the cable.
Some installers use a multi-stranded cable to transfer power to and from the battery to the cab and landing, instead of the recommended system of stretched wires. However, this method is not advisable because the constant bending and straightening of the cable, done so many times each day, quickly damages the core wires inside the cable.
§ 74. In many cases where a "call" bell alone is required, the battery may be entirely dispensed with, and a small dynamo (§ 15) employed instead. The entire apparatus is then known as the "magneto-bell," and consists essentially of two parts, viz., the generator, Fig. 92, and the bell, Fig. 93. The generator or inductor consists of an armature, which by means of a projecting handle and train of wheels can be revolved rapidly between the poles of a powerful magnet; the whole being enclosed in a box. The current produced by the revolution of the armature is led to the two binding screws at the top of the box. By means of two wires, or one wire and an earth circuit, the current is led to the[Pg 175] receiver or bell case, Fig. 93. Here, there are usually two bells, placed very near one another, and the armature attached to the bell clapper is so arranged between the poles of the double-bell magnets, that it strikes alternately the one and the other, so that a clear ringing is kept up as long as the handle is being turned at the generator.
§ 74. In many situations where only a "call" bell is needed, the battery can be completely eliminated, and a small dynamo (§ 15) can be used instead. The whole setup is then referred to as the "magneto-bell," and it primarily consists of two parts, namely the generator, Fig. 92, and the bell, Fig. 93. The generator or inductor includes an armature, which can be spun quickly between the poles of a strong magnet using a sticking-out handle and a series of gears; it’s all housed in a box. The current generated by the spinning armature is directed to the two binding screws at the top of the box. Using two wires, or one wire and an earth circuit, the current is sent to the [Pg 175]receiver or bell case, Fig. 93. Inside, there are typically two bells positioned very close to each other, and the armature connected to the bell clapper is set up between the poles of the double-bell magnets so that it strikes alternately, producing a clear ringing sound as long as the handle is turned at the generator.
If a combined generator and bell be fitted at each end of a line, it becomes possible to communicate both ways; one terminal of each instrument must be connected to the line, and the other terminal on each to earth. A combined generator and bell is shown at Fig. 94. These instruments are always ready for use, require no battery or press-buttons. The generator, Fig. 92, will ring seven bells simultaneously, if required, so powerful is the current set up; and by using a switch any number of bells, placed in different positions, can be rung, by carrying a separate wire from the switch to the bell.
If a combined generator and bell are installed at each end of a line, it becomes possible to communicate in both directions; one terminal of each instrument must be connected to the line, and the other terminal on each to the ground. A combined generator and bell is shown at Fig. 94. These devices are always ready for use, requiring no battery or push buttons. The generator, Fig. 92, can ring seven bells at the same time if needed, as the current it generates is very strong; and by using a switch, any number of bells located in different places can be rung by running a separate wire from the switch to each bell.
§ 75. Our work would not be complete unless we pointed out the means necessary to detect faults in our work. In order to localise faults, two things are requisite: first, a means of knowing whether the battery itself is working properly, that is to say, giving the due amount of current of the right pressure, or E.M.F.; secondly, a means of detecting whether there is leakage, or loss of[Pg 176] current, or break of circuit in our lines. Fortunately, the means of ascertaining these data can be all combined in one instrument, known as a linesman's galvanometer or detector, of which we give an illustration at Fig. 95. It will be remembered (§ 10) that if a current be passed over or under a poised magnetic needle, parallel to it, the needle is immediately deflected out of the parallel line, and swings round to the right or left of the current, according to the direction of the current; likewise that the needle is deflected farther from the original position as the current becomes stronger. The deflections, however, are not proportionate to the strength of the current, being fairly so up to about 25 to 30 degrees of arc out of the original position, but being very much less than proportionate to the current strength as the needle gets farther from the line of current; so that a current of infinite strength would be required to send the needle up to 90°. On this principle the detector is constructed. It consists of a lozenge-shaped magnetic needle, suspended vertically on a light spindle, carrying at one end a pointer, which indicates on a card, or metal dial,[Pg 177] the deflection of the needle. Behind the dial is arranged a flat upright coil of wire (or two coils in many cases) parallel to the needle, along which the current to be tested can be sent. The needle lies between the front and back of the flat coil. The whole is enclosed in a neat wooden box, with glazed front to show the dial, and binding screws to connect up to the enclosed coil or coils. If the coil surrounding the needle be of a few turns of coarse wire, since it opposes little resistance to the passage of the current, it will serve to detect the presence of large quantities of electricity (many ampères) at a low pressure; this is called a quantity coil. If, on the other hand, the coil be one of fine wire, in many convolutions, as it requires more pressure, or E.M.F., or "intensity" to force the current through the fine high-resistance wire, the instrument becomes one fitted to measure the voltage or pressure of the current, and the coil is known as the "intensity." If both coils are inserted in the case, so that either can be used at will, the instrument is capable of measuring either the quantity of electricity passing, or the pressure at which it is sent, and is then known as a quantity and intensity detector. No two galvanometers give exactly the same deflection for the same amount of current, or the same pressure; the fitter will therefore do well to run out a little table (which he will soon learn by heart) of the deflection his instrument gives with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 Leclanché's coupled in parallel, when connected with the quantity coil. He will find the smaller sizes give less current than the larger ones. In testing the[Pg 178] deflections given by the intensity coil, he must remember to couple his cells in series, as he will get no increase in tension or pressure by coupling up in parallel. In either case the cells should be new, and freshly set up, say, within 24 hours. As some of my readers may like to try their skill at constructing such a detector, I transcribe the directions given in "Amateur work" by Mr. Edwinson:—
§ 75. Our work wouldn't be complete if we didn't highlight the tools needed to find flaws in our work. To locate faults, two things are necessary: first, a way to check if the battery itself is functioning correctly, meaning it produces the right amount of current at the correct voltage, or E.M.F.; second, a method to determine if there's a current leak, loss of current, or a break in the circuit in our lines. Luckily, these measurements can all be combined into one device, known as a linesman's galvanometer or detector, which is illustrated at Fig. 95. It will be recalled (§ 10) that when a current flows over or under a balanced magnetic needle, parallel to it, the needle is immediately deflected from its parallel position and swings to the right or left, depending on the direction of the current; furthermore, the deflection increases as the current becomes stronger. However, the deflections are not directly proportional to the strength of the current, being fairly proportional up to about 25 to 30 degrees from the original position, but becoming much less so as the needle moves further from the line of current; thus, an infinite current strength would be necessary to move the needle to 90°. The detector is built on this principle. It consists of a diamond-shaped magnetic needle, suspended vertically on a lightweight spindle, with a pointer on one end that indicates the needle's deflection on a card or metal dial, [Pg 177] behind which is arranged a flat upright coil of wire (or two coils in many cases) parallel to the needle, through which the current to be tested can flow. The needle is positioned between the front and back of the flat coil. The entire setup is housed in a tidy wooden box with a glass front to display the dial, along with binding screws for connecting to the enclosed coil or coils. If the coil surrounding the needle consists of a few turns of thick wire, offering minimal resistance to current flow, it will be able to detect the presence of large amounts of electricity (many amperes) at low voltage; this is known as a quantity coil. Conversely, if the coil consists of fine wire wound in many turns, requiring more voltage, or E.M.F., or "intensity" to push the current through the high-resistance wire, the instrument is then capable of measuring the voltage or pressure of the current, and the coil is referred to as the "intensity." If both coils are included in the device, allowing either to be used as needed, the instrument can measure either the quantity of electricity flowing or the voltage at which it is transmitted, and it is then labeled as a quantity and intensity detector. No two galvanometers will provide exactly the same deflection for the same amount of current or the same voltage; therefore, the operator would do well to create a small table (which he will quickly memorize) of the deflection that his instrument indicates with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 Leclanché cells coupled in parallel when connected to the quantity coil. He will find that the smaller cells yield less current than the larger ones. When testing the [Pg 178] deflections produced by the intensity coil, he must remember to connect his cells in series, as no increase in tension or pressure can be achieved by connecting in parallel. In either case, the cells should be new and recently set up, ideally within the last 24 hours. Since some of my readers might want to try their hand at building such a detector, I will share the instructions provided in "Amateur Work" by Mr. Edwinson:—
§ 76. "Such an instrument, suitable for detecting the currents in an electric bell circuit, may be made up at the cost of a few shillings for material, and by the exercise of a little constructive ability. We shall need, first of all, a magnetised needle; this can be made out of a piece of watch spring. Procure a piece of watch spring two inches long, soften it by heating it to redness, and allowing it to cool gradually in a bed of hot ashes; then file it up to the form of a long lozenge, drill a small hole in the centre to receive the spindle or pivot, see that the needle is quite straight, then harden it by heating it again to a bright red and plunging it at once into cold water. It now has to be magnetised. To do this, rub it on a permanent horse-shoe, or other magnet, until it will attract an ordinary sewing needle strongly, or wrap it up in several turns of insulated line wire, and send many jerky charges of electricity from a strong battery through the wire. When it has been well magnetised, mount it on a spindle of fine hard wire, and secure it by a drop of solder. We will next turn our attention to the case, bobbin, or chamber in which the needle has to work. This may be made out of card[Pg 179]board entirely, or the end pieces may be made of ivory or ebonite, or it may be made out of thin sheet brass; for our purpose we will choose cardboard. Procure a piece of stout cardboard 4¾ inches long by 2 inches wide, double it to the form of a Tãndstickor match-box, and pierce it in exactly opposite sides, and in the centre of those sides with holes for the needle spindle. Now cut another piece of stout, stiff cardboard 2¾ inches long by ¾ inch wide, and cut a slit with a sharp knife to exactly fit the ends of the case or body already prepared. The spindle holes must now be bushed with short lengths of hard brass or glass bugles, or tubing, made to allow the spindle free movement, and these secured in position by a little melted shellac, sealing-wax, or glue. The needle must now be placed in the case, the long end of the spindle first, then the short end in its bearing; then, whilst the case with the needle enclosed is held between the finger and thumb of the left hand, we secure the joint with a little glue or with melted sealing-wax. The end-pieces are now to be put on, glued, or sealed in position, and set aside to get firm, whilst we turn our attention to other parts. The case, 5 inches by 4 inches by 2 inches in depth, may be improvised out of an old cigar-box, but is best made of thin mahogany or teak, nicely polished on the outside, and fitted with a cover sliding in a groove, or hinged to form the back of the instrument. The binding screws should be of the pattern known as the telegraph pattern, fitted with nuts, shown at Fig. 27. A small brass handle to be fitted to the top of the instrument,[Pg 180] will also be handy. A circular piece of smooth cardboard 3¼ inches in diameter, with a graduated arc, marked as shown in Fig. 95, will serve the purpose of a dial, and a piece of thin brass, bent to the form of ┏━┓, will be required as a needle guard. The face of the dial may be a circular piece of glass, held in a brass ogee, or a hole the size of the dial may be cut in a piece of thin wood; this, glazed on the inside with a square of glass, may be made to form the front of the instrument over the dial. An indicating needle will also be required for an outside needle; this is usually made of watch spring, and nicely blued; but it may be made of brass or any other metal, one made of aluminium being probably the best on account of its lightness. It must be pierced with a hole exactly in the centre, so as to balance it as the beam of scales should be balanced, and should one end be heavier than the other it must be filed until they are equal.
§ 76. "You can create an instrument for detecting currents in an electric bell circuit for just a few shillings in material and with some basic construction skills. First, you'll need a magnetized needle, which can be made from a piece of watch spring. Get a two-inch piece of watch spring, heat it until red-hot, and let it cool gradually in hot ashes. Then, file it into a long lozenge shape, drill a small hole in the center for the spindle or pivot, ensure the needle is straight, then harden it by reheating it to a bright red and quickly plunging it into cold water. Next, you need to magnetize it. You can do this by rubbing it on a permanent horseshoe or any other magnet until it can strongly attract a regular sewing needle, or by wrapping it in several turns of insulated wire and sending quick electric charges from a strong battery through the wire. Once magnetized, mount it on a spindle made of fine hard wire and secure it with a drop of solder. Next, let's focus on the case, bobbin, or chamber for the needle to work in. This can be made entirely from cardboard, or you could use ivory or ebonite for the end pieces, or it may be created from thin sheet brass; for our needs, we'll choose cardboard. Get a piece of sturdy cardboard that’s 4¾ inches long and 2 inches wide, fold it into a matchbox shape, and drill holes in opposite sides, right in the center, for the needle spindle. Then, cut another piece of sturdy, stiff cardboard 2¾ inches long and ¾ inch wide, and make a slit with a sharp knife to fit the ends of the already prepared case. The spindle holes should be lined with short lengths of hard brass or glass tubes to allow the spindle to move freely, securing them with a bit of melted shellac, sealing wax, or glue. Now, place the needle inside the case with the long end of the spindle first, followed by the short end in its bearing. While holding the case between your left hand's thumb and index finger, secure the joint with a bit of glue or melted sealing wax. Attach the end pieces, gluing or sealing them in place and setting the assembly aside to firm up while we work on other parts. The case, measuring 5 inches by 4 inches by 2 inches in depth, can be made from an old cigar box but is best crafted from thin mahogany or teak, nicely polished on the outside with a cover that slides in a groove or hinges at the back of the instrument. The binding screws should be of the telegraph-style with nuts, as shown at Fig. 27. A small brass handle on top of the instrument will also be useful. A circular piece of smooth cardboard, 3¼ inches in diameter, with a graduated arc marked as shown in Fig. 95, will serve as the dial, and a piece of thin brass bent into the shape of ┏━┓ will be needed as a needle guard. The dial face can be a circular piece of glass held in a brass ogee, or you can cut a hole the size of the dial in a thin piece of wood; this can be glazed with a square of glass on the inside to form the front of the instrument over the dial. An indicating needle for the outside is also necessary; this is usually made from watch spring and nicely blued, but it can be made from brass or any other metal, with aluminum being probably the best choice due to its lightness. The needle must have a hole drilled exactly in the center so it balances like a scale beam, and if one end is heavier than the other, it must be filed until they are even."
We will now turn our attention to the coil.
We will now focus on the coil.
Procure sixpennyworth of No. 36 silk-covered copper wire and wind three layers of it very evenly on the coil case or bobbin, being careful in passing the needle spindle not to pinch it or throw it out of truth. When this has been wound on, it will be found that one end of the wire points to the left and the other end to the right. These are destined to be connected to the under side of the binding screws shown on the top of Fig. 95. We therefore secure them to their respective sides with a touch of sealing wax, and leave enough wire free at the ends to reach the binding screws—say, about 6 inches.[Pg 181] It is handy to have an additional coil for testing strong currents, and as this may be combined in one instrument at a trifle additional cost, we will get some line wire (No. 22) and wind six or eight turns of it around the coil outside the other wire; one end of this wire will be attached to an additional binding screw placed between the others, and the other end to left binding screw shown. The coil thus prepared may now be mounted in position. Pierce the board dial and the wood at its back with a hole large enough for the needle spindle to pass through from the back to the centre of the dial. See that the thick end of the inside needle hangs downwards, then place the coil in the position it is intended to occupy, and note how far the needle spindle protrudes on the face of the dial. If this is too long, nip off the end and file it up taper and smooth until it will work freely in a hole in the needle guard, with all parts in their proper places. This being satisfactory, secure the coil in its place by sealing wax, or, better still, by two thin straps of brass, held by screws at each end, placed across the coil. Now clean the free ends of the coil wires, insert them under the nuts of the binding screws, fix the indicating needle on the end of the spindle outside, and see that it hangs in a vertical position with the inside needle when the instrument is standing on a level surface. Secure it in this position, screw on the needle guard, fasten on the glass face, and the instrument will be complete.
Get sixpence worth of No. 36 silk-covered copper wire and wrap three layers of it evenly onto the coil case or bobbin, making sure not to pinch the needle spindle or misalign it. Once wrapped, you’ll notice one end of the wire points left and the other points right. These are meant to connect to the underside of the binding screws shown on the top of Fig. 95. Secure them to their respective sides with a bit of sealing wax, leaving enough wire free at the ends to reach the binding screws—about 6 inches.[Pg 181] It’s useful to have an extra coil for testing strong currents, and since this can be included in one device at a small additional cost, let’s get some line wire (No. 22) and wrap six or eight turns of it around the coil outside the other wire; one end of this wire will connect to an extra binding screw placed between the others, and the other end to the left binding screw shown. The coil can now be mounted. Drill a hole through the board dial and the wood at its back wide enough for the needle spindle to pass through from the back to the center of the dial. Make sure the thick end of the inside needle hangs down, then position the coil where it needs to go, and check how far the needle spindle sticks out on the face of the dial. If it’s too long, trim the end and file it down to a taper to ensure it smoothly fits through a hole in the needle guard, with all components correctly in place. Once that looks good, secure the coil using sealing wax, or preferably with two thin brass straps, held by screws on each end, placed across the coil. Now clean the free ends of the coil wires, tuck them under the nuts of the binding screws, attach the indicating needle to the end of the spindle outside, and ensure it hangs vertically with the inside needle when the instrument is on a level surface. Secure it in this position, screw on the needle guard, attach the glass face, and the instrument will be complete.
§ 77. Provided thus with an efficient detector, the fitter may proceed to test his work. In cases of [Pg 182] new installations, take the wire off the carbon binding screw of the battery and attach it to one screw of the galvanometer (on the intensity coil side), next attach a piece of wire from the other binding screw of the galvanometer (the central one) so as to place the galvanometer in circuit. There should be no movement of the needle, and in proportion to the deflection of the needle, so will the loss or waste be. If loss is going on, every means must be used to remedy it. It is of the utmost importance to the effective working of the battery and bells that not the slightest leakage or local action should be allowed to remain. However slight such loss may be, it will eventually ruin the battery. Let damp places be sought out, and the wires removed from near them. Bad or injured coverings must also be looked for, such as may have been caused by roughly drawing the wires across angular walls, treading on them, or driving staples too tightly over them. Two or more staples may be touching, or two or more wires carelessly allowed to lie under one staple. The wire may have been bared in some places in passing over the sharp edges of the zinc tube. The backs of the pushes should be examined to see if too much wire has been bared, and is touching another wire at the back of the push-case itself. Or the same thing may be taking place at the junction with the relays or at the indicator cases. Should the defect not be at any of these places, the indicator should next be examined, and wire by wire detached (not cut) until the particular wire in which the loss is going on has been found. This wire should then be traced until the defect[Pg 183] has been discovered. In testing underground wires for a loss or break, it will be necessary first to uncouple the distant end, then to disconnect the other end from the instruments, and attach the wire going underground to the screw of the galvanometer. A piece of wire must then be taken from the other screw of the detector to the carbon end of the battery, and a second wire from the zinc end of the battery to the earth plate or other connection. Proceeding to that part of the wire where the injury is suspected, the wire is taken up, and a temporary earth connection having been made (water main, gas pipe, etc.), and by means of a sharp knife connected with this latter, the covering of the suspected wire penetrated through to the wire, so as to make a good connection between this suspected wire and the temporary earth plates. If, when this is done, the needle is deflected fully, the injury is farther away from the testing end, and other trials must be made farther on, until the spot is discovered. Wherever the covering of the wire has been pierced for testing, it must be carefully recovered, finished off with Prout's elastic glue, or gutta-percha, and made quite sound. The connections with the earth plates very frequently give trouble, the wires corrode or become detached from the iron pipes etc., and then the circuit is broken.
§ 77. Now that you have a good detector, you can start testing your work. For [Pg 182] new installations, remove the wire from the carbon binding screw of the battery and connect it to one of the screws of the galvanometer (on the intensity coil side). Then, connect another piece of wire from the other binding screw of the galvanometer (the central one) to complete the circuit. The needle should not move, and any deflection of the needle indicates the extent of loss or waste. If there’s a loss, all necessary steps must be taken to fix it. It's crucial for the efficient functioning of the battery and bells that there be absolutely no leakage or local action. Even a tiny loss can ultimately damage the battery. Look for damp areas and remove wires from close proximity to them. Check for any damaged or worn insulation, which can happen if wires are dragged across sharp corners, stepped on, or if staples are nailed too tightly over them. Two or more staples might be touching, or several wires might be carelessly lying under a single staple. The wire may be frayed in some spots from passing over sharp edges of the zinc tube. Inspect the backs of the pushes to ensure that no excessive wire is exposed and touching another wire inside the push-case. The same issue could occur at the connections with the relays or at the indicator cases. If no defects are found in these areas, check the indicator, detaching each wire (without cutting) until you identify the wire causing the loss. Trace this wire until you find the defect. When testing underground wires for a loss or break, first disconnect the distant end, then disconnect the other end from the instruments, and connect the underground wire to the galvanometer screw. Next, take a wire from the other screw of the detector to the carbon end of the battery, and another wire from the zinc end of the battery to the earth plate or another connection. Moving to the section of wire where damage is suspected, pick up the wire and create a temporary earth connection (like a water main or gas pipe) and using a sharp knife, puncture through the insulation of the suspected wire to establish a solid connection with the temporary earth plates. If the needle fully deflects after this, the damage is further from the testing end, and further checks should be done along the wire until you locate the damaged spot. After testing, ensure that any gaps you made in the wire’s insulation are securely covered, using Prout's elastic glue or gutta-percha, ensuring everything is sound. Connections with the earth plates often cause issues, as the wires may corrode or disconnect from iron pipes, causing a break in the circuit.
§ 78. When the fitter is called to localise defects which may have occurred in an installation which has been put up some time, before proceeding to work let him ask questions as to what kind of defect there is, and when and where it evinces itself. If all the[Pg 184] bells have broken down, and will not ring, either the battery or the main go and return wires are at fault. Let him proceed to the battery, examine the binding screws and connected wires for corrosion. If they are all right, let the batteries themselves be tested to see if they are giving the right amount of current. This should be done with the quantity coil of the detector. Should the battery be faulty, it will be well to renew the zincs and recharge the battery, if the porous cell be still in good condition; if not, new cells should be substituted for the old ones. Should the battery be all right, and still none of the bells ring, a break or bad contact, or short circuit in the main wires near the battery may be the cause of the mischief. If some bell rings continuously, there must be a short circuit in the push or pushes somewhere; the upper spring of one of the pushes may have got bent, or have otherwise caught in the lower spring. Pulls are very subject to this defect. By violent manipulations on the part of mischievous butcher or baker boys, the return spring may be broken, or so far weakened as not to return the pull into the "off" position. If, the batteries being in good order, any bell rings feebly, there is either leakage along its line, or else bad contact in the push or in the connections of the wires to and from the push. There should be platinum contacts at the ends of the push springs; if there are not, the springs may have worked dirty at the points of contact, hence the poor current and poor ringing. It is seldom that the bells themselves, unless, indeed, of the lowest quality,[Pg 185] give any serious trouble. Still the set screw may have shaken loose (which must then be adjusted and tightened up), or the platinum speck has got solder on its face and therefore got oxidised. This may be scraped carefully with a penknife until bright. Or, purposely or inadvertently, no platinum is on the speck at all, only the solder. A piece of platinum foil should be soldered on the spot, if this is so. Or again (and this only in very bad bells), the electro-magnets being of hard iron, may have retained a certain amount of permanent magnetism, and pull the armature into permanent contact with itself. This can be remedied by sticking a thin piece of paper (stamp paper will do) over the poles of the magnet, between them and the armature. In no case should the fitter cut or draw up out of tubes, etc., any wire or wires, without having first ascertained that the fault is in that wire; for, however carefully joints are made, it is rare that the jointed places are so thoroughly insulated as they were before the cutting and subsequent joining were undertaken. To avoid as much as possible cutting uselessly, let every binding screw be examined and tightened up, and every length of wire, which it is possible to get at, be tested for continuity before any "slashing" at the wires, or furious onslaughts on the indicator be consummated.
§ 78. When the technician is called to locate issues that may have arisen in an installation that was set up some time ago, before getting started, they should ask questions about what kind of problem there is, and when and where it shows up. If all the bells have broken down and won't ring, either the battery or the main go and return wires are at fault. The technician should check the battery, looking over the binding screws and connected wires for corrosion. If everything looks good, the batteries themselves should be tested to see if they are providing the correct amount of current. This should be done with the quantity coil of the detector. If the battery is faulty, it’s a good idea to replace the zincs and recharge the battery, provided that the porous cell is still in good condition; if not, new cells should be used instead of the old ones. If the battery is fine and none of the bells ring, there could be a break, bad contact, or short circuit in the main wires near the battery causing the issue. If a bell rings continuously, there is likely a short circuit in the push button or buttons somewhere; one of the upper springs may have bent or gotten stuck in the lower spring. Push buttons are very prone to this problem. Due to rough handling by mischievous boys from the butcher or baker, the return spring may be broken or weakened so it doesn’t bring the button back to the “off” position. If the batteries are in good shape and a bell still rings weakly, there’s either leakage along the line or bad contact in the push button or at the connections of the wires to and from the button. There should be platinum contacts at the ends of the push springs; if not, the springs may be dirty at the contact points, which causes poor current and weak ringing. It’s rare for the bells themselves, unless they are of very low quality, to cause serious issues. However, the set screw could have come loose (which needs to be adjusted and tightened), or the platinum contact could have solder on its surface and become oxidized. This can be carefully scraped with a penknife to make it bright again. Or, intentionally or unintentionally, there might be no platinum on the contact at all, just the solder. In this case, a piece of platinum foil should be soldered onto the spot. Additionally (and only in really bad bells), the electro-magnets, being made of hard iron, may have picked up some permanent magnetism and hold the armature in constant contact with itself. This can be resolved by placing a thin piece of paper (like stamp paper) over the poles of the magnet, between them and the armature. In no situation should the technician cut or draw up any wire without first confirming that the fault lies in that wire; because, no matter how carefully connections are made, it is uncommon for the jointed areas to be as well insulated as they were before any cutting and reconnecting occurred. To minimize unnecessary cutting, every binding screw should be checked and tightened, and any accessible wire should be tested for continuity before any "slashing" of wires or reckless assault on the indicator takes place.
In conclusion, I beg to record my thanks for the very generous assistance which I have received in the compilation of the foregoing pages from the electrical firms of Messrs. Blakey Emmot, Binswanger, Gent, Judson, Jensen, and Thorpe.
In conclusion, I want to express my gratitude for the generous help I received from the electrical companies of Messrs. Blakey Emmot, Binswanger, Gent, Judson, Jensen, and Thorpe in putting together the previous pages.
ADDENDUM.
The Gassner Battery.
Since the compilation of the foregoing pages, a dry battery, known by the above name, has found great favour with electric-bell fitters. Its peculiarity consists in the zinc element forming the outside cell. In this is placed the carbon, which is separated from the zinc by a thick paste or jelly made of gypsum and oxide of zinc. The cell can be placed in any position, works as well on its side as upright, is not subject to creeping, has an E.M.F. of about 1·5 volt, with an internal resistance of only 0·25 ohm in the round form, and 0·6 in the flat form. The Gassner dry battery polarizes much less quickly than the ordinary Leclanché. The only defects at present noticeable, are the flimsy connections, and the fact that the outer cases being metal must be carefully guarded from touching one another. This can be effected by enclosing in a partitioned wooden box.[Pg 187]
Since the compilation of the previous pages, a dry battery, known by the name above, has become very popular with electric-bell installers. Its uniqueness lies in the zinc element forming the outer cell. Inside, there is carbon, which is separated from the zinc by a thick paste or jelly made of gypsum and zinc oxide. The cell can be positioned in any way; it works just as well on its side as it does upright, is not prone to leakage, has an E.M.F. of about 1.5 volts, and an internal resistance of only 0.25 ohms in round form and 0.6 in flat form. The Gassner dry battery polarizes much less quickly than the standard Leclanché. The only noticeable issues at this time are the weak connections and the fact that the outer cases are metal and must be kept from touching each other. This can be managed by enclosing them in a partitioned wooden box.[Pg 187]
INDEX.
A.
A.
- Acid, Chromic, 33, 46
- Hydrobromic, 20
- Hydrochloric, 20
- Hydriodic, 20
- Nitric, 20
- Sulphuric, 20
- Action in Bichromate, 47
- Dotting, 116
- of electric bell, 81
- Leclanché, 35
- Relay, 134
- Rubbing, 116
- of zinc on acids, 21
- Agglomerate block, 38
- Cell, 38
- Compo, 38
- Alarms, Burglar, 113
- Fire, 123
- Frost, 121
- Thermometer, 122
- Thief, 113
- Watch, 124
- Amber, 1
- Ampère, 55
- Ampère's law, 11
- Annealing iron, 13
- Arrangement of bells for lifts, 171
- Ships, 170
- Attraction, 3
B.
B.
- Batteries, 18
- Battery agglomerate, 39
- Battery, Bichromate, 48
- Bunsen, 33
- Chromic acid, 46
- Daniell's, 29
- Gassner (addendum), 186
- Gent's, 44
- Gravity, 31
- Modified, 120
- Grenet, 46
- Grove, 33
- Judson's, 41
- Leclanché, 33
- Reversed, 46
- Minotto, 31
- Smee's, 27
- Walker's, 27
- Bell action, case for, 88
- Blocks, wooden, 150
- Bobbins, electric bell, 67
- Box for batteries, 43
- Brushes, dynamo, 17
C.
C.
- Cable, many stranded, 174
- Case for bell action, 88
- Cells in parallel, 57
- series, 53
- Charging fluid, recipes, 48
- Fuller, 49
- Circuits, closed, 52, 118
- Of bells complete in house, 168
- For signalling, 167
- In both directions, 168[Pg 188]
- Circuits of bells with Morse key, 165
- In parallel, 161
- Series, 162
- With relay, 164
- Single bell and wire, 159
- Earth, 160
- Two pushes, 161
- Push and pull, 161
- Open, 52
- Closed circuit system, 118
- Code for signalling, 130
- Coil spring, 108
- Conductors, 3
- Connecting up, 144, 159
- Contacts, burglar alarm, 113
- Door, 116
- Drawer, 121
- Floor, 113
- For closed circuits, 121
- Mackenzie's humming, 113
- Shop door, 116
- Till, 121
- Watch alarm, 124
- Window sash, 116
- Corrugated carbons, 41
- Creeping in cells, 43
- To remedy, 44
- Callow's attachment, 99
- Current, 54
- To ring bell, 145
D.
D.
- Daniell's cell, 29
- Action in, 29
- Deflection of needle, 9, 11
- Detector or galvanometer, to make, 178
- Detent lever, 94
- Door contact, 116
- Dotting action, 116
- Drawing out plans, 169
- Dynamo, 15
- Armature, 16
- Brushes, 17
- Commutator, 17
- Dynamo, Cumulative effects, 17
- Field magnets, 16
E.
E.
- Earth, 52
- Plate, 53
- Return, 153
- Electric bell, action of, 81
- Armature, 74
- Base, 61
- Bobbins, 67
- Contact screw, 75
- Continuous, 92
- Circular bell, 106
- Gong, 77
- How to make, 60
- In lifts, 171
- Ships, 170
- Jensen's, 101
- Joining E. M. wire, 73
- Magnets, 63
- Magneto, 174
- Mining, 106
- Paraffining, 69
- Platinum tip, 76
- Putting together, 78
- Single stroke, 91
- Spring, 74
- Thorpe's, 100
- Trembling, 81, 90
- Winding wire on, 71
- Wire for, 69
- Trumpet, 107
- Electricity, sources of, 2
- Electrodes, 26
- Electro-motive force, 51
- Electron, 1
- E.M.F., 51
- Excitation, 6
F.
F.
- Faults to detect, 182
- Fire alarms, 123
- Floor contacts, 113[Pg 189]
- Frost alarms, 121
- Fuller charging, 49
G.
G.
- Galvanometer, 176
- Gas evolved, 18
- Gassner battery (addendum), 186
- Generator (magneto), 174
- Gent's battery, 44
- Glue, Prout's elastic, 148
- Graphite, 27
- Gravity battery, 31
- Daniell battery, 31
- Modified, 120
- Grenet battery, 46
- Grove battery, 33
- Gutta-percha, 148
I.
I.
- Indicator, 135
- Automatic, 138
- Drop, 136
- Electric replacement, 136
- Gent's, 140
- Tripolar, 143
- Mechanical replacement, 136
- Mode of coupling up, 142
- Pendulum, 139
- Polarised, 139
- Self replacing, 136
- Semaphore, 136
- Inductor, 174
- Insulation, 68
- Insulators, 4
- Internal resistance, 56
- Interior of push, 151
- Iron, importance of soft, 65
- Yoke, 66
J.
J.
K.
K.
- Key, Morse, 129
L.
L.
- Leakage, 52
- Leclanché cell, 33
- reversed, 46
- Legge's contact, 115
- Lever switches, 128
- Lifts, bells for, 171
- Localising faults, 144, 175
- Lodge bell, 169
M.
M.
- Magnetic field, 14
- Magneto bells, 175
- Electric machines, 14, 15
- Magnets, 13
- Magnets producing electricity, 14
- Magnetisation of iron, 12
- Steel, 13
- Manganese oxide, 33
- Minotto cell, 31
- Modified gravity battery, 120
- Morse key, 129
- Musical instrument, novel, 108
N.
N.
O.
O.
P.
P.
- Paraffin, 69, 170
- Percha, gutta, 148
- Plans, drawing out, 169
- [Pg 190] Platinum, riveting, 76
- Platinum, use of, 76
- Plug switches, 128
- Polarisation, 26
- Positive electricity, 7
- Proportions of bell parts, table of, 89
- Pressels, 111
- Prout's elastic glue, 148
- Pulls, 111
- Push, 92, 151, 109
- Interior of, 151
- Joining wires to, 151
R.
R.
- Relay, 96, 133
- Action of, 134
- Repulsion, 3
- Resinous electricity, 7
- Resistance of wire, table of, 146
- Return current, 153
- Riveting platinum, 76
- Rubbing action, 116
S.
S.
- Ships, bells for, 170
- Shop door contact, 116
- Signalling by bells, 130
- Code, 130
- Silver platinised, 27
- Single cell, 9
- Sizes of Leclanché's, 42
- Smee's cell, 27
- Spring coil, 108
- Standard size of wires, 146
- Switches, lever, 128
- Plug, 128
T.
T.
- Table of batteries, E.M.F. and R., 58
- Conductors and insulators, 4, 68
- Metals in acid, 8
- Table of Proportions of bell parts, 89
- Wire resistance, etc., 146
- Testing new work, 182
- Old, 183
- Thermometer alarms, 122
- Thorpe's Ball, 100
U.
U.
- Use of platinum, 76
V.
V.
W.
W.
- Walker's cell, 27
- Watchman's clock, 124
- Water level indicator, 127
- Washer, insulating, 77
- Window sash contact, 116
- Wiping contact, 102
- Wire covering, 147
- In iron pipes, 152
- In wooden boxes, 152
- Iron, 152
- Joining, 148
- To push, 151
- Laying in tubes, 149
- Leading, 147, 150
- Overhead, 152
- Resistance, table of, 146
- Return, 147, 150
- Soldering iron, 148
- Tinned, 147
- Underground, 152
- Wiring, general instructions, 155
- Up, 144
Z.
Z.
WILLIAM RIDER AND SON, PRINTERS, LONDON.
WILLIAM RIDER AND SON, PRINTERS, LONDON.
Small crown 8vo, cloth. With many Illustrations.
Small crown 8vo, cloth. With many Illustrations.
WHITTAKER'S LIBRARY OF ARTS, SCIENCES, MANUFACTURES AND INDUSTRIES.
MANAGEMENT OF ACCUMULATORS AND PRIVATE ELECTRIC LIGHT INSTALLATIONS.
MANAGEMENT OF ACCUMULATORS AND PRIVATE ELECTRIC LIGHT INSTALLATIONS.
A Practical Handbook by Sir David Salomons, Bart., M. A.
A Practical Handbook by Sir David Salomons, Bart., M. A.
4th Edition, Revised and Enlarged, with 32 Illustrations. Cloth 3s.
4th Edition, Revised and Expanded, with 32 Illustrations. Cloth £3.
"To say that this book is the best of its kind would be a poor compliment, as it is practically the only work on accumulators that has been written."—Electrical Review.
"To claim that this book is the best of its kind would be a weak compliment since it is almost the only work on accumulators that has been created."—Electrical Review.
ELECTRICAL INSTRUMENT-MAKING FOR AMATEURS. A Practical Handbook. By S. R. Bottone, Author of "The Dynamo," &c. With 60 Illustrations. Second Edition. Cloth 3s.
ELECTRICAL INSTRUMENT-MAKING FOR AMATEURS. A Practical Handbook. By S.R. Bottone, Author of "The Dynamo," etc. With 60 Illustrations. Second Edition. Cloth £3.
ELECTRIC BELLS. By S. R. Bottone. With numerous Illustrations.
ELECTRIC BELLS. By S.R. Bottone. With numerous illustrations.
In Preparation.
Getting Ready.
THE PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS FROM LIGHTNING. A Treatise on the Theory of Lightning Conductors from a Modern Point of View. Being the substance of two lectures delivered before the Society of Arts in March, 1888. By Oliver J. Lodge, LL.D., D.Sc, F.R.S., Professor of Physics in University College, Liverpool.
THE PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS FROM LIGHTNING. A Treatise on the Theory of Lightning Conductors from a Modern Point of View. Being the substance of two lectures delivered before the Society of Arts in March, 1888. By Oliver J. Lodge, LL.D., D.Sc, F.R.S., Professor of Physics in University College, Liverpool.
Published with various amplifications and additions, with the approval of the Society of Arts.
Published with various enhancements and additions, with the approval of the Society of Arts.
ELECTRICAL INFLUENCE MACHINES: Containing a full account of their historical development, their modern Forms, and their Practical Construction. By J. Gray, B.Sc.
ELECTRICAL INFLUENCE MACHINES: Providing a complete overview of their historical development, modern designs, and practical construction. By J. Gray, B.Sc.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING IN OUR WORKSHOPS. A Practical Handbook. By Sydney F. Walker.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING IN OUR WORKSHOPS. A Practical Handbook. By Sydney F. Walker.
[Ready Shortly
[Coming Soon
Transcriber's Notes
Page 12: changed "guage" to "gauge" ( ... cotton-covered copper wire, say No. 20 gauge ...)
Page 12: changed "guage" to "gauge" ( ... cotton-covered copper wire, say No. 20 gauge ...)
Page 35: changed "change" to "charge" ( ... losing at the same time its electrical charge ...)
Page 35: changed "change" to "charge" ( ... losing at the same time its electrical charge ...)
Page 55: changed "guage" to "gauge" ( ... 1 foot of No. 41 gauge pure copper wire ...)
Page 55: changed "guage" to "gauge" ( ... 1 foot of No. 41 gauge pure copper wire ...)
Page 64: changed "exaet" to "exact" ( ... of the exact diameter of the turned ends of the cores ...)
Page 64: changed "exaet" to "exact" ( ... of the exact diameter of the turned ends of the cores ...)
Page 73: moved comma "Rivetting, is" to "Rivetting is," (Rivetting, is perhaps, the best mode ...)
Page 73: moved comma "Rivetting, is" to "Rivetting is," (Rivetting is perhaps the best mode ...)
Page 81: added hyphen ( ... along the short length of wire to the right-hand binding-screw ...)
Page 81: added hyphen ( ... along the short length of wire to the right-hand binding screw ...)
Page 83: changed "head" to "heads" ( ... the possible defects of electric bells may be classed under four heads: ...)
Page 83: changed "head" to "heads" ( ... the possible defects of electric bells can be categorized into four groups: ...)
Page 92: changed "its" to "it" ( ... until it rests against the stop or studs.)
Page 92: changed "its" to "it" ( ... until it rests against the stop or studs.)
Page 102: changed "contract-breaker" to "contact-breaker" (When the contact-breaker is used, ...)
Page 102: changed "contract-breaker" to "contact-breaker" (When the contact-breaker is used, ...)
Page 103: changed "instead" to "Instead" (Instead of the armature and clapper ...)
Page 103: changed "instead" to "Instead" (Instead of the armature and clapper ...)
Page 132: in the Morse code for "BRING THE", the code for "H" has been corrected from two dots to four dots.
Page 132: in the Morse code for "BRING THE", the code for "H" has been corrected from two dots to four dots.
Page 136: changed "eletro-magnet" to "electro-magnet" ( ... if the electro-magnet were energised ...)
Page 136: changed "eletro-magnet" to "electro-magnet" ( ... if the electro-magnet were powered ...)
Page 137: changed "idicator" to "indicator" (since the indicator falls forwards)
Page 137: changed "idicator" to "indicator" (since the indicator falls forward)
Page 146: changed "arrangment" to "arrangement" (the size and arrangement of the batteries and wires)
Page 146: changed "arrangment" to "arrangement" (the size and arrangement of the batteries and wires)
Page 146: added comma "nails," ( ... chance contact with nails, staples, metal pipes or other wires ...)
Page 146: added comma "nails," ( ... chance contact with nails, staples, metal pipes, or other wires ...)
Page 179: changed "carboard" to "cardboard" ( ... for our purpose we will choose cardboard.)
Page 179: changed "carboard" to "cardboard" ( ... for our purposes we will choose cardboard.)
Page 179: changed "Tanstickor" to "Tãndstickor" ( ... double it to the form of a Tãndstickor match-box, ...)
Page 179: changed "Tanstickor" to "Tãndstickor" ( ... double it to the form of a Tãndstickor match-box, ...)
Page 185: suspected typo (unchanged) "Emmot" should perhaps be "Emmott" (... the electrical firms of Messrs. Blakey Emmot, ...)
Page 185: suspected typo (unchanged) "Emmot" should maybe be "Emmott" (... the electrical companies of Messrs. Blakey Emmot, ...)
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!